MARINE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY.

mi

Received

Accession No. 7 Z

Given by/ , W?W3

o.c... / . (je<W7.Qvr^rLi^ ^

«*3

Place,

•..^=. »r=«,^r=:,:- - —

JAMES ROBB, M. D.

BULLETIN

Natural History Society

NEW BRUNSWICK.

No. XVI,

PUBLISHED BY THE SOCIETY.

SAINT JOHN, N. B.:

Barnes & Co., 84 Prince William Street.
1898.

BULLETIN

OF THE

Natural History Society

NEW BRUNSWICK.

ARTICLE I.

DR. JAMES ROBB.

First Professor of Chemistry and Natural History in King's College,
Fredericton — A Sketch of His Life and Labours,

By L. VV. Bailey, LL. D.

Read April 5, 1898.

In the course of the development of knowledge as regards the
structure, history and natural resources of a country, it is usually the
case that distinct steps of progress may be recognized, and that with
each of such steps the life and laboui's of some one individual are prom-
inently associated. The names of such men as Aristotle, Linnseus,
Cuvier, Agassiz and Gray, make such steps of progress for the world
at large, but even within the comparatively narrow limits of a single
state or community a like process of development by successive, well
marked stages is usually recognizable, and New Brunswick is no ex-
ception.

The first period in all such cases is usually that in which some one
individual, as a result either of a more intense sympathy with nature
or circumstances especially favorable for her study, devotes his whole
energy to such work, and thus, by gathering and comparing the isolated
and disconnected observations of many observers, begins to give to the
latter a definite direction and definite methods. To us who have to
labour in fields already pre-occupied by so many workers, and where
the discovery of even one new fact or species is a rare occurrence, in

2 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

some departments indeed well-nigh an impossibility, a glance backward
into the territories investigated by the early pioneers cannot but awaken
a feeling of envy. On whichever side they turned something entirely
novel was almost sure to meet their gaze. They had only to stretch
out their hands and a veritable Klondyke of rich rewards awaited
their grasp. No wonder that their imaginations were aroused to the
highest pitch, and that conclusions and anticipations should be indulged
in, which would require time and the crucible of criticism, and more
exact observation to reduce to their proper value. In New Brunswick
the period of pioneer exploration, and of enthusiastic but not always
well justified prophecy, is identified with the name of Dr. Abraham
Gesner, a sketch of whose life and labours has been published by the
Society in its No. XV. Bulletin. That of the beginning of more exact
observation and of critical analysis is similarly associated with the
subject of the present sketch, Dr. James Robb.

Dr. Robb was born in the city of Stirling, Scotland, in the year
1815. Of his early life and education I have been unable to obtain
any particulars, but, from letters written at the time, I find that he
entered upon a course of medical study in Edinburgh University in
the year 1831. He could hardly have ever entered seriously upon the
practice of his profession, for in August of the year 1835 we find him
travelling, while still a student, on the continent of Europe, and in
September, 1837, he had already come to New Brunswick to accept
the position of Lecturer in Chemistry and Natural History in King's
College (now the University of New Brunswick), in which as Professor
he continued to work until the time of his death, in 1861.

It is very evident that, even at the time of his European journey,
which lasted for several months, he had already acquired a fondness
for scientific, as distinguished from merely medical or professional,
work, for he himself says, in writing to his mother, that the trip "was
more for science than for pleasure," and resulted in the " collection of
vast numbers of plants and shells and minerals." He must also have
already gained for himself an enviable reputation as a naturalist, for
he was accompanied by Dr. Van Beneden, already well known in the
scientific world, and carried with him letters to many distinguished
savants, making, as he says, the entire journey a "voyage cV agrement."
Switzerland would seem to have had special attractions for him, though
Nice, Milan, Genoa and Sardinia were also visited. The journey was
made on foot, and in the passage of the Juras was not unattended with
danger, the party being on one occasion storm-bound for three days in

A SKETCH OF THE LIFE AND LABOURS OF DR. ROBB. 3

a hut on the Auberge, from which they only escaped with difficulty,
and where, to use his own words, "had they been much longer confined,
they would have had to eat each other, like the Kilkenny cats, because
there was nothing else to eat." He grows quite enthusiastic over their
reception at the University of Pavia, where, despite their clothing,
much the worse for travel, " the Professors of that time-honored seat
of learning vied with each other in attentions and affability, one giving
us objects of natural history, another presenting us with his works,
and a third giving us iced sherbets and chocolate." He would never,
he says, " think of his visit to Pavia but with feelings of the highest
gratification." He adds that not at Pavia only, but throughout the
journey, every moment was not only pleasurable, but of inestimable
value to him. He was constantly in an atmosphere of science, and as
the collections then made were undoubtedly those which subsequently
became the nucleus of the cabinet now in the Univei'sity in Frederic-
ton, the writer of this notice, to whom these facts have only recently
become known, can now the more readily understand, as he has always
been surprised at, their extent and value.

The special circumstances which led to Dr. Robb's coming to New
Brunswick are not definitely known ; but as about the same time at
least one other Professor from Scotland came to the Provinces for
a similar purpose, it is probable that enquiries or advertisements had
been instituted there with a view to the obtaining of properly qualified
instructors. However this may have been, it is certain that Dr. Robb
had not long been here before his influence began to be felt in the
community. Accustomed to cultured society, fond of music, well read
in the literature of the day, and, though not practising medicine,
recoguized universally as one thoroughly competent to advise, and, in
the case of the poor, ever ready to give advice without compensation,
he could not fail to be an acquisition to any community, and especially
to such a one as then existed in Fredericton. Proofs of the estimation
in which he was held are not wanting. Old residents of the city, and
among all classes, speak of him even now in terms of the highest regard.
His opinion was sought upon many subjects outside the line of his
ordinary professional work. He was the first President and the most
active spirit in the Fredericton Athenreum, a society or club for the
promotion of literary and scientific research ; he was nominated, in
1849, and chosen a member of the first Council of his adopted city,
and again in 1850, in this latter case declining to serve that he might
be the more free to ^ive his attention to what he conceived to be a

4 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

still more important duty — the promotion of the agricultural interests
of the Province. He enjoyed in an eminent degree the confidence of
the then Lieutenant-Governor of New Brunswick, Sir Wm. Colebrook,
as also that of the Bishop, the Chief Justice, the Master of the Rolls,
and the other chief officials of the colony. As a teacher he was loved
as well as respected by his pupils, seeking always for accuracy and
clearness of statement rather than for a show of words, and endeavor-
ing, as far as his very isolated position and remoteness from books and
fellow-laborers would allow, to keep himself acquainted with the latest
results of scientific thought and experiment. In December, 1840, he
married Miss Ellen Coster, daughter of the Archdeacon of New Bruns-
wick, and from that time his residence in the College building was a
centre from which he continued to influence for good a constantly
widening circle of individuals and of interests.

We, as naturalists, are chiefly concerned with his scientific labours.
As might be expected, the natural products of a country quite new to
him were quick to attract his attention, and the dates attached
to specimens in the college herbarium show how soon after his arrival
he entered upon the study of the botany of the Province. Practically
he was our first botanist, for though others had made a few scattered
observations on the occurrence of particular species, he seems to have
been the first to attempt anything like a systematic collection. This
collection is now in the museum of the University of New Brunswick,
and embraces several hundred species, some of them forms of very
rare occurrence, and some species re-discovered long afterwards by
other observers. It was, of course, arranged on the old Linnsean
system, but both in its extent and in the accuracy of its determinations
shows clearly the labour expended upon its preparation. It is to be
regretted that in this, as in so many other instances, the results of his
work were never printed, so that little besides the collections which
he made remains to indicate the extent of his services. He must,
however, have maintained correspondence and exchanged specimens
with naturalists abroad, as along with his own collection are many
specimens sent from the herbaria of Messrs. Hooker and Balfour. He
must also have continued to enjoy an enviable reputation anion- the
botanists of the motherland, as his letters indicate the interesting fact
of his having been suggested as a possible successor to Sir W. Hooker
in the botanical chair in Glasgow, a position which, however, he says
that he could not, in view of his engagements here, honourably
accept.

A SKETCH OF THE LIFE AND LABOURS OF DR. ROBB. 5

A study of the wild plants of the Province was accompanied by an
interest in the cultivated forms and in the conditions of their produc-
tion. In April, 1850, having refused to be elected to the Fredericton
City Council, he took hold of a Provincial Society for Encouragement
of Agriculture, which, he says, " gave him more to do than the Council."
He was elected its president, and soon after wrote a paper on the
subject of Manures, which, with others, was afterwards printed,
though no copies, so far as known to the writer, are now extant.
Practically, he became Secretary of Agriculture for the Province, an
office not actually established until a much later period, retaining the
position until his death, and in that capacity visiting many parts of
the Province, giving frequent lectures on agricultural subjects, and
correlating the statistical returns submitted to him by his many
correspondents. I have before me his lecture, " On Agricultural
Progress in New Brunswick," and find it to be a model of terse state-
ment, extended observation, careful criticism of existing methods, and
sound judgment in the direction of possible improvement. The
government of to-day could not do better than to have this lecture
reprinted and widely circulated among the class for whom it was
chiefly intended.

Such a man as Dr. Robb would of course naturalty understand
the intimate relationship between the nature of soils and that of the
rocks from which they are derived. His interest in geology had,
moreover, already been aroused by his European tour, the fruits of
which were before him, and no doubt employed in the illustration of
his daily lectures. We may be sure, therefore, that it was with no
indifferent eye that he scanned the results of the geological survey
begun by Dr. Gesner in 1837, and continued during the four follow-
ing years.

In the commencement of this sketch it was stated that Dr. Robb
represents the second period in the history of scientific progress in
New Brunswick. Strictly speaking, he and Dr. Gesner were contem-
poraries, but the first published observations of Dr. Robb, of a geolo-
gical nature, are subsequent to those of Dr. Gesner, and are largely in
the direction of criticism of the latter, — criticisms, however, based on
his own personal observations aud evidently having no other object
than that of reaching more reliable conclusions. These criticisms are
mostly contained in the report of Prof. J. W. F. Johnston on the
Agricultural Capabilities of New Brunswick. Dr. Robb here especially
objects to the enthusiastic and in many instances grossly exaggerated

b BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

statements of Dr. Gesner, relative to the occurrence of coal, and shows,
by reference to all known outcrops, that the coal field of New Bruns-
wick, instead of being one of the largest discovered on the globe, as
stated by Gesner, was really small as compared with those of Illinois
and Pennsylvania, and that the coal supply, instead of being " inex-
haustible " and "of the highest importance not only to New Brunswick
but to Great Britain and the United States," was really very small,
the only workable seam known, and that of limited extent (the Grand
Lake seam), not exceeding eighteen or twenty inches.

Another point in which Dr. Bobb took issue with Dr. Gesner, of
less economic significance, but still involving important consequences,
was that of the true stratigraphical position of the red saliferous and
gypsiferous rocks which cover such large areas in southern and some
parts of northern New Brunswick. These, on account of their
lithological resemblances to the rocks of the New Red Sandstone
formation of England, with which he was familiar, were asserted by
Dr. Gesner to be newer than the Coal formation, whereas Dr. Robb,
following the view of Sir Charles Lyell, maintained, and correctly,
that the greater part of them are really older than the coal measures.

But the most important contribution in this direction made by
Dr. Robb is that of a Geological Map, contributed to Prof. Johnston's
Report, in which, taking Dr. Gesner's incomplete maps as a basis, but
modifying them as influenced by his own observations, as well as by
those of Jackson, Logan and Lyell, he makes a distinct advance in the
representation of the geological structure of the Province. With
characteristic modesty, however, he observes that the map, made at
Prof. Johnston's request, is unsatisfactory to himself, and is offered
with very great diffidence.

In a sketch of the scientific work of Dr. Gesner, prepared by
Dr. G. F. Matthew, and published in a Bulletin of this Society
(No. XV, 1897), a very full discussion of the former's view is given,
together with a representation of his map reduced from the map in
the hands of the Natural History Society of New Brunswick, showing
the result of his first three years' survey, and the more complete one
in the possession of the Crown Lands Department at PrederictOD,
which shows also the work of his fourth year. Unfortunately we are
without any record of Dr. Robb's observations and conclusions,
excepting the very brief observations embraced in the letter to Prof.
Johnston accompanying his own map. We are therefore limited to a

A SKETCH OF THE LIFE AND LABOURS OF DR. ROBB. I

mere statement of the differences presented by the latter, as compared
with the earlier map of Gesner, on which it is avowedly based.

The first feature to attract attention in such comparison is the
larger area embraced in the map of Dr. Eobb, the latter including
the whole Province, while that of Gesner did not extend, except along
the St. John river, north of a line connecting Woodstock and Chatham.
Gesner's map, however, represents the results of his first four season's
work only, while in the following year he made explorations of the
northern counties sufficient to indicate their general character, and it
is upon these, no doubt, that the completion of the work by Dr. Robb
is based.

In his representation of the distribution of the granites which are
so conspicuous a feature in the geology of New Brunswick, Dr. Robb's
map — at least as regards the southern part of the Province — is less
fortunate than that of Dr. Gesner, the more recent explorations em-
bodied in the maps of the Geological Survey showing, especially in
Charlotte County and Western Kings, a much closer approximation to
the outlines as given by the latter than to those of the former. Gesner
also indicates the existence of an axis of such rock extending from the
Kennebeccasis River, near Hampton, to Eastern Albert, which in the
map of Dr. Robb is represented by a corresponding band of " Trap,
Syenite, Felspar Rock and Porphyry." As a matter of fact, this ridge
includes but little true granite.

The northern granite belt, represented in Gesner's map only between
the St. Croix River and the St. John, in that of Dr. Robb is extended
across the Province to Bathurst. The granitic area of the Serpentine
is also indicated.

The including of so many different rocks under a common colour,
irrespective of age or origin, as in the case of the Trap, etc., referred
to above, is, in the maps of both authors under review, an unfortunate
feature, but is far more conspicuous in that of Dr. Robb than in that
of his predecessor, the former being in almost all parts, not occupied
by the coal-formation or red sandstones, blotched with small patches
represented as occupied by one or other of these rocks, and which
include intrusives of every age from the Laurentian to the Trias.

As regards the earlier Palaeozoic rocks, the two maps differ widely,
the Cambrian system being made, in that of Dr. Robb, to include
large portions of Charlotte and Kings Counties, which in that of Dr.
Gesner are represented as granitic or trappean, while the great band
of slates and quartzites north of the York County granites, and includ-

8 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

ing the area about Woodstock, represented by Gesner simply as clay
slate or argilhtes, and differently marked from that of the similar belt
south of the granite, is by Robb, and correctly, made of the same age
as the latter. It is probable that in referring both of these great belts,
which are more or less metalliferous, to the Cambrian system, Gesner
and Robb were, upon the whole, more correct than the officers of the
Geological Survey so many years later.

In Gesner's map a considerable belt of rock skirting the southern
seaboard from Passamaquoddy Bay to Chignecto Bay, and now known
to be Pre-Cambrian (Laurentian and Huronian), is referred to the
Lower Silurian, or its supposed equivalent, the Graywacke System.
This, undoubtedly the oldest group of rocks in the Province, and a
part of the Acadian protaxis, is by Robb made still younger, or Upper
.Silurian, possibly through the knowledge of the occurrence of Upper
Silurian shells in some of the areas, such as Passamaquoddy Bay, where
they are to some extent associated with and overlie the beds of the
older system ; or, the fact that such Upper Silurian rocks had been
shown by Jackson to occupy large areas along the coast of Maine,
rendered it probable that the apparent extension of these in New
Brunswick should be referable to the same horizon. The Upper
Silurian rocks of Northern New Brunswick, not indicated in the in-
complete map of Dr. Gesner, are by Dr. Robb clearly distinguished,
the lines representing its southern margin showing a somewhat close
approximation to their true position as determined by later investiga-
tion. On the north the border is made to exclude Temiscouata Lake,
of which the greater part is really bordered by Silurian strata.

In this connection the following extract from a letter of Sir Wm.
Dawson to Mr. S. W. Kain, in answer to certain enquiries of the latter,
will be read with interest :

As stuted in Acadian Geology, p. 502, the first fossil plant seen by me from
the Devonian of southern New Brunswick was a Calamite (('. i<i<li<tiiis Brongt.
C. transitionis Goept.), afterward illustrated by many specimens from the
vicinity of St. John. This specimen Dr. Robb brought to .Montreal. I think,
.it, the time of the meeting of the American Association herein 1857. At the
time these rocks near St. John were supposed to \»- Lower Silurian, and the
Calamite showed that there must be newer beds there, though it was a species

not found in the eoal formation. I suggested at tin' time to \h\ Robb that QH

his return he should endeavour to ascertain if other fossil plants were present,
and what portion of the slates and sandstone rocks near St. John contained
them. This he proposed to do, hut did not live to carry cut his intentions, and
the work fell into the hands of Messrs. Matthew and Haiti, by whom it was so

-uceessfully carried out. I did nol know if Dr. Robb had any conference with

A SKETCH OF THE LIFE AND LABOURS OF DR. ROBB. 9

these gentlemen on the matter ; but after his death I know I encouraged them
to collect, though I had no idea of the rich results that were to reward their
researches, and especially those of Mr. Matthew.

Sir William goes on to say: " I regarded Dr. Robb as an accom-
plished geologist, though I often regretted that the pressure of educa-
tional and other work, and perhaps his own quiet and retiring disposition,
prevented him from cultivating more extensively the field for original
research presented to him in New Brunswick."

In this connection it is gratifying to know that one of the largest
and moot abundant of the fossil plants found in the Fern Ledges at
Carleton is a Cordaites, bearing the specific designation of C. Robbii.

No Devonian rocks, as such, are distinguished in the map of Dr.
Robb, those of the vicinity of St. John and Lepreau being included in
the supposed Upper Silurian area, while those of Passamaquoddy Bay
(St. Andrews' peninsula) are, not unnaturally, associated with the red
rocks of Kings and Westmorland and Albert, under the lithological
designation of " Red Sandstones," etc. These, as already stated, were
by Gesner regarded as newer than the coal formation, while by Robb
they were looked upon as being beneath the latter, and " of the age of
the mountain limestone, or perhaps of the Devonian strata. As it is
now known that these " red sandstones," etc., include not only the
equivalents of the mountain limestone and other lower carboniferous
strata, but the Devonian plant-bearing beds of Perry, Maine, and those
which, on the Bay Chaleur, hold remains of Coccosteus, Pterichthys, and
other fishes of the old red sandstone type, it will be seen that Dr.
Robb's anticipations in this respect have been fully confirmed. It is
to be noticed, also, that the area assigned to these red rocks in Albert
and Westmorland Counties is greatly reduced in the map of Dr. Robb,
the districts thus represented being referred, though not with strict
accuracy as to limits, to the coal formation.

The Lower Carboniferous outlier of the Tobique Valley is correctly
indicated, though not definitely referred to this formation.

With the exception above referred to, the tracts assigned to the
coal formation, as outlined by Dr. Robb, agree with those of Dr. Gesner
and with the results of later observations. In their estimate, however,
of the productive capacity of the coal field, the views of the two authors
differ widely, those of Dr. Robb being far more moderate, and; as now
believed, much nearer the truth.

It has been already stated that the red sandstones, etc., regarded
by Dr. Gesner as " New Red," were by Dr. Robb referred to a Lower

10 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

Carboniferous or Devonian horizon. The existence of true Triassic
beds, occupying as they do extremely limited areas on the coast, and
not readily distinguished from associated Carboniferous strata, do not
appear to have been known to him. The accompanying traps, with
those of Grand Manan, are not, in the maps of either author, distin-
guished from other eruptives or assigned to any definite period.

Upon the whole, the map of Dr. Robb, though confessedly based
upon that of Dr. Gesner, shows the results of extensive original obser-
vation and reflection, and though in some instances, as stated, less
correct in its representations than tho former, shows a decided advance
in the direction of sound views and more exact limitations. It was
the first published geological map of New Brunswick, and, so far as
this Province was concerned, was reproduced, without essential change,
in that accompanying the first edition of the '' Acadian Geology'' of
Sir William Dawson.

Another, among the comparatively few instances in which Dr.
Robb gave public expression to his views upon geological subjects, was
in connection with the celebrated controversy as to the nature and
origin of the mineral Albertite. The question having arisen as to
whether this was to be regarded as coal or asphalt, or a variety of
either, a question involving, in connection with the then existing
mining laws, the ownership of a property of enormous value, experts
were brought forward, in several instances from considerable distances,
the consideration of whose testimony made the trial a very lengthy
one, at the same time that it tended to extend very greatly the
knowledge of the class of substances of which Albertite may be
regarded as the type. On the one hand Dr. Chas. T. Jackson, of
Boston, and his associates, maintained that the mineral was a true
coal, while Prof. Richard C. Taylor, in association with Dr. Robb,
asserted that it was either asphalt or a variety of asphalt. The
published deposition of Prof. Taylor, on behalf of Dr. Gesner, the
claimant, contains many interesting observations on the geology of
the vicinity of Hillsborough, as well as regards the peculiarities of the
Albertite deposit, all of which he states were made in company with
Dr. Robb.

The final decision of the jury hinged, by the direction of the judge,
simply upon the question whether Albertite was a minerdl or not, and,
there, being no real doubt upon this point, was given in favor of the
defendants. It is, however, interesting to observe that, as regards
the real nature and origin of the material, the views of Taylor and

A SKETCH OF THE LIFE AND LABOURS OF DR. ROBB. 11

Robb have in every particular been confirmed by the results of later
investigation. The very recent discovery of Albertite veins penetra-
ting the pure white gypsum or alabaster deposits of Hillsborough, is a
singular commentary upon the views that the mineral in question
is a coal.

It has been said that Dr. Robb's published observations are but
few. But important as these are, we should form a very inadequate
idea of the man and of his work if we restricted our estimate to these
only. Tn reality his researches took many different directions, and,
had his manuscript notes, after his death, not unfortunately gone
astray, their publication would have been a source of much valuable
information. This is especially true of researches made by him in
regard to the early occupation of the country by the French, as well
as regards the language and traditions of the still earlier Indian
tribes.

In referring to these manuscripts Rev. W. O. Raymond, in whose
keeping they now are, says in a letter to the writer :

After the attempt by Peter Fisher in 1825, of Alex. Wedderburn in 1836
Moses Perley in 1841, Calvin Hatheway in 1846, and Abraham Gesner in 1847,
to give something of the history of the Province, Dr. Robb seems to have
formed the design of writing a history of a more elaborate kind, embracing the
Acadian period as well as the history of the Pre-Loyalist English settlements
and the later history. To this end he compiled, from time to time, such
materials as he could glean from Champlain, Charlevoix and other French
writers, and also from certain documentary materials in Halifax and Massa-
chusetts. The manuscript books in which the result of his researches are to be
found are interesting. They contain many corrections, interliniations, and on
the pages opposite to the ink-written narrative, many supplementary notes in
pencil, and observations which go to show that the work was regarded by him
as of a tentative nature.

There is also among the Robb papers a lot of Indian words with observa-
tions on the same, and rude attempts at classification. In nearly all the papers
one is struck with the industry that. Dr. Robb displayed, and although he did
not live to complete his historical work sufficiently for publication, he was
following the right path, and really, with the time and opportunities afforded,
he accomplished a good deal. Modern students of provincial history have
fuller and better sources of information than had he, and I do not know that
his manuscript contains much that is original, which is to be regretted.

The museum which Dr. Robb founded in connection with King's
College (now the University of New Brunswick) is well worthy of
notice. It has been already said that during his European tour Dr.
Robb embraced every opportunity to make collections of minerals,
rocks, fossils and plants. From the nature of the collections now in

12 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

the college, it is quite evident that the larger part of this material was
brought with him across the Atlantic, though it may possibly have
been supplemented by orders subsequently given. In particular may
be mentioned a collection of European fossils, several hundred in
number, all duly named and classified, similar collections of minerals
and rocks, partly from the continent and partly from Scotland,
examples of slags and furnace products, models of iron and soda
furnaces, specimens of moulds and utensils employed in the manufac-
ture of china and porcelain, Sopwith's geological models, glass models
of crystals, etc., etc. In the botanical department, besides numerous
flowering plants, are many specimens of mosses, lichens, ferns and sea-
weeds, also identified and classified.

Dr. G. F. Matthew tells me that he remembers Dr. Robb very
well, and when the former began to study mineralogy he received
much assistance and advice from Dr. Robb. This could only be on
the rare occasions when Dr. Matthew visited Fredericton and had
time to go up to the college. Dr. Robb took great pleasure in show-
ing and explaining the collections in the museum, among which were
specimens from the copper mines of Lake Superior, including an
example of quartz crystals containing native copper, which Dr. Robb
exhibited as a remarkable inclusion, not easily explained. It was
from him that Dr. Matthew learned that Rogers had found " Lingulse "
in the slates at St. John, and that there were obscure remains of plants
at the Barrack Shore in St. John city.

A somewhat curious specimen is that of a Malay child, which is
partly double, having only one face, but four arms and four legs,
obtained from a sea-captain, and which so interested its possessor that
he sent all the way to Paris for standard works on the subject of
monstrosities. It is accompanied by a number of carefully executed
drawings, which indicate not only his interest in the subject, but also
his skill in the use of pencil and brush. This latter faculty is also
evidenced by the large number of pictures, some in pencil, but many
in water colours or oils, and embracing views of volcanoes, coral atolls,
coal plants, fossil fishes, etc., besides numerous geological sections,
which are still in the possession of the university, and which were
evidently made by Dr. Robb for the illustration of his lectures.

A circumstance which must have greatly embarrassed him, as it
has his successor, was the want of access to libraries or books of
reference. This want he endeavoured to remove, as far as in his
power, by additions to the college library, and a review of the works

A SKETCH OF THE LIFE AND LABOURS OF DR. ROBB. 13

of a scientific character possessed by the latter at the time of Dr.
Robb's decease, shows with what judgment his selections were made.
The extent of this collection would have been much larger had it not
been for the unfortunate shipwreck, on Sable Island, of a steamer
containing a large number of books, among them the publications of
the Ray Society, destined for him, besides a large quantity of furniture,
crockery, «tc. He must also have had an extended correspondence,
one proof of which is of personal interest to the writer. Soon after
assuming the duties laid down by Dr. Robb, he had occasion to make
a detailed inventory of the apparatus and specimens in the chemical
laboratory and museum of the college, and quite early in the search
was at once surprised and gratified by finding a considerable num-
ber of packages, the written labels of which were recognized as
being in the handwriting of the writer's father, the late Prof. J. W.
Bailey, of West Point, N. Y. They contained samples of the so-called
Fossil Infusoria, and, as the gentleman last referred to was at that
time the principal authority in America on these microscopic organisms,
he had evidently been written to by Dr. Robb that the latter might
thereby be the better able to identify any similar forms which he
might meet with here.

Dr. Robb's choice of apparatus, like that of books, was most
judicious. Nothing but the best would satisfy him, and his chemical
laboratory, though small, was a model of convenient arrangement, and,
for the time and place, of ample equipment. The necessities of the
case made him also his own mechanic, and in one of his letters he
refers to his having been required to polish and repair a lot of instru-
ments injured in, but recovered from, the Sable Island disaster, and
which he describes as a "shocking wreck." His laboratory was fully
supplied with carpenter's tools, and there is no doubt that he knew
how to use them. He was a good analyst, and many specimens of
ores now in the university collection are accompanied by labels bearing
the results of his quantitative determinations.

His association with the Fredericton Athemeuni has already been
referred to. In this connection he prepared and published an almanac,
of which he says, in a letter to his mother, " I can tell you it cost me
a good deal of work." It was issued in 1849, is a volume of 142 pages,
of which the object, as avowed on the preface, was neither profit nor
remuneration, but the " furnishing of a compendium of information,
useful for the time and place." He adds, " In a colony like this,
where as yet food for the mind is but scantily supplied, care ought tO'

14 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

be taken that the quality of it is good, aucl that the poor settler, who
often has no other library than his Bible and his almanac, should find
in the latter something more nourishing than the chaff of Astrology,
Alchemy and Divination." With this purpose in view, there is given
a vast quantity of information, including, besides the usual monthly
tables and accompanying tidal and lunar changes, a most interesting
synopsis of provincial chronology, revised lists of provincial latitudes
and longitudes, a register of the executive and legislative departments
of the government, the judicial department, the roll of barristers and
attorneys, a list of clergy of all denominations, banks, public institutions,
•etc., etc. It contained, also, tables of exports and imports, rates of
duties, abstracts of revenue returns, tallies of temperature, times of
the opening and closing of navigation for successive years, tables of
roads and distances in New Brunswick, and rules for the calculation
of interest. It was, in fact, a sort of universal gazetteer, which, in
the breadth and accuracy of its information, would compare favorably
with much more recent and more pretentious volumes.

It will appear, from what has now been stated, that the life of Dr.
Robb, though it has left but few records in the form of published
contributions to knowledge, was a very busy one, and exerted a very
extended influence upon the progress of intellectual and scientific
development in New Brunswick. In estimating the results of his
labours we must, as with Gesner, bear in mind the fact that science
in that day was, in many of its branches, and especially in geology,
in its early infancy. Dr. Robb's isolated position, as has been said,
also made it difficult for him to know what was being done in the way
of investigation elsewhere. And, finally, the facilities for travel in the
Province were far inferior to such as exist at present. Of railways
there was only one, that of St. Andrews, and, speaking of the proposed
construction of another, he remarks, " There is great talk of railways
at present (this was in 1847), but I am doubtful. Unless there be a
federal union of the provinces, I doubt whether the groat line from
Halifax to Quebec would pay."

Dr. Robb was a member, and in 1 S4 9 and succeeding years Presi-
dent, of the Fredericton Society of St. Andrews, as also member of the
•Church Society of New Brunswick, and in both capacities is remembered
.as a zealous and energetic worker.

The removal at an early age of a man of such great and varied
capacity, occupying so many different positions in the community, and
at the same time ever ready to give advice, professional or otherwise,

A SKETCH OF THE LIFE AND LABOURS OP DR. ROBB. 15

to those who needed it, irrespective of their rank in society, could
hardly fail to be deeply and universally deplored. That it was so is
sufficiently indicated from the following announcement of his death in
the Fredericton Reporter of April, 1861 :

The sudden death of Dr. Robb, occasioned by a violent pulmonary attack,
which took place on Tuesday afternoon, is an event which, while it will awaken
feelings of the deepest regret in this community, will also be regarded as a
public loss all over the Province. His earnest and constant devotion to the
duties of his profession, his zealous attachment to the agricultural interests of
the country, his high qualifications as a scholar, and his kind and affable man-
ners as a man, have for many years been recognized and duly acknowledged by
all who either had the pleasure of his personal acquaintance or who knew him
only through the medium of the familiar, yet learned and useful essays with
which he so frequently favored the public. It is, however, now that he has
gone, that the full impression of the loss we have sustained becomes painfully
evident. Every one bewails his loss; and every one, in this city especially, has
good reason for unaffected sori'ow. "

Any one of whom the above could be written, as voicing the feeling
of the community in which he lived and labored, needs no other eulogy.

The following is a list of the published writings of Dr. Robb,
derived partly from Bulletin 127 (1896) of the U. S. A. Geological
Survey, and in part from other sources :

1. Remarks upon certain geological features of the River St. John, in New

Brunswick, with an account of the Falls upwards from the sea, which
occur near its embouchure in the Bay of Fundy.
Brit. Assoc. Rep., Vol. 10, Trans, of Sections pp. 115-118 (1841).
Abs. Amer. Journ. of Science, Vol. 41. Pp. 55-56. 1841.

2. Enccenia oration. King's College, Fredericton. Pp. 16.

3. Report on the Agricultural Capabilities of the Province of New Brunswick.

By Prof. J. W. F. Johnston. Fredericton, 1850. [This work contains
a letter by Dr. Robb on the geological structure of the Province, with
an accompanying geological map.]

4. Report of the New Brunswick Society for the Encouragement of Agricul-

ture, Home Manufactures and Commerce. Fredericton, 1851.

5. Deposition of Richard C. Taylor, respecting the Asphaltum mine at Hills-

borough, Albert County, N. B. Philadelphia, 1851. [This contains
a joint report on the same subject by Messrs. Taylor and Robb.]

6. Notice of Observations on Drift Stria; in New Brunswick. Am. Assoc. Adv.

Sci. Proc. Vol. 4, pp. 349-351. 1851.

16 BULLETIN OF THE STATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

ARTICLE II.

LIST OF RECORDED EARTHQUAKES IN NEW
BRUNSWICK.

Compiled from Published Works and from Private Information.

By Samuel W. Katn.

Read March 1st, 1898.

In recent times much attention has been given to the study of
earthquakes. In the historic period a number of shocks have been
felt in this Province. Information in regard to them, however, is
scattered and not easily accessible. Some of the shocks have been
noted only in the newspapers, and a few of the more recent, in Grand
Manan, have been drawn to my attention by one of our corresponding
members resident there.

The following list has been compiled for the convenience of students,
both in New Brunswick and abroad, and will be found complete for all
shocks recorded. The time given (unless otherwise stated) is local
time. To reduce St. John local time to 75th meridian time, deduct
35 mins. 44 sec.

1063. Februarys; 5.30 p. in., 8 p. in.

This earthquake was of considerable violence, and was felt throughout the
St. Lawrence Valley, Acadia and New England. [Can. Nat., Oct., 1860).

1755. November.

Three or four shocks are recorded as having been hit in New England and
Nova Scotia (then including New Brunswick). Sir William Dawson states
{Can. Nat., October, lSlill) that two of these shocks were violent.

1764. September 30 ; about noon.

In the Halifax Gazettt (Nova Scotia), December 13, 1764, occurs the following
news item: "We hear from St. John's, in this Province, that on the 30th
of September last, about I '_' o'clock at noon, that a very severe shock of an

earthquake was felt there."

1817. May 22; 3.31 a. m.

Felt in all parts of New Brunswick. The following account is from the
( 'ourii r: "A beavy shock of earthquake ».^ fell in St. John on the 22nd,

LisT of recorded Earthquakes in new brunswicjk. 1?

31 minutes past three o'clock, a. in. It was preceded by a noise as if a
gale of wind sprang up, after which the earth began to shake violently,
rumbling a.s if heavy carriages were passing. The trembling continued 15
seconds. The air was clear, with not a breath of wind. A minute after
the shock moanings were heard from the southward. The earthquake was
felt at Fredericton, fully as violent as at this place. At St. Andrews the
shock was severely felt: the alarm was so great as to occasion the soldiers
to leave their barracks. The shock at Fredericton occurred at 3.25 a. m. ;
tremulous motion lasted 25 seconds; profound calm : atmosphere heavy."

The same journal has also an account of the shock as felt at Grand Manan,
which is of interest: "The earthquake of 22nd May was felt at Grand
Manan; occurred just before daybreak, commencing with a loud sound, at
the same time a violent shaking of houses. The shaking did not continue,
but the sound lasted from 30 to 45 seconds. All agree in describing the
motion as violent and the sound very loud. Weather fine and serene ;
light wind from northward; previous day uncommonly hot."

Peter Fisher, in his History of Neio Brunswick (1825), refers to this shock in
the following paragraph : " New Brunswick appears to be but little liable
to the great convulsions of nature, such as earthquakes, hurricanes, torna-
does, etc. There has been but one shock of an earthquake experienced by
the present inhabitants since they settled in this country (i. e., 1783-
1825). This shock happened on the 22nd May, 1817, at 25 minutes past
3 o'clock in the morning. The duration of the shock was about 45 seconds.
It was attended with the usual rumbling noise, without thunder, the
weather being serene and pleasant. The appearances, however, usually
indicating earthquakes, such as fiery meteors, the uncommon brilliancy of
the aurora borealis, etc., had been frequent the winter preceding."

In the journal* of Azor Hoyt, 1813-1855 (of Lower Norton, Kings Co., N. B.),
the following entry occurs : " May 22nd (1817) a shock of an earthquake. "
This shock was felt all through the Maritime Provinces.

1824=. July 9.

Severe shock felt all over the Province. —(Can. Nat., October, 1860).

1855. February 8; 6.80 a. in.

Felt all over the Province ; also in Nova Scotia and in parts of the State of
Maine. Moderate.

Dr. P. R. Inches has placed in my hands the following note made by him at
the time :

" Saint John, February 8th, 1855.

This morning at half past six o'clock several shocks of an earthquake were
felt here. I was lying in bed at the time, not quite awake, when I was
startled by hearing a roaring and rumbling noise as of a chimney on lire,
but much louder, followed by a violent shaking of the house and bed. I
at once started out of bed to see what was the matter, but could find no
cause for the noise. I could not imagine what was causing it unless it was
an earthquake. I got into bed and shortly after, I think in about five or

* Manuscript: in possession of Rev. W. O. Raymond, St. John.

18 liULLETlX OF 'I'll ]■: XATl'KAI, 1I1STOKY NOCIKTV.

six minutes, felt another shock, but .so very slight as to tie just perceptible
and no more. Again a few seconds after this second shock I thought I felt
another, but I was not positive. The first shock lasted forty or fifty
seconds, the second about the same time. It has, I believe, been felt at
Chatham, Fredericton, Dorchester, and in the State of Maine. It appears
to have been felt at Dorchester more than anywhere else. Some windows
in the house of the Hon. E. B. Chandler of that place were broken."

Speaking of this shock in Acadian Geology, pp. 39-40, Sir Wm. Dawson
says : "' Its point of greatest intensity appears to have been at the bend of
the Petitcodiac (Moncton). At this place there were several shocks, one
of them sufficiently severe to damage a brick building."

In the Journal of Azor Hoyt, the following entry occurs : " February 8th,
(1855). Three shocks of an earthquake — felt all through the Province."
This is the last entry in the Journal.

1800. October 17; 0.25 a. m.

Felt over a large .area of Eastern Canada and the New England States.
Also felt in this Province. Moderate in New Brunswick, but severe in
Quebec and Ontario.

The Morning News of October 19th, I860, says: " A vibration of the earth
from twenty to thirty seconds in duration occurred about twenty-five
minutes past six o'clock on Wednesday morning along the western side of
the harbour, causing the houses to shake quite perceptibly, and in several
cases awakening people from their slumbers. We do not know what
distance it extended or whether it was perceived in St. John or not ; but
parties residing in the vicinity of Negrotown Point felt it very distinctly,
as did persons living near the Asylum."

1809. October 22; 5,48 a, m.

This earthquake was of considerable violence, and was felt all through the
Maritime Provinces, St. Lawrence Valley and the New England States.
The reports published in our city papers describe it as the most violent
shock ever felt here. It was preceded by a rumbling rushing noise like
the noise of distant thunder, and then came the vibrations, or series of them,
which seemed to pass away in the distance as though a wave like motion
had been imparted to tin ■ crust of the earth. These vibrations appeared
to be travelling nearly east and west. Houses were shaken, dishes rattled,
and bells rang, and in some cases (lower puts, etc., where rolled over.
The shock lasted about fifteen seconds. The papers of that date (October
25th, 1809) state that- the waters of lakes and streams were discoloured b\
the shock, and it is noticed in particular that the water of the stream at
Penobsquis, which supplied the paper mill at that place, turned chalky
and had not regained its clearness on the following day. It is worthy of
remark that at Fredericton, in Mr. Babbit's shop, the clocks facing north
west were stopped, while t hose at righl angles to thai direction were not
affected.

\V. Watson Allen has given me the following liote about this shock: "At

Derby (Miramichi), at the Mill I' I, known as Wilson's Mills, a spring on

LIST OF RECORDED EARTHQUAKES IN NEW BRUNSWICK. i9

the west bank of the pond, before the earthquake, boiled out of the ground,
rising to a height of about a foot. After the earthquake, the fountain
part of the spring disappeared., although the spring itself is still there, but
diminished. Mr. William Wilson, who had lived there many years, always
claimed that the pond had increased in volume of water to a large extent.
" At the forks (the confluence of Cain's River and S. W. Miramichi), Mr.
Jacob Layton, who had resided there continuously for a number of years,
states that in the bed of the main Miramichi River, near the shore where
the water was quite shallow, and on a spot of ground that he knew very
well, after the earthquake there appeared a spring of boiling water,
sufficient to make a commotion upon the surface. There never had been
any indications of it before the earthquake."

1870. March 17 ; 6 to 8 a. in.

Felt at St. John and Fredericton. Light. It was at this time that a land-
slide occurred at Sand Point, carrying the end of the Point out into the
deeper water of the harbour. Sand Point is a gravel deposit formed by
the meeting of the harbour tides and the river, and is underlaid by clay.
This clay had probably been eroded by the action of water, and a heavy
storm the day before had hastened a condition of instability which, even
without a slight earth movement, would soon have caused the landslide.

1870. October 20; 11.40 a. m.

Felt all over the Province. In the lower part of the St. Lawrence Valley it
was much more violent than in New Brunswick.

Dr. Jack, of the Provincial University, at Fredericton, in a despatch to the
St. John Dally Telegraph (October 21st, 1870), thus describes it: " It was
at seventeen minutes before noon that the first shock was felt here. This
lasted perhaps two seconds, and was shortly followed by another of abou^
the same severity, which may have been the return stroke, as the interval
between was not over half a minute. The motion was vibratory, and
seemed to be from south to north. It was not as strong as the earthquake
of last year. There was violent wind all of Tuesday afternoon and night,
and this afternoon we have a heavy rain and lowering darkness." The
time at St. John was accurately noted to be 11.40: at Fredericton it was
11.43.

1882. December 31; 9.56 p. m.

St. John, Rothesay, Sussex and Fredericton. Light. Two shocks felt.
The following is from the St. John Daily Sun (January 2nd, 1883): "At
four minutes to 10 on Sunday night a slight shock of earthquake was felt.
In one residence on Charlotte street a vase was thrown from its stand to
the floor and broken ; in another house, in an opposite part of the city, all
the ornaments on a Christmas tree were set swinging vigorously. The
shock was also distinctly felt in Indiantown and on the other side of the
harbour. It was also felt at Sussex, Fredericton, and very markedly at
Rothesay."

20 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

1884. January 26.

At Rothesay. Three light shocks. Reported in Daily Telegraph of January
29fch.

1885. June; 10 a. m.

Rothesay, .Seal Cove and Southern Head, Grand Manan. Light at Rothesay,
but severe at Southern Head, where several tons of rock fell from the cliffs
near the lighthouse.

1896. March 22 ; 7.56 p. m.

This shock was felt in Charlotte and York Counties, New Brunswick, and in
Washington County, Maine. The area disturbed has a diameter of about
100 miles, and lies adjacent to the shores of the Bay of Fundy and the
Gulf of Maine.

By correspondence with observers at different points, I have been able to
secure some notes on this disturbance.

E astport, Maine. — The shock took place here March 22nd, at 7.56 (75th
meridian time), and lasted four or five seconds. This office is located in
the new government building, built of granite, and on a solid ledge. Still
the tremor was distinctly felt throughout the building, and more so by
those living in wooden houses, The shock had no perceptible effect on our
barograph. It had been rising steadily since noon, and I failed to see
the least deviation in the trace. D. C. Mokphy,

I ' . 8. Meteorological oh* rvt r.

Beaver Harbor, N. B. — Shock slightly felt here on 22nd March at 8.45 p. m.
Jar enough in some buildings to make glass rattle,

Flagg's Cove, Grand Manan, N. B. — A slight earthquake shock was felt
here on Sunday, March 22nd. The noise was very distinct, but only lasted
a few moments. It was felt all over the island at the same time as at
this station. CLARA C. SEELY,

Dominion M< U orological Obs( rw r.

St. Andrews, N. B. — The shock was markedly felt at St. Andrews. A well
known gentleman resident there wrote me as follows: "The noise at first

was very sharp and was succeeded by a gradually lessening sound, and
was all over in three seconds. It occurred at 8. 15 p. in."
In addition to the above places the shock was felt in all the West Isles,
on the mainland northward to McAdam, some distance along the line

between McAdam and Woodstock, and at St. Stephen and l'enntield.
The shock was not felt at St. John, Frederieton. or Yarmouth, X. S.

1896. May 15th ; ll.OO p. in.

A light shock was felt on tliis dale at Krcdericton , along the N'ashwaak

Valley, at Andover, and up the Tobique Valley as far as Three Brooks.
A gentleman at Fredericton, in a letter to me, described it as "one momen-
tary concussion." Dr. Welling, writing from Audover, says: "Two

LIST OF RECORDED EARTHQUAKES IN NEW BRUNSWICK. 21

shocks from an earthquake were felt here on the night of loth of May
about 11 o'clock. I was in bed at the time and felt the bed shake and
tremble. One gentleman was about retiring when he heard what he
thought were horses running around the house, but when he reached the
door the noise was repeated and he saw at once that it was the shock of an
earthquake. It was heard at Three Brooks on the Tobique River some
twenty miles distant about the same hour."

1897. January 26; in the morning.

Felt at Campobello and Deer Island. Light.

1897. January 28; 9 p. m.

A sharp shock felt at Southern Head, Grand Manan. Duration about two
seconds. Mr. W. B. McLaughlan, the light-keeper, in writing, says :
"It shook us up so violently that it set my dogs barking and the horse
and cattle in the stable tried to break loose. I made a record of it in my
journal."

1897. February 14; 9 p. ni.

Mr. McLaughlan goes on to say : " On the evening of the 14th inst. , about
the same hour, we felt another sharp shock, but not so violent as that of
January 28th.

" I am of the opinion that these shocks are of frequent occurrence in the Bay
of Fundy, and arc generally thought to be the reports of cannon. I
recollect that about twelve years ago the middle of next June, at 10 o'clock
a. m., we felt a violent shock at this station and at Seal Cove, but the only
place on the mainland that I noticed it reported was at Rothesay, Kings
Co. That shock was so violent that several tons of rock fell from the clift
near the lighthouse."

1897. September 25 ; 1.30 p. m.

Parts of Charlotte and York counties in this Province, and in some parts of
Eastern Maine. Light. Felt distinctly at Canterbury, McAdam and
St. Stephen. At St. Stephen it rattled dishes, etc., and at McAdam the
earth trembled as from the passing of a heavy railway train. It lasted
fifteen seconds.

Not felt at St. Andrews, Eastport, or Woodstock.

1897. October 12; 10.35 p. m.

South West Head, Grand Manan. Light. "Duration about five seconds.
Wind due south, strong gale and hazy weather, about two hours to high
tide. Shock from southeast with a roar like a waggon over a frozen road.
It shook the buildings sufficiently to alarm my watch dog." (Letter
from W. B. McLaughlan),

22 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORT SOCIETY.

1898. January 11; 2 a. m.

At South West Head, Grand Manan.

"We felt a sharp shock of earthquake at this ])lace on Tuesday, the 1 lth
inst., at 2 a. m. It sounded like a heavy explosion, Wind northeast,
light, high water, clear cold weather." (Letter from W. B. McLaughlan).

The greater frequency of earthquakes at Grand Manan than at any
other place in the Province is worthy of note, and it is possible that
further observations may show some connection between the so-called
"gun reports" (see Bulletin XIV, pp. 40-44, 1896,) and these light
earth movements.

In the discussion which followed, Dr. Geo. F. Matthew said: "This
part of the Bay of Fundy it remarkable for its great depth and pre-
cipitous shores. Off Brier Island the bottom descends to a depth of
100 fathoms in a distance of three miles from the outermost ledge ; it
is almost equally abrupt on the Grand Manan slope ; the trough
between is deeper than the bottom of the Gulf of Maine outside ad-
joining. This is the only part of the Bay of Fundy where there have
been heavy outflows of trap of Triassic age on both sides of the bay,
and the abyss between may be complementary to these ejections of
lava. The weakness of the earth's crust here in Triassic times, as
shown by the volcanic eruptions of that age, may not even yet be
altogether removed ; but the greater tendency to earthquake move-
ments in this district may be the dying throes of the old Triassic
disturbances."

LIST OF MOSSES OF NEW BRUNSWICK. 23

ARTICLE III.

LIST OF MOSSES OF NEW BRUNSWICK

Compiled by John Moser and Edited by G. U. Hay.

Read October 2, 1894.

[Containing 15 new species, but several also reported by Prof. Macoun and others. ]

1. Sphagnum fimbriatum, Wils., Gravet. Bogs and swamps, Kent County,

(F's C.)1

2. S. strictum, Lindb. New Mills, Restigouche, (Hay). Peat bog, Kingston,

Kent Co. (F's C.) Canaan Forks,2 Queens Co. (Moser). Herb.

3. S. fuscum, Schimp. Grand Lake. (F'sC.)

Var. fuscessens. Swamps, Bass River,3 Kent Co. (F's C. )

4. S. acutifolium. Common. Herb.

Var. rubrurr.. Common. Herb.
Var. versicolor. (F's C.)

5. S. rubellum, Wils. Peatbogs, Kingston, Kent Co. (F'sC.)
6\ S. recurvum, Russ. Swamps, (Moser). Herb.

Var. mucronatum. Grand Lake. (F'sC.)
Var. amblyphyllum. (F's C. )

Var. parvifolium. Indian Harbour, Halifax Co., N. S. Swamp,
Canaan Road, Kings Co. (Moser). Herb.

7. S. cuspidatum, Ehrh. Nashwaaksis, York Co. (Moser). Herb.

8. S. squarrosum, Pers. Tay, York Co. (Moser). Herb.

Var. spectabile. Grand Lake. (F's C. )
Var. semi-squarrosum. (F's C. )

9. S. wolfianum, Girg. (Moser). Herb.

10. S. rigidum, Schimp. Var. squarrosum. Peat bogs, Kingston. (F's C.)

(Moser). Herb.

11. S. subsecundum, Nees. (F'sC.) Wet woods. (Moser). Herb.

12. S. imbricatum, Hornsch. Var. affine. Bogs (Moser). Herb.

13. S. papillosum, Lindb. Bog, Salem, Kings Co. (Moser). Herb. Lily

Lake, St. John. (F's C. )

14. S. cymbifolium, Ehrh. Common. Herb.

Var. laeve. (Moser). Herb.

15. S. tenellum, Ehrh. Peatbog, Kingston, Kent Co. (F'sC.)

1. F's C. (Fowler's Catalogue) published in 1878. Herb. (Herbarium of Natural History-
Society of New Brunswick.)

2. Ac. most of Mr. Moser's plants were collected at Canaan Forks, Q. Co., the name of
this locality is omitted before "Moser" throughout this list.

3. As most of Prof. Fowler's mosses were collected at Bass River, Kent County, the
name of this locality is omitted before F's C. throughout this list.

24 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

16. S. medium, Limpr. Var. laeve, forma purpurascens. (F'sC. )

Var. roseum. (I rand Lake. (F'sC.)

17. WESIA viridula, Brid. Shelf of rock, Tay, York Co. (Moser). Herb.

18. Dicranodontium pellucidum. Wet bank, Tay, York County. (Moser).

Herb.
1!). Trematodox ambiguum, James. Tay and Nevers' Rapids, Queens Co.
(Moser). (F'sC.) Herb.

20. DlCRANELLA crispa, Schimp. Common. (Moser). Herb.

21. D. squarrosa, Schimp. Shore of Washadamoak, Queens Co. (Moser). Herb.

22. 1). cerviculata, Schimp. Damp earth, Carleton Co. Rotten wood, St.

John. (F's C. ) Gravelly bank near spring, Tay, York Co. (Moser).
Herb.

23. D. varia, Schimp. Face of cliff. (Moser). Herb.

24. D. rufescens, Schimp. (F'sC.) Road-sides. (Moser). Herb.

25. D. subulata, Schimp. Kouchibouguac. (F's C.) Red Bank, Tay.

(Moser). Herb.

26. D. heteromalla, Schimp. Road-side, banks, common. Herb.

27. Dicranum montanum, Hedw. Rotten wood, common. Herb.

28. D. fulvnm, Hooker. Boulders, damp woods. (Moser). Herb.

29. D. viride, Schimp. On old trees, common, but always barren. Herb.

30. 1). flagellare, Hedw. On rotten wood, common. Herb.

31. 1). scoparium, Hedw. Common. Herb.

Var. nigrescens. (Moser). Herb.

32. D. fuscescens, Turn. Common on old logs. Herb.

33. D. undulatum, Turn. Grand Lake, Q. Co. (F'sC.) Madawaska and

Tobique. (Hay). (Moser). Herb.

34. D. Bergeri. Wet woods, Kent Co. (F'sC.)

35. Dicranodontium longirostre, Bruch and Schimp. On boulders, Tay.

( Moser). Herb.

36. Fissidens adiantoides, Hedw. On rocks, St. John. (F'sC.)

37. F. osmundoides, Hedw. Rough Waters, near Bathurst. (F's C. )
lis. Leucobryum vulgare, Hampe. (Moser). Herb.

39. Ceratodon purpurens, Brid. Very common. Herb.

40. Distichium capillaceum, Bruch and Schimp. Tete-a-(4ouche Falls. (F'sC.)

Wet cliff, Long Rapids, Washadamoak Lake. (Moser). Herb.

41. Blindia acuta, Bruch and Schimp. Washadamoak, Q. Co. (Moser). Herb.

42. Didymodon rubellus, Bruch and Schimp. On rocks and earth, Tobique

River. (Hay). (Moser). Herb.

43. Leptoteichum tortile, Muell. On old roots, Washadamoak. (Moser).

Herb. (F'sC.)

44. L. vaginans, Lesq. and James. Road-side, Kent Co. (F'sC.)

4.">. Bakium.a tortuosa, Web. and Muhr. (F'sC.) On rocks, Tobique River-
(Hay). (Moser). Herb.

46. B. unguiculata, Hedw. Common on earth. (F'sC.) (Moser). Herb.

47. Grimmea conferta, Funck. (Moser). Eerb.

48. G. apocarpa, Hedw. On rocks, St. John Co. (F'sC.) (Moser). Herb,

49. G. rivularis. Fredericton. (F'sC) (Moser). ^ Herb.

50. G. gracilis. Dry rocks. (Moser). Herb.

LIST OF MOSSES OF NEW BRUNSWICK. 25

■51. Racomitrium fasciculare. On rocks, McDonald's Brook, Forks Stream
and Tay. (Moser). Herb.

52. R. microcarpum, Hedw. Rocks, Forks Stream. (Moser). Herb.

53. Hed\vk;ia ciliata, Ehrh. On rocks, common. Herb.

54. Amphoridium Lapponicum, Scbimp. Long Rapids, Q. Co. (Moser). Herb.

55. Ulota Ludwigii, Brid. On old trees, common. (F'sC. ) (Moser). (Hay).

Herb.

56. U. crispa, Brid. On trees, common. Herb.

57. U. crispula, Brid. On birch trees. (F'sC.) On trees. (Moser). Herb.

58. Orthotricum speciosum, Nees. On trees. (F'sC.) (Moser). Herb.

59. O. sordidum, Sulliv. and Lesq. On trees. (F's C.) (Moser). Herb.

60. 0. Ohioense, Sulliv. and Lesq. On trees. (F'sC.) (Moser). Herb.

61. O. strangulatum, Beauv. On trees. (F's C. )

62. O. obtusifolium, Drumm. On poplar trees. (F'sC.) (Moser). Herb.

63. Encalypta Macounii, Aust. On ledges. (Moser). Herb. Crevices of

rocks, Tobique. (Hay).

64. Tetraphis pellucida, Hedw. On rotten stumps, common. Herb.

65. Taylorii tenuis, Schimp. Barrens. (Moser). Herb.

66. Tetraplodon angustatus, Bruch and Schimp. Madawaska (Brittain).

Near Lily Lake, St. John (Hay).

67. T. mnioides, Bruch and Schimp. Highland Park, St. John, and Tobique.

(Hay).

68. Splachnum ampullaceum, Linn. On earth, Fredericton Junction (F's C. )

Swamps, Bocabec and St. John (Hay). On earth (Moser). Herb.

69. S. rubrum, Linn. (F's C.) Lancaster (Hay). Hunter's Home, Queens

Co. (Moser). Herb.

70. Bartramia cederiana, Swai'tz. On rocks, Tete-a-Gouche Falls, Gloucester-

's C.) Near St. John (Hay).

71. B. pomiformis, Hedw. On ledges and banks, along streams, common.

Herb.

72. Philonotis fontana, Brid. About springs, common. Herb.

73. P. glabriuscula, Kindberg. (New species).

"Tufts radiculose below, 4 cm high. Stem slender. Leaves small, green,
distant, spreading and straight when moist, twisted when dry, indistinctly decur-
rent, short ovate lanceolate, short acuminate, acute, slightly papillose, pellucid,
plane at the margins, not plicate, minutely ser ulate, principally above. Cells
oblong, hexagonal, the lower narrower, less chlorophillose. Costa subcurrent
Habit of Webera albicans." (From " Canadian Musci.1'1)
It varies to a delicate floating form, as also does P. fontana.
Spring, in Owl Bridge Gully, Q. Co., but principally across the Washada-
moak (south) in a spring in the woods east of Martin's farm; also at
Hunter's Home and at Elm wood, Kings Co. Always barren ( Moser).
Herb.

74. Amblyodon dealbatus, Beauv. Brooklets. Herb. " One summer there

was abundance in a spring brooklet, the next summer there was not
any, nor since." (Moser).

75. Leptobryum pyriforme, Schimp. On recently burnt soil, common. Herb.

76. Webera acuminata, Schimp. On rocks, also in Restigouche Co. (F'sC.)
'77. W. nutans, Hedw. Common. Herb.

26 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

78. W. Lescuriana, Lesq. and James. On the ground by roadsides. (F's C. )

■Sandy bank, Tay, Glen Margaret, Halifax Co., N. S. (Moser).
Herb.

79. W. cruda, Schimp. (F'sC.) Crevices of rocks, Hunter's Home, Q. Co..

(Moser). Herb.

80. W. albicans, Schimp. On banks. (Moser). Herb.

81. Bryum pendulum, Schimp. On rotten wood. (F'sC.)

82. B. uliginosum, Bruch and Schimp. Tay. (Moser). Herb.

83. B. intermedium, Brid. Rocky places. (Moser). Herb.

84. B. cirrhatum, Hoppe and Hornsch. (Moser). Herb.

85. B. bemum, Schreb. Borders of swamps. (F's C.) Wet woods, Forks.

Boggy places, Elmwood, Kings Co. (Moser). Herb.

86. B. pallescens, Schleich. On earth. (Moser). Herb.

87. B. subrotundum, Brid. (Moser). Herb.

88. B. alpinum, Linn. Hunter's Home. (Moser). Herb.

89. B. caespiticium, Linn. On dry ground. (F's C.) Common at Canaan,

Q. Co. (Moser \ Herb.

90. B. pseudo-triquetrum, Schwaegr. Wet rocks. (F's C.) On earth.

(Moser I. Herb.

91. B. roseum, Schreb. Shady woods. (F's C.)

92. B. Ontarioense. (Moser). Herb.

93. Mnium medium, Bruch and Schimp. Deep shady ravines. (F's C. )

94. M. cuspidatum, Neck. Common. Herb.

95. M. Drummondii, Bruch and Schimp. In large patches on the ground in

shady places. (F'sC.) Tay. (Moser). Herb.

96. M. athne, Bland. Damp shaded bank of brook. (F'sC); also at Frederic-

ton. Tay. (Moser). Herb. Common St. John Co. (Hay).

97. M. hornum, Linn. St. John Co. (west) abundant. (Moser). Herb.

98. M. orthorrhynciim, Bruch and Schimp. Grand Falls, Nepisiquit. (F'sC.)

(Moser ». Herb.

99. M. pseudo-lycopodioides. In damp shaded ravines (F's C); also at Fred-

ericton. ( Moser \ Herb.

100. M. spinulosum, Bruch and Schimp. Damp shaded places. (F'sC.)

(Moser). Herb.

101. M. stellare, Reichar.l. Carleton. (F'sC.) (Moser.

102. M. punctatum. Damp shady ravines (F's C. ); also at Fredericton.

Swamps, Tobique River, (Hay). (Moser). Herb.

103. A.TTLOCOMNIOM palustre, Schwaegr. Common. Herb.

104. Atrichum undulatum, Beauv. On the ground, f F's C.) (Moser). Eerb.

105. A. angustatuni, Bruch and Schimp. On the ground. (F's C. I (Moser).

Herb.

106. Pogonatum brevicaule, Beauv. On clayey soil. (F's C.) (Moser). Herb.

107. P. urnigerum, Drumm. Dry turf on a Ledge. (Moser). Herb.
Ins. P. alpinum, Roehl. Wei rocks, Tobique, <Hay\ (Moser). Herb.

109. Polyteichum piliferum, Schreb. Gravelly knolls (F's C). Dry ground

mi nicks, Forks Stream. (Moser). Herb.

110. P. juniperinum, Wllld. Gravelly knolls, common. Herb.

111. P. strictum, Banks. Iii swamps. (Moser). Herb.

LIST OF MOSSES OF NEW BEUNSWICK. 27

112. P. commune, Linn. Common on wet barren ground. (Moser). Herb.

113. Fontin'alis antipyretica, Linn. In brooks, common.

Var. gigantea, Sulliv. Shallow streams, Tobique, (Hay . (Moser).
Herb.

114. F. Dalecarlica, Bruch and Schimp. In brooks. (Moser). Herb.

115. Dichelyma capillaceum, Bruch and Schimp. Grand Lake and Newcastle

(F'sC.) On sticks and roots skirting swamps, Forks. (Moser).
Herb.

116. D. palliscens, Bruch and Schimp. On roots of alders, Hunter's Home.

(Moser). Herb.

117. D. obtusulum. Fredericton. (F'sC.)

118. Neckera pemiata, Hedw. On trees, common. Herb.

119. Homalia Macounii, C. M. and Kindberg. (New species).

H. trichomanoides, Lesq. and James. "Mosses of North America."
(Drummond, Waghorn and Macoun). On rocks, Forks Stream and Tay,
York Lo. (Moser). Herb.
12(1. Leitcodon sciuroides, Schwaegr. On bark of trees, common. Herb.

121. Pteriginandrum filiforme, Hedw. (F'sC.)

122. Thelia compacta. On ti'ees. (Moser . Herb.

123. Myurella julacea, Bruch and Schimp. On damp rocks. (Moser). Herb.

124. M. Careyana, Sulliv. On rocks, St. John. (F'sC.) Crevices of l-ocks,

Queens Co. (Moser . Herb.

125. Leskea polycarpa, Ehrh. On trunks of trees, Nashwaaksis, York Co

(Moser). Tobique, (Hay. Herb.

126. L. nervosa, Sulliv. On trees, Fredericton, (F's C.) Tay, (Moser). Herb.

127. L. denticulata, Sulliv. On roots of trees. (Moser). Herb.

128. Axomodon rostratus, Schimp. Fredericton, (F's C. ) On the sides of wet

cliffs and on wet roots. (Moser). Herb.

129. A. attenuatus, Hueben. Bases of old trees and stumps. Moser). Herb.

130. A. obtusifolius, Bruch and Schimp. Old stumps, Tay. (Moser). Herb.

131. A. veticulosus, Hook, and Tayl. Ledge of rocks, Butternut Ridge,

Kings Co. (Moser*. Herb.

132. Platygirium repens. Bruch and Schimp. On dead wood. (Moser).

Herb.

133. Pylasia polyantha, Bruch and Schimp. On the bases of trees, common.

Herb.

134. P. intricata, Bruch and Schimp. On trees, Fredericton, (F's C.) Tcbique,

(Hay).

135. P. velutina. On trees F'sC.) Tay. (Moser). Herb.

136. Entodon cladorrhizans. On logs, Tay. (Moser). Herb.

137. E. brevisetum. On old logs and rocks. (Moser). Herb.

138. Climacium dendroides, Web. and Mohr. On the ground in dense shade,

Molus River, Kent Co. (F's C. )

139. C. Americanum, Brid. Wet places (F's C.) (Moser1. Herb.

140. Heterocladium dimorphum, Bruch and Schimp. On a wet bank, Tay„

York Co. Scarce. (Moser. ) Herb.

38 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

141. H. frullaniopsis, C. M. and Kindberg. iNew species'. Base of poplar

trees, Hunter's Home, Queen's Co. (Moser). Herb.
This species differs very much from allied species principally in the uniform
leaves, the absence of paraphyllia and the not cordate leaf base. Dioecious.

142. Thuidium scitum, Aust. On trees, Fredericton. (F's C.)

143. T. minutulum, Bruch and Sebimp. (F'sC.)

144. T. reoognitum, Lindb. (Moser). Herb.

145. T. gracile, Bruch and Schimp. (Moser). Herb.

146. T. delicatulum, Bruch and Schimp. Common. (Moser). Herb.

147. T. abietinum, Bruch and Schimp. On rocks and ground, Restigouche.

(F's C.l

148. T. Blandonii, Bruch and Schimp. Bogs. (Moser). Herb.

149. Camptothecium nitens. Schimp. Swamp, Hunter's Home. Not com-

mon. (Moser). Herb.

150. Brachythecium laetum, Bruch and Schimp. On rocks, ground and

roots of trees, common. (F'sC.) (Moser). Herb.

151. B. digastrum, C. M. and Kindb. (New species). On rocks, Ottawa,

Ont., Oct. 12th, 1889 (Macoun). On rocks, Canaan Forks, Queens
Co., 1889 (Moser).

152. B. acuminatum. Bases of trees. (Moser). Herb.

153. B. salebrosum, Bruch and Schimp. On earth, common about the Tay.

(F'sC.) (Moser). Herb.

154. B. albicans, Bruch and Schimp. (F's C. )

155. B. harpidioides, C. M. and Kindb. (New species). On old logs in

woods. Columbia River, May 6th, 1890. (Macoun). 1889. (Moser).

156. B. pseudo-collinum, Kindb. Queens Co. (New species). Under plat-

form of a well. (Moser).

157. B. velutinum, Bruch and Schimp. (F'sC.)

158. B. Starkii, Bruch and Schimp. (F'sC.)

159. B. oedipodium. Under shade on light ground. (Moser.) Abundant.

Herb.

160. B. curtum. On earth in woods. (Moser. *

161. B. reflexum, Bruch and Schimp. On rocks, Queens Co. (Moser.) Herb.

162. B. rutabulum, Bruch and Schimp. (F'sC.)

1 63. B. leucoglaucum, C. M. and Kindb. (New species). On loose earth,

Queens Co., and at Elm wood, Kings Co. September Kith. isss.

(Moser). Herb.

Intermediate between B. rutabulum and B. curtum.

164. B. mirabundum, C. M. and Kindb. (New species). On « >1<1 logs in

woods, Canaan and Elmwood. July, 1888. (Moser). Berb.

165. B. campestre, Bruch and Schimp. On the ground. (F'sC.) On rocks

and logs. (Moser). Herb.

166. B. rivulare, Bruch and Schimp. (F's C.) Also at Fredericton. On

wet ground and stones in brooks. (Moser.) Herb.

Var. obtusifolium, Kindb. Also named Nova Brunsvicise. On wet

rocks, Fredericton. (F's C. ) Ontario and British Columbia.

(Macoun). Near springs. (Moser). Herli.

LIST OF MOSSES OF NEW BRUNSWICK. 29'

167. B. populeum, Bruch and Schimp. (F'sC. ) On granite boulder in brook.

(Moser). Herb.

168. B. plumosum, Bruch and Schimp. (F's C. ) Also at Fredericton, Elm-

wood. (Moser). Herb.

169. Scleropodium illecebrum, Bruch and Schimp. On damp rocks. (Moser).

Herb.

170. Eurhyxchium strigosum, Bruch and Schimp. (F'sC.) (Moser). Herb.

171. E. piliferum, Bruch and Schimp. Rare. (Moser).

17:2. E. pradongum, Bruch and Schimp. Tay. (Moser). Herb.

173. E. Sullivantii. On rocks. (Moser). Herb.

174. E. hians. (Moser).

175. E. crassinerve, Schimp. Var. laxorite, Kindb. New var. On rocks in

woods. •Moser).

Differs iD the leaves being nearly entire or faintly denticulate above, shorter,
acuminate, and the cells larger. Only male flowers found. Allied to E. colpo-
phillum.

176. Raphidostegium recurvans. Kent Co. (F's C.) Common. (Moser).

Herb.

177. R. demissum. On stones, rare. (Moser). Herb.

178. R. cylindrocarpum. On decayed logs. (Moser,i.

179. R. Jamesii. (Moser).

180. Rhyncostegitm serrulatum. (Moser). On rotten wood. (F's C)..

Herb.

181. R. rusciforme, Bruch and Schimp. On rocks, St. John River (F's C'.

Tobique River. (Hay). (Moser). Herb.
1S2. Plagiothecium pulchellum, Bruch and Schimp. On rotten wood, Nash-
waaksis, and Canaan. (Moser.) Herb.

183. P. turfaceum, Lindb. Common. Herb.

184. P. Muehlenbeckii, Bruch and Schimp. On old logs. (F'sC.) Tobique

and Norton. (Hay.)

185. P. denticulatum, Bruch and Schimp. (F'sC.) Highland Park, St. John.

(Hay). Common. (Moser.) Herb.

186. P. sylvaticum, Bruch and Schimp. Fredericton. (F's C. , and Moser.)

Herb.

187. P. Sullivantii, Schimp. On earth, Elmwood and St. John. (Moser).

Herb.

188. P. aciculari-pungens, C. M. and Kindb. ( New species. ) On earth, 1889.

(Moser.)

This species is nearly allied to Plagiothecium sylvaticum, but the leaves are
larger, the tufts more compact,

189. Amblystegium speirophillum, Kindb. (New species.) On face of wet

stones, York Co. (Moser). Herb.

190. A. confervoides, Bruch and Schimp. On stones in woods. (Moser.)

Herb.

191. A. serpens, Bruch and Schimp. (F'sC.) (Moser.) Herb.

192. A. porphyrrhizum, . Fredericton. (F'sC.) On damp earth. (Hay

and Moser.) Herb.

194.

A.

195.

A.

196.

A.

197.

A.

198.

A.

30 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

193. A. varium, Hedw. , Lindb. Near Fredericton. (F's C. ) On roots of
trees. (Moser). Herb,
orthoeladon. (F'sC.)
fluviatile, Bruch and Schimp. On rocks, St. John River. (F'sC.)

(Moser.) Herb,
adnatum. On stones in woods. (Moser). Herb.
compactum. On the bases of trees. (Moser.) Herb.
riparium, Bruch and Schimp. On stones in brooks, Molus River-
(F'sC. i Kennebecasis Island, (Hay). Tay, (Moserj. Herb.

199. Hypnum hispidulum, Brid. Bass River and Little Branch, Miramichi.

(F'sC.) On bases of trees. (Moser). Also at Elmwood. Herb.

200. H. Sommerfeltii. On old logs. (Moser). Salmon River, Kent Co.

(F's C. i Herb.
H. chrysophillum, Brid. On logs, Tobique River. (Hay). (Moser). Herb,
unicostatum, C. M. and Kindb. (New species). (Moser). Near
Ottawa, October 4th, 1890. (Macoun). Near Kingston, Out., May
23rd, 1884. (Prof. Fowler).
polygamum, Wils. Base of trees. (Moser). Herb.
Kneiffii, Schimp. In swamps, Queens Co. . (Moser). Herb.
sendtneri, Schimp. In bogs. (Moser). Herb,
nuitans, Linn. In bogs, Coldbrook. (Hay). Herb,
exannulatnm, Guemb. In boggy places. (F's C). Queens Co. and

Elmwood, Kings Co. Common. (Moser'. Herb,
uncinatum, Hedw. Common. (F's C.) (Moser). Herb.
H. Moseri, Kindb. (New species).

Differing from H. uncinatum in the leaves not being striate, but sometimes
recurved at the base; costa faint, often failing; differing from all the other
Harpidia in the stem, being densely radiculate.
On the bases and trunks of poplar trees, Dec. 30th, 1889 (Moser).
Newfoundland (Rev. A. Waghorne). Herb.

210. H. filicinum, Linn. Near springs, Tobique River. (Hay). Forks

(Moser). Herb.

211. H. chloropterum, C. M. and Kindb. (New species V

Resembles H. Novae-Angliae in habit, but differs considerably in the dis-
tinctly papillose, looser and patent, wider areolate leaves and the monoecious
inflorescence, and in other respects.
On rocks, New Harbour, Newfoundland. (Rev. A. Waghorne). Near a

spring, Owl Bridge Gully, Forks, and on wet ground, in shade, at

Elmwood, K. C. (Moser). Herb.

212. H. Novae-Angliae, Sulliv. and Lesq. In large patches, Bass River.

(F'sC.) (Moser.) Herb.
commutatum, Hedw. On earth in a swamp. (Moser). Herb.
rii-i.i east lcusis, Linn. On old logs. (Moser,. Herb. Bass River.

| F's •'.) Tobique River (Haj |.

molluscum, Hedw. On logs, Tobique. (Hay). (Moser.) Herb,
reptile, Michx. On stones and bases of trees, -common. Herb,
pallescens, Beauv. Fredericton and Grand bake. (F'sC.) (Moser).
callichroum. (Moseri. Herb,
fertile, Sendt. | F's C.) (Moser). Tobique. (Hay).

201.

H.

202.

H.

203.

H.

204.

H.

205.

H.

206.

H.

207.

H.

208.

H.

209.

H.

213.

H.

_'l 1.

H.

215.

H.

2 Hi.

H.

-_'17.

II.

218.

II.

219.

II.

LIST OF MOSSES OF NEW BRUNSWICK. 31

220. H. imponens, James. Old logs. (Moser). Herb.

221. H. subimponens, Lesq. Old logs. (Moser). Herb.

222. H. complexum, Lesq. and James. On rocks. (Moser1. Herb.

223. H. Lindbergii, Mitt. (H. arcuatum, Lindb. ) On rocks. (Moser.)

Also at Elmwood. Herb.

224. H. Renauldii, Kindb. iNew species). On damp earth in shade; abun-

dant. (Moser1. Herb. Reported by Macoun and Rev. A. Wag-
horne.

225. H. curvifolium, Muell. Common along wet banks and in brooks-

(Fowler, Hay and Moser). Herb.

226. H. pratense, Koch. On earth. (Moser).

227. H. Haldanianum, Grev. On old logs, common. (F's C, and Moser).

Herb.
2l's. H. nemorosum, Koch. On decayed wood. (Moser).

229. H. flaccum, C. M. ami Kindb. (New species). On logs and rocks.

(Moser). Owen Sound, Ont. (Macoun). Herb.

230. H. palustre, Hedw. On rocks in brooks. (Moser). Herb.

231. H. circutifolium, C. M. and Kindb. (H. molle, Lesq. and James).

Nearly allied to H. dilatatum, Wils.
On rocks in brooklet emptying into Taj'. (Moser). Herb.

232. H. engyrium, Schimp. On stones. (F's C. )

233. H. ochraceum, Turn. On stones in brooks, Nashwaaksis and Canaan.

(Moser). Kent Count}- and Fredericton (F's C.) Herb.

234. H. stramiiieum, Dicks. Among sphagnum. (F'sC.) Tay (Moser). Herb.

235. H. cordifolium, Drumm. In wet, sandy places; common. Herb.

236. H. giganteum, Schimp. Springs and swamps (Moser). Herb.

237. H. sarmentosum, Wahl. Bogs. (Moser). Herb.

238. H. cuspidatum, Linn. Shore of Washadamoak. (Moser). Herb.

239. H. Schreberi, Willd. Common everj'where. Herb.

240. H. splendens, Hedw. In dense mats on damp rocks, or on the ground

but at Nashwaaksis, in the woods, it is gregarious. (F's C. )
(Moser). (Hay). Herb.

241. H. umbratum, Ehrh. (F'sC.) (Moser). Common by brooklets. Have

not found it in fruit. Herb.

242. H. brevirostre, Ehrh. In dense mats on granite boulders in the shade.

no fruit, Halifax Co. , N. S. Herb. (Moser).

243. H. squarrosum, Linn. In grassy, shady slopes. Have not found it in

fruit. (Moser). Herb.

244. H. triquetrum, Linn. Common. (Moser). (F'sC.) Herb.

24."). H. pyrenaicum, Spruu. (H. Oakesii, Lesq. and James). On old logs
and stones. (Moser). Herb.

oL' BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

ARTICLE IV

RECENT DISCOVERIES IN THE ST. JOHN GROLT,

No. 2.

Bv G. F. Matthew, 1). 8c, F. R. S. C.

(Read January 5, 1897.)

(See also Bull. IV., p. 97; Bull. V., p. 25; Bull. X., p. 34, x. and xi.
Bull. XL, p. 11 ; Bull. XIII., p. 94.)

Since the description was given in Bulletin X., page 34, of the
genus Protolenus, and its place in the Cambrian succession, anil of
Trematobolus, in Bulletin XIII., p. 94, no record has been presented
to the Society of the progress made in the study of the Acadian Cam-
brian faunas. It seems desirable, therefore, to add here a few words
on this subject.

The Protolenus Fauna. — The chief work done of late in this
direction has been the elaboration of the Protolenus Fauna*, which
appeared in the Transactions of the New York Academy of Science
(Vol. XIV., p. 101 to 153, PI. 1 to 11, and Fig. 1).

Any fauna which can be found in the sediments of the earth's
crust older than those which contain the Primordeal Fauna of Barrande
is of interest to naturalists and geologists, because Barrande named
this fauna as being the oldest, as he thought, except traces of worms
that had existed on the earth. But beside the peculiar fossils of the
Laurentian and other pre-Cambrian rocks, several faunas of greater
antiquity have since been described by Linnarsson in Sweden, by Kjerulf
in Norway, by Schmidt in Russia, and by Hicks in Wales; but these
European faunas agree in having only a few species of trilobites. A
fuller representation of pre-Pi imordeal trilobites is that discovered by
( '. I ). Walcott in Newfoundland; but even this does not reach, in variety
of trilobites, the number shown in the Protolenus Fauna. From this
cause and others, a brighter light is thrown on various zoological prob
Jems by the facies of this fauna than by that of any of the others.

* This fauna is contained in Division 1, Band b, or the Zone of Protolenus tBerj?eroiiia
ai i ice i ihalus (formerly Agraulvs articqphaltu). See Hull. X.. |> 12.

RECENT DISCOVERIES IN THE ST. JOHN GROUP. 33

In studying the development of the Primordeal trilobites by means
of their young, we find certain features in the latter which are lost in
the adult. But among the trilobites of the more ancient Protolenus
Fauna these features are to be found subsisting in the full-grown
trilobite.

One of these features is a long, cylindrical glabella (or middle lobe
of the head-shield). This in many of the larval trilobites is enlarged
in front, and so we find it in the adult of the genera Micmacca and
Ellipsocephalus of this fauna, showing how primitive these forms are.
Many of the trilobites have cylindrical glabellas (Avalonia and Proto-
lenus), which cylindrical shape is the second phase shown in the
glabella of the larval trilobites. Moreover none of the trilobites of
the Protolenus Fauna have contracted their glabellas to the short,
conical form prevalent in the trilobites of the Primordeal ^auna (Pty-
choparia, Conocephalites, Conocoryphe, Ctenocephalus, etc.)

Another feature in the trilobites of the Protolenus Fauna is the
prevalence of a continuous eyelobe. The eyelobe is a protective
ridge extending along a portion of the seam between the middle
piece of the head-shield and the movable cheek. In many Cambrian
trilobites this lobe is quite short, but in others, while it is short in the
adult, it is longer in the larval stages ; this is notably the case in
Paradoxides, which in the earliest species, and in the young of all the
species studied, has continuous eyelobes — that is, eyelobes extending
to the posterior furrow of the head-shield. Now this character of a
continuous eyelobe marks all the trilobites of the Protolenus Fauna in
which this part of the headshield has been preserved.

A narrow, movable cheek is apt to be associated with a continuous
eyelobe, and such movable cheek is the only kind so far found with
the trilobites of the Protolenus Fauna ; sometimes with, sometimes
without a genal spine. Such a cheek exists in the early larval exam-
ples of Pytehoparia and allied genera of the Primordeal Fauna, but
disappears in the adult, in which the area of the cheek is often quite
wide, owing to the withdrawal of the eye from the margin of the
headshield during growth.

A fourth primitive character of the trilobites of the Protolenus
Fauna is the shortness of the pleur;e, or' lateral extensions of the
thoracic lings. This may be observed as a characteristic of many
trilobites in the larval state, but disappears as the species comes to
maturity. Ellipsocephalus and several Agrauli preserve this character
in the adult condition, but in the majority of Primordeal trilobites

{See page 30).

34 bulletin ok the natural history society.

Some Types of the Protolenus Fauna.
Brachiopod.

Trematobolus insignis. — a. Interior of the ventral valve. />. Interior of
the dorsal valve. c. Dorsal valve seen from behind. d. Inside of beak of
ventral valve. Notation of the muscles, etc. p. a. Posterior adductor. ". '/.
Adjuster muscles. /. m. Lateral muscles, a. }>. Anterior depression. <■. //.
Cardinal pit. c. Cardinal process. s-. Hinge socket, t. Dentiform process
of the ventral valve. /. Foramen. From Assize 2, Band b, Div. 1, St. John
(iroup at Hanford Brook, St. John County, N. B.

Trilobites.

Protolenus elegans, W. D. Matthew (second group on left side). — The
upper figure represents the head shield. The detached piece to the right is the
movable cheek. The middle figure shows a joint of the thorax. The third
figure is a side view of the head-shield.

Protolenus paradoxoides (second group on right side). — This represents
the head-shield, with the movable cheek to the right, a little separated from
the middle piece.

N. B. — All the above are figured of the natural size.

Protolenus articephalus (third group on left side). — The upper figure
represents the middle piece of the head-shield. The second figure shows this
part viewed from the side.

Ellipsocephalus galeatus (third group on right side). — The upper figure
represents the head-shield, with the movable cheek somewhat separated. The
second figure is a side view of the same. The third figure represents a segment
of the thorax. The fourth figure is a side view of the middle piece of tin- head-
shield, of the variety or mutation agrauloides.

N. B. — All the figures of the third groups, right and left sides, are magnified
two diameters.

Olenus Zoppii, Menigh. — A complete trilobite, supposed to he a later
derivation from the same stock as Protolenus. From the Cambrian of Sardinia,
Italy. Introduced to show an entire trilobite of this family, and the relation
of the different parts of the test of a trilobite to each other. The other figures
of trilobites here given show parts of the test only.

The following genera compose the Protolenus Fauna: FoRAMINIFERA, Or-
liulina 4 sp., Globigerina 4 sp. Spongida, Monadites, Protospongia, Astro-
cladia? Brachiopoda, Lingulella 2 sp. , Lingulella? 2 sp. , Obolus, BotstWdia,
Trematobolus, Protosiphon, Obolella, Linnarst-onia, Acrotreta "_'s|i.. Acrothele.
Mollusca, Hyolithellue? Coleoides? Orthotheca, Hyolithes 5 sp., Diplotheca
2 sp, Pelagiella, Vblbarthella. Ostbacoda, Bipponicharion 3 sp. , Beyrichona
6sp., Aparchites 2 sp. , Primitia 4sp., Schmidtella, Leperditia 4 sp. , Beyrichia.
Phvllopoda, Lepiditta. Tkiloiuta, Protagraulos, Ellipsocephalus 3 sp. , Mic-
macca 4 sp., Avalonia, Protolenus 2 sp., subgen. Bergeronia 2 sp.

ep & s

^3P

I '35 )

36 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

the pleurae become extended in length when the animal is fully grown.
Many of the trilobites of the Protolenus Fauna have short pleurae,
and none have been found to possess the prolonged pleura? which mark
many species of the Paradoxides and Olenus Zones (Primordeal).

The development of a pygidium, or tail-piece of many joints, is
common in many trilobites of the Primordeal Fauna, and is still more
common in the Ordovician system above it. This part of the body-
covering is built of segments that were added gradually in the different
moults as the individual trilobite progressed toward maturity. A
pygidium of a few joints is therefore a primitive character, and the
entire subordination of this part to the headshield is a mark of simpli-
city of structure ; it is so throughout the Cambrian system*, but in
the next geological system (Ordovician) we sometimes find the pygidia
preserved in greater numbers and perfection than the head-shields (e. g.,
Asaphus). As a contrast to this, it may be said that while there are
thirteen species of trilobites in the Protolenus Fauna, of which a
hundred or more of heads have been found, only one pygidium has
been recognized. The pygidia of many of these species must, then, be
small and insignificant.

The primitive standing of the trilobites of this fauna is shown by
the following characteristics :

1. The long, cylindrical glabella.

2. The continuous eyelobe.

3. The narrow movable cheek.

4. The short pleura.

5. The small pygidium.

This fauna is remarkable for the variety and size of its ostracods,
and they differentiate the fauna into two sections — the lower in
Assize 1 marked by the presence of the genus Hipponicharion, the
upper in Assizes 2-4 marked by that of Beyrichona. These ostracods
are of comparatively large size, and, with other genera of this order,
there are a score of species. We seem to find this section of the crus-
taceans beginning to take the place of the trilobites in those oldest
Cambrian beds, and it may be the dominant order in older deposits.

In this fauna we find ourselves among a very primitive assemblage
of Brachiopods, for among them are forms which it is difficult to assign

'l'li.' two genera, IMicrodiscus and Lgnostus, may seem no1 to bear out this principle,
but it is i.. in- remembered thai these are abnormal genera, for in the former the joints of
the thorax may in- from two in four, while in the latter thej are strictly limited u> two;

hence the pygidium enlarged bj additional - Ites, us a counterpoise to the enlarging

beadshield. This provision enabled the animal to fold itself together and thus prol
soft under parts.

RECENT DISCOVERIES IN THE ST. JOHN GROUP; 37

to any known genus ; many are small, some are minute, and the larger
forms belong to the Obolidse and 8iphonotretidte. One of the latter
is remarkable as being of the inarticulate order, yet having a distinct
articulation at the hinge (Trematobolus). Another is notable in
beginning life as one genus (Schizambon) and closing it as another
(Siphonotreta), this being shown by the larval stages through which
it passed.

A remarkable occurrence in this fauna is that of Foramenifera, of
which several genera are present. The most notable are Orbulina and
Globigerina, which at present are inhabitants of the open sea, on whose
bottom they have left in modern times deposits of vast extent and
thickness. Foramenifera abound in some of the Carboniferous deposits,
but they have not been reported, so far as I know, from older geologi-
cal systems ; they will, however, probably be found in the intermediate
deposits.

From the preceding remarks it will be seen that the exploitation
of the Protolenus Fauna has resulted in a useful addition to the knowl-
edge of early Cambrian geology.

The Geological Map of part of Kennebecasis Valley. (See next page).
— This map, originally prepared to show the distribution of the Cam-
brian rocks of Kennebecasis valley, is useful also to exhibit other
points in the geology of this interesting basin. The index to the
formations is divided and placed in the lower corners, that part to the
right shows the Pre-Cambrian rocks, that to the left the Cambrian
and later terranes.

The foundation of the whole geological structure is the portion
indicated by vertical bars. These are very ancient sedimentary masses
classed with the Laurentian system of Canada. These old stratified
rocks have been broken through by igneous intrusions (quartz-diorites,
etc.,) of great age, which form a belt across the map, interrupted at
points by the waters of Kennebecasis Bay.

Next in age come the great mass of igneous rocks of effusive or
volcanic origin which form the principal part of the parish of Kingston,
these occupy the upper side of the map. A parallel arrangement may
be seen to hold for these three belts ; this is due to the presence of
ancient and profound faults or breaks in the earth's crust of very
ancient date that run in an E. N. E. direction ; along these fault lines
the rocks have moved up and down more or less during the ages.

Black areas are those occupied by Cambrian rocks which now form

=-r-r >

9 it 3^

• 1. i§ &?

\*>

"Xj

4

Q

p

1='

\

w

O

US

S>

2 2*

1*3

8

2

? tD

- ts

B W

2 «-4 -4

r n

£> »

1*

pi 5j pr

^ to

to

CO

pi

2

RECENT DISCOVERIES IX THE ST. JOHN GROUP. 39

narrow strips or wedge-shaped belts of small extent, which it will be
seen, are always closely connected with the older rocks.

Lastly, the Lower Carboniferous rocks form basins of sediments,
filling in the hollows of the Cambrian and the older rocks and spread-
ing in the valleys. They are the youngest rocks visible in this area,
except the loose aggregations of Post-pleiocene gravel, sand and clay
which are not represented in this map. The Lower Carboniferous
shows two principal divisions — one reddish and of marine origin, the
other of grey color and containing scanty remains of land plants rare
in this part of the valley, but more abundant farther eastward. The
relative antiquity of these two parts of the formation has not been
determined. The grey beds are seen at Hasting's Cove, on the south
side of Kennejpecasis valley, and in Milkish passage on the north side.

A great accumulation of boulder beds in the red division of this
system is well exposed on Long Island, where it comes out on the river
at the " Minister's " Face, a bold bluff extending from the outcrop of
Cambrian rocks half-way to the eastern end of the island.

The Cambrian Rocks of the Kennebecasis Valley. — It will be
remembered that in the annual report of the Society for 1897 allusion
was made to work carried on on the Cambrian rocks of the Kennebe-
casis valley. We are now able to present some of the results of this
work.

Sedimentation. — The sedimentation of the Cambrian in this valley
was found to show important differences from that of the valleys to the
north and south.

All through the Etcheminian period, which preceded the true
Cambrian, this valley, with the surrounding territory north, south and
west, was elevated above the sea, and was apparently an island having
recently ejected volcanic rocks to the north-west and south-east of the
present Cambrian valleys. This island and the volcanic ridges
furnished sediment to the Etcheminian sea.

When the Cambrian time arrived changes of level in the land took
place, so that while the Kennebecasis valley sank beneath the sea,
the ridges on either side of it, consisting, on one side of volcanic rocks,
and on the other of old Laurentian sedimentaries, remained aboA*e the
sea. Thus was the Cambrian sea in this district divided into three
areas of deposition, which to some extent were independent of each
other, but not so far as to make any very material difference in the
faunas.

40 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

It is evident that the deposits in the middle basin (Kennebecasis
valley) were much thinner than those of the southern (St. John)
basin. This is shown by the small narrow strips of sediments of
which the Cambrian here is composed, and by the absence of the
upper division (Bretonian), which, being of fine soft shale, would be
easily removed by denudation. The middle division (•Tohannian),
which in the southern basin shows a thickness of 1,000 feet, is here
so reduced as to show only a tithe of this thickness. The Paradoxides
beds, though not well exposed, also seem much thinner than in the
southern basin, and only the Protolenus beds, by their volume and
texture, fully bear out the aspect of their counterpart in the southern
basin.

It would appear, then, that while a great part of the Cambrian
series is present in this valley, it is very much reduced in thickness ■
from this it may be inferred that the floor of the Cambrian sea was
sinking in the area of the southern basin much more rapidly than in
the middle basin, and for most of the time was being filled up with
sedimentary deposits as fast as it sank.

Faunas. — An interesting discovery in the Kennebecasis valley
was that of the fauna of Hasting's Cove, which is a sub-fauna of the
Paradoxides beds. Hitherto we had not found in the Acadian Cam-
brian rocks anything to correspond to the Upper Paradoxides beds of
Sweden, the sub-faunas found in the southern (St. John) basin being
such as are paralleled by the Lower Paradoxides beds of that country.
At Hasting's Cove, however, we came across some genera not before
found in this region, and which recalled the facies of the Swedish
Upper Paradoxides beds, these were Anomocare and Dolichometopus ;
and associated with them was the easily recognized genus Dorypyge,
found in the Middle Cambrian of western America and of China.
By this sub-fauna we can link the upper part of our Paradoxides beds
with the corresponding rocks in Sweden, West America and China.

Another interesting discovery made in this valley was finding
of a type of trilobite in company with Agnostus pisiformis, L., which
showed peculiar phases of development. In this type were contained
two species which, so far as the headshields arc concerned, could not
in the earliest stages lie distinguished from each other. They first
become separable by their pygidia, which in one species takes the
form of Olenus and in the other that of Anomocare. It would thus
appear that from the one phylum or stem form two genera were
developed. (See the opposite pag

DeveIop7rLen4
Jlcaniholeniis /inom

miqer

pmig

o c a.r e

jUuU

la-Ural
Spine 5'

i

PL,

2 y*v>n.

1 1. *m ■

^ -m>rv

A7/0*? i*™^

(J

api'ca?

Tartly I
ax a£-[

knob J
wo$i

an ay-
Knob

moS+
have
an ap-
i cat
spine

all

hav?
an up-
teal

spi"?

olIZ

have.
art aj>-<

7 TTim..

6>n

h m-

K

3^im

rJtt lyy^m.

apical J i^
Spirt*

ft

no

spine

J >nm ,

>JTil&
secies

5epf-
ttese

Ply c7\o partna

J"t->nnt..

JlduH

'Hn>*.'

J*

Jorm
as in

1x -yyinx

% -*nr*v

i'lTnnx.

4 trim 1

jortn
more

like A.

Spiniger

k

rwtical

42 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

The distinction of the headshields of the two species come at a
later period of growth. Both, in the younger stages (though not in
the youngest) have an apical spine on the margin of the headshield ;
this spine continues on the headshield of the Oleniod form, whose
growth is arrested, so that it never reaches the size of the Anomo-
caroid form. In this latter the apical spine is gradually absorbed, so
that in the final moult there is no trace of a spine in the front of the
shield.

We see from this example how not only two species, but two
genera, may be developed from the same rootstock. That is, the
differentiation may produce two separate genera direct from the
phylum, without the indirect method of producing separate species
before the generic characters appear.

To make this instance of development more easily understood the
diagram on the preceding page has been prepared, showing the branching
of the trilobite Acantholenus spiniger from the stock which eventuated
in Anomocare stenotoides. From this diagram it will be seen that the
divergence occurred in very small heads, for even the caudal shield,
1 mm. long, of the former species has all the rings of the adult, hence
the differentiation must have occurred in a still earlier moult. We
assume that this may have been the |mm. size. But if so the com-
panion species A. stenotoides must have had an equally small pygidium
as a starting point ; so the differentiation must have occurred as early
as the 1 mm. moult (i. e., when the head and caudal shield together
were of this length).

But, as the diagram shows, the head-shields of the two species
cannot be distinguished until they reach a size of 2|mm. Had we
perfect tests, however, showing the head and caudal shields in connec-
tion, we should be able to distinguish the two trilobites by the pygidia
when this part was no more than ljmm. long, but failing this the
separation of the head cannot be effected before the 2Jmm. moult.
In the very smallest size the spine at the front of the shield (apical
spine) cannot be found, but immediately thereafter becomes a distin-
guishing feature, and continues so through all the earlier muults. But
by degrees it becomes absorbed in Anomocare stenotoi<!>'*, as the diagram
shows, but in the other species it continues as a distinct ornament until
the full size is attained, which, however, is much below that of the
species last named.

As no other type of trilobites that can be confounded with them
occurs with these, it is clear that we have here a case of development

RECENT DISCOVERIES IN IHE ST JOHN GROUP. 43

from a common stock which at once pass to different genera, one some-
what closely like an Olenus, the other diverging from a Pychoparian
ancestor into the resembling genus Anomocare.

Other points of less moment have been noted in reference to the
Cambrian faunas of the Kennebecasis valley; thus two of the thirteen
species of trilobites of the Protolenus Fauna were found in olive-grey
sandstones in this valley, and two new Ostracods were also obtained
from the same beds. A very interesting Brachiopod from these sand-
stones was that which is referred to on an earlier page as passing
during its growth from the condition of a Schizambon to that of a
Siphonotreta.

Though since their deposition the Cambrian beds of this valley
have suffered great disturbance and enormous denudation, and what
remains of them are now to a great extent covered by the lake-like
expansion of the Kennebecasis River, "or concealed by sediments of
Lower Carboniferous age, enough remains exposed to throw consider-
able light on their sedimentation and palaeontology.

Upturnings and Dislocations of the Cambrian Beds. — The sharp folds into
which the strata of the St. John basin were thrown have been described in
Volume VIII of the Transactions of the Royal Society of Canada, pages 125
to 128, and displacements along faults of a high hade, of hundreds of feet.
Horizontal displacement has also been shown by the result of well borings in the
city of St. John and its neighborhood ; the most remarkable are those that
have come to light through borings in the upper (Bretonian) division. At
Jones' Brewery on Union Street, a boring was put down to a depth of 385 feet,
in what appeared to be a deep narrow trough of black shales, having an overturned
dip of about 70 degrees. Theoretically, this bore should have been continuously
in the black shales of this division, but at the depth of 317 feet the flag-stones
of Division 2 were struck ; these flags at the surface are about 300 feet to the
N. W., hence there would appear to be a horizontal overthrust of the black
slates on the flagstones to the extent of about 280 feet.

Similarly on the eastern side of Courtney Bay at the Almshouse, hard grey
flags were encountered in a well sunk in the black slates at a depth of 700 feet
and penetrated for 55 feet. Here the dip of the beds is about the same'as in
the city and the grey flags of Division 2 (Johnannian) appear at the surface
about 500 feet to the N. N. W. ; hence there would appear to be an overthrust
here of about 460 feet.

A force operating from the same direction as that which produces these
old conditions of overthrust strata, is in operation on a milder scale at the
present day, for by reference to No. 12 of this Bulletin, page 34, it will be seen
that since the Glacial Epoch there has been dislocation of the strata of the St.
John Group whose phenomena show thrusting from a S. E. direction. The
old displacements, however, are on a gigantic scale compared with these.

ii BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

ARTICLE V.

NOTES ON THE NATURAL HISTORY AND PHYSI-
OGRAPHY OF NEW BRUNSWICK.

By W. F. Ganong.

-On the Color of the Water in New Brunswick Rivers.

Read March 2nd, 1897; re-written April, 1898.

New Brunswick is a land of splendid rivers. I have looked on the
maps in vain for an equal extent of country elsewhere which can show
so fine a series. For it might the words have been written : "A good
land, a land of brooks of water, of fountains and depths that spring
out of valleys and hills."

Everyone who has been much with rivers must have felt that they
possess distinct characters or individualities. This character is a
subtle aggregate, but a leading physical component of it is the purity
and color of the water. The characters of our rivers I shall try else-
where to express ; I ask the Society now to consider the physical
problem involved in their colors.

It is possible to find in the province every gradation between
the sluggish, heavily sedimented, almost black streams of the peaty
districts of Kent, Gloucester, and parts of Charlotte, and the rippling,
limpid streams of the central and northern watershed. The causes of
the color and opaqueness of the former are plain enough ; they leach
out the dark coloring matters of swamp and bog, together with much
of the flocculent organic matter. But the clear northern rivers, when
low in their stony beds, carry little sediment, and that not organic ;
but they show curious differences in color, for some of them are green
and others are brown. In thus speaking of color, I do not refer to
glint from their surfaces, nor the hue in rapids and waterfalls, but to
that which one sees at low water, when he looks through a s:ill surface,
nearly vertically, into a deep pool with gravel or boulder bottom. Seen
thus, the Restigouche is light green, and the Metapedia light brown ;
and where these two come together, one may run a canoe for three
hundred yards on a boundary so sharp that on the right all is clear

NATURAL HISTORY AND PHYSIOGRAPHY OF NEW BRUNSWICK. 45

green and on the left all equally clear brown. One may see the same
contrast where Green River enters the St. John, but with a result less
striking, for the greater river, though brown, is less clear. Indeed,
the St. John water is of mixed color and texture — -one might call it a
golden brown — as would be expected from its receiving so great a
mixture of streams. Another striking contrast of color is to be seen
in the two branches of Charlo River. Where they cross the highway
road, a quarter of a mile apart, the western is clear green, the eastern
clear brown. The upper branches of the Restigouche are green ;
Xepisiguit is, I believe, brown ; but I have no exact information as to
the color of Tobique, and the many other clear rivers which abound in
all the northern wilderness from Temiscouata and the St. John east-
ward. A Rlue River empties into St. Francis, but 1 know not whether
the name describes the water ; and Blue Lakes are mentioned near
the Cascapedia in the Geological Survey Reports (1881, D., p. 20),
though the color is not in the water, but by reflection from the blue
clay bottom. Blue water lakes occur, however, in Europe,* though
green is much more common in clear lakes, both there and in this
country.

The explanation of the difference between the green and brown
colors is no doubt this : the physical composition of the purest river water
is such that when white light enters and is reflected back through it,
the green rays are absorbed least, and hence preponderate in the light
which comes to the eye. The clear, brown rivers, on the other hand,
though possessing green water as a basis, have added to it a brown
liquid (not sedimentary) coloring matter, leached out from swampy
places. What we know of the Restigouche and Metapedia is consistent
with this, for the former has hardly any, if any, swampy area upon it,
while the latter has at least some swamp around Metapedia Lake
(Johnston, Notes on North America, I, 387). I have no such data
for the two branches of Charlo River.

The subject has been carefully studied in Europe, and an important
memoir on the subject has recently appeared.! It will aid to the
solution of the problem if members of the Society will make exact
observations upon the color of the water in our clear rivers, particu-
larly giving attention to the character of the country through which
they flow.

*The deep blue color of the Lake of Geneva differs from that of the other Swiss lakes,
which are all more or less of a greenish hue . . . the cause of the phenomenon has
never been actually ascertained —Baedeker's Switzerland, 15th Ed., p. 222.

t La Couleur des Eaux. Par Ad. Kemna. Bull, de la Soc. Beige de Geologie. X , 211,

46 bulletin of the natural history society.

5. — On the Heights of New Brunswick Hills.

Read April 6th. 1897; re-written April, 1898.

In the summer of 1896, I climbed two of the best-known and mo?t
accessible of the higher hills of the province — Squaw Cap in Resti-
gouche, and Mount Pleasant in Charlotte. Later I sought information
about their heights, but found, wit h surprise, that for neither was it accur-
ately known ; and later inquiry showed that this is true as to the
heights of most New Brunswick hills. Indeed, nobody knows positively
where the highest point in New Brunswick lies, much less how high
it is.

It is generally stated that the highest point in the province is Big
Bald Mountain, at the head of the Lower South Branch of Nepisiguit ;
but this, if not an error, is at least not proven. It rests solely on the
authority of the Geological Survey map, which marks that mountain
as 2,700 feet, the greatest height marked anywhere in the province.
But this height appears to be a compiler's or copyist's mistake, for
Dr. R, W. Ells, in his Geological Report (for 1881, D, 35) describing
that region, estimates Bald Mountain at 2,500 feet — not 2,700 — and
he has recently had the kindness to write me that his estimate really
was as given in his report, and that he does not know how the greater
height came to be placed on the map. No other officer of the Geologi-
cal Survey has been there, nor are measurements by anyone else known.
He says, however, that he thinks Bald Mountain " the highest land
in Northern New Brunswick — at least as far as I have travelled."
The Geological map marks in that region " Peaks rising to 2,600 or
2,700 feet," which, of course, is so stated to include the height given
to Bald Mountain. We must, therefore, consider that it is far from
settled whether or not Bald Mountain is the highest in New Brunswick.
If this measurement of 2,500 feet by Dr. Ells is correct, there is
another higher peak in the province, namely, Bald Mountain, beside
Nictor Lake, which is given on the Geological map as 2,537. This
must therefore stand as, for the present, our greatest known height.
It is not likely that any point in the province will reach 2,800 feet.
Who will be the first to demonstrate the highest point in New Bruns-
wick 1

It will be of interest to note some heights elsewhere, for comparison-
The highest in the world is Mount Everest, 2!»,000 feet ; in Europe,
Mount Blanc, 15,730 feet; in England, Scawfell, 3,208; in Wales,
Wyddva, 3,571 ; in British America, St. Elias, 18,086 ; in the Tinted
States, Blanca Peak, 14,463 ; in New Hampshire, Washington, 6,290 ;

NATURAL HISTORY AND PHYSIOGRAPHY OF NEW BRUNSWICK. 47

in Maine, Katahdin, 5,248 ; in Nova 8cotia, the Cobequids, about
1,100. New Brunswick heights are therefore not great.

Our knowledge of New Brunswick heights above sea level is based
upon the following data :

(1) Levels determined by canal, railroad, and waterworks surveys. These
are many and valuable, but scattered, and not easily accessible, and he who
would collect, and reduce them to a single datum, would do great service to
our physiography.

(2) The line of levels run along the St. John from high tide at Chapel
Bar, above Fredericton, to Grand Falls, by Robert Foulis, for the New Bruns-
wick government, in 1826. They are recorded on a map in the Crown Land
Office. It has been pointed out by Hind (Preliminary Report, 30) that Foulis'
figures are too low, which Mr. Shewen tells me is confirmed by the railroad
levels.

(3) Barometric and spirit-level observations made in connection with the
Boundary disputes. One of these was a series across the province from Grand
Falls to Bay Chaleur, made by the Boundary Commissioners in 1839. The full
account of them is given in " Correspondence relating to the North American
boundary," British Blue Book, 1840. A central station, whose height was
determined from Foulis' levels, was established at Grand Falls, where the
central observations for weather were made, and by mercurial barometers many
heights along the Tobique, Nepisiguit, and Jacquet rivers were carefully deter-
mined. As Foulis' figures were used for the datum, all heights in this series
are too low. These, with some others, are given in a list by Hind in his report
on the geology of N. B. , 1865, pp. 23-24, and many others from railway surveys
and other sources are contained in the same work. Along the north line from
the source of the St. Croix two lines have been run — one with barometer, by
Bouchette, about 1817 (much too high), and another with spirit-level, by
Graham, in 1840-41, published in a document of the 3rd Session, 27th Congress.

(4) The measurements by the Admiralty Survey of heights along the
coasts, recorded on their charts. I do not know how they were made, nor their
base level, but without doubt they were taken with care.

(5) The determinations with the aneroid barometer made by the officers of
the Oeological Survey of Canada, particularly by Robert Chalmers. These are
all recorded on the official maps, and are frequently referred to in the various
geological reports. They include lake surfaces, as well as hills. The controls
for weather changes were obtained from the nearest meteorological stations in
the province. Like all aneroid observations made by a single instrument in
the field, the results can be regarded as only approximate. The base level is,
on some maps, high tide; on others, mean tide.

(6 1 Aneroid and theodolite observations made by surveyors and others for
their private satisfaction. William Murdoch, C.E., of St. John, has made more
numerous measurements than any other that I know of, and he has kindly sent
me a list of these. A few made by myself are recorded in a later note of this
series (No. 13).

48 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

Most of our greater heights are of hills composed of very hard,
intrusive rocks, the only kinds which have been able to withstand
the long erosion which New Brunswick has suffered, and the awful
battering which it received in the glacial period. They are either of
granite, as in the higher Bald Mountain group, the Cow Mountains,
Bald Mountain (Queens), Mount Pleasant, etc., or else of trap (Dolerite
and Diorite), as in Squaw Cap,* the Blue Mountains, Moose Mountain,
etc. The trap mountains are more abrupt and isolated than those of
granite, both because they are intruded in smaller masses, and also,
perhaps, because they are newer and less eroded, as well as harder.
New Brunswick owes most of its bold and beautiful scenery to these
intrusive rocks ; and flat and tame indeed would much of its surface
be were it not for them. Some heights occur in the hard pre Cambrian
rocks, as in Bald Mountain, and others near Nictor, and those along
the Shepody Road in Kings and St. John. Some appear to be in much
softer rocks, as Shepody Mountain, Green River Mountain, etc., though
none of these are of great height. Possibly some of them are protected
by local caps of trap, as in Chamcook.

The heights of New Brunswick will not be completely nor accurately
known until a unified topographical survey of the entire province has
been made ; and this, because of its great expense, will be long in
coming. In the meantime, there is here offered, to those of us who
enjoy the pleasures of the chase, the opportunity to pursue, to our
complete content, that most elusive and alluring of all great game, new,
hard facts — in this case all the more charming since they must be
sought through the hardships of the northern wilderness. The deter-
mination of our principal heights is a fine problem for young lSew
Brunswickers.f

The heights recorded for the province have been taken above various
datum lines. A single datum was wanting, but this has recently been
established, by the calculation of mean tide level at St. John, by Mr.
E.T. P. Shewen,* and no doubt future measurements will all be referred
to it.

* The Geological Survey map colors it as composed of Upper Silurian rocks, but 1 found
it to be made of the same intrusive, igneous rocks as compose Sugar Loaf and the other
heights in that vicinity, and the red color on the map should be extended southwest to
include them. Probably the surveyors did not visit them, and were deceived by the name
Slate and by local descriptions. The rock breaks up into Mat, somewhat slaty, pieces.

tTwo observers working from the railroad levels with good barometers, one remaining
at base level to check the other, Could do much in summer excursions Or a long line of
levels could be carried across country by two parties with good aneroids— or. better, mer-
curial barometers one going ahead a few miles to a new station, while the other remained
as a check for weather; the latter then coming up, while the former was fixed as a check.
This would establish a line of stations in which, supposing the instruments to work together,
the only source of error would be the difference iu weather pressure between tin' two
stations, which would be the less the nearer the stations were together.

t See this Bulletin, later page.

NATURAL HISTORY AND PHYSIOGRAPHY OP NEW BRUNSWICK. 49

A List of the Heights above Sea Level of the Best-known
Hills of New Brunswick, with Authorities.

[A., Admiralty Charts; B., Boundary Commissioners; M., William Mur-
doch; G., myself (see note 13 of this series); G. F., Geological Survey, Maps
of Formations; G. S., Geological Survey, Maps of Surface Geology.]

Bald Mountain, Nictor— 2,537 (G. F.)

Bald Mountain, South Branch Nepisiguit— 2,500 (R. W. Ells).
Squaw Cap — 2,000 (G. S. — probably on authority of Hind).
Bald Head, Victoria— 1,866 (G. F.)
Blue Mountain, Victoria— 1,724 (G. F.)
Mars Hill, Maine— 1,688 (B. C. and G. F.)
Moose Mountain — 1,030 (G. F.)
Nashwaak Mountain — 855 (G. F.)

Bald Mountain, Queens— 1,120 (G. S.), 1,390 (M.), 1,462 (G.)
Shepody Mountain — 1,050 (A.)
Sugar Loaf, Restigouche — 950 (A.)
Mount Pleasant— 1,200 (G.)
Chamoook — 637, 627 'A.)
Ben Lomond — S50 (M.)
For fuller lists, see Hind (already referred to) and Bailey, Report, 1886, G. 6.

6. — Dalhousie and Saint Andrews. — A Coincidence.

Read June 1st, 1897.

There is a curious likeness between the most northerly and most
southerly towns of JS~ew Brunswick — Dalhousie and Saint Andrews.
They stand where tidal rivers empty into salt bays, and circling about
them are superb hill and sea views, in which Dalhousie has the
advantage as to hills, and Saint Andrews as to water. Prominent in
their landscapes are the Lower Carboniferous sandstones, which bear
rich farms and wear into soft, red cliffs, contrasting beautifully with
the blue of the sea. Both places are summer resorts, with big hotels,
and the colors and chatter of the summer visitor in the streets. All of
this is due to similar physiographic environment. Both are extremely
neat, with tasteful, old-fashioned residences and gardens, which shows
something in common in their people, perhaps a large proportion of
thrifty Scotch. Both are regularly laid out, on ample scale, for both
were expected to be — and for a time were — the principal towns of
their counties. But the grass grows and quiet reigns in their streets,
though with them both there is that air of self-respecting submission
to the fall from better days which so often makes both places and
people charming. For both are being surpassed by neighbors far less

50 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

attractive, but more happily situated for business, which in both cases
happen to be about sixteen miles away at the head of navigation. One
may trace yet other resemblances, some natural, some accidental. All
of these things — physiography, history, people, accident — combine to
produce in the two places an atmosphere not only remarkably alike,
bnt extremely agreeable ; and we may speak affectionately of the one
as the Saint Andrews of the north, or of the other as the Dalhousie of
the south, according to our point of view.

7. — On Halophytic Colonies in the Interior of New Brunswick.

Read Nov. 2nd, 1897; re-written April, 1898.

In the geographical distribution of plants no phenomena are of
greater interest than the occurrence of colonies isolated far from their
congeners in the midst of a different flora. The best known case of
this, and one which will occur to everyone in this connection, is the
presence of Arctic plants on high mountains even near the equator,
and in bogs and other cold places. We have Arctic plants in New
Brunswick, as Dr. Matthew* and Professor Fowlerf have shown ; but
we have also another kind of isolated colony, which has not yet been
described by our botanists — a colon}' of sea-shore plants at the .Salt
Springs near Sussex.

These springs — three or four in number — occur three miles east
of Sussex, beside the highway road to Moncton. The brine was form-
erly, but is not now, boiled down for salt. They break out in the
open fields and flow down to a fresh-water brook near by. On the
sandy shore around the springs and along their outlets grow plants
which give the place the appearance of a bit of the sea-shore. Several
years ago I noticed these plants, and last August I visited the place,
and collected the species listed below. The Phanerogams were identified
for me by Mr. Walter Deane and Dr. B. L. Robinson of Cambridge,
and the Alga- by Mr. F. L. Collins of Maiden, to all of whom, for their
valued aid, I tender my sincere thanks. They are listed about in the
order of their abundance, and the notes were made on the spot.

1. Salicomia herbacea, I.. The most abundant and characteristic plant:

very red and succulent.

2. Spergularia(Buda)8alina, Presl. On the sandy banks; very abundant.

3. Spergularia nalina, var. minor, Rob. (?)

4. Spergularia borealis, Rob. >,

*See Canadian Naturalist, 1869. 1 See Trans Royal Soc. Canada, V.

NATURAL HISTORY AND PHYSIOGRAPHY OF NEW BRUNSWICK. 51

5. Ranunculus Cymbalaria, Pursh. On edge of the .streams from the

spring's.

6. Atriplex patulum, L., var. hastatum, Gray. In sandy places.

7. Distichlis maritime/,, Raf.

S. Puccinellia maritima, Pari., var. minor, Watson. In very salt places.

9. Scirpus pungens, Vahl.

10. Juncus bv/onius, L.

11. Ilea fulvescens (Ag.) J. Ag.

12. Rhizoclonium, probably Kochianum.

13. Rhizoclonium, probably i->ji<<riniii var. implexum.

It will be noticed that all of the above species, except No. 10, are
of marked halophytic habit, characteristic of salt marshes or sea-coasts.
Probably a more skilful collector would find yet other species. One
in the list, Spergularia borealis, is new to our flora.

It is easy to understand how these plants persist where they are,
for the salt water of the springs is sufficiently like the salt water of
the sea. But how did they come there 1 The nearest sea-coast is, in
an air line, at least twenty-one miles away, with high hill-ranges
between. For the occurrence of such a colony, one of three explana-
tions is possible : — First, the plants may have been transported from
the sea-coast by man ; but the large number of the species, and espe-
cially the presence of the Alga?, is against such accidental introduction.
Second, natural modes of dissemination may have carried them from
the coast ; but the most of them are so little specialized for such
locomotion that this is very difficult to believe. Third, under different
geographical conditions in the past they may have extended continuously
from the sea to this place, but have since become extinct between.
This is doubtless the correct explanation, and is homologous with that
of the occurrence of isolated Arctic colonies. During the latest post-
glacial subsidence this region dipped beneath the sea to an extent
estimated by Dr. Matthew at 200 feet.* At that time the sea, bringing
the coast plants with it, must have extended up the Kennebecasis,
deeply burying these springs, which, as shown by the Intercolonial
Railroad levels, are not over seventy feet above present high-tide mark
at St. John. The subsequent elevation of the land, with the return
of the fresh water, would of course exterminate the Halophytes every-
where except where they could find salt, which happened to be the
case at these springs.

There are other salt springs in New Brunswick — in the parish of
Upham, and at Bennett's Brook, near Petitcodiac ; while others are
said to occur on Coal Creek, Queens County. There is also a brook
* Bulletin of this Society, No. 2, page 4.

52 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

with slightly saline taste just above Plaster Rock, on the Tobique.
Here is a most attractive problem for our local societies — to determine
whether other colonies occur in these places.

Halophytic colonies occur about the salt springs near Syracuse,
New York, and no doubt at other places in Eastern North America ;
but they appear not to have been studied from this point of view.

8. — Upon the Manner in which the Bay of Fundy Rivers of
New Brunswick empty into the .Sea

Read Dec. 7th, 1897; re-written April, 1898.

The remarkable difference between the way in which most of the
rivers east of St. John and those west of it fall into the Bay of Fundy
must be well known to members of this Society ; but I have not seen
in our physiographic literature any special reference to its causes. On
the one hand, those of the western series — the St. Croix, the Digde-
guash, the Magaguadavic, New River, the Lepreau — all have falls
where they meet the salt water, and, at least at high tide, fall directly
into it from considerable heights.* On the other hand, the eastern
series (beginning really not at St. John, but beyond Mispec, which has
a fall and belongs with the western series), including the two streams
at Quaco, Big Salmon, Little Salmon, Quiddy, Goose, Point Wolfe, and
Upper Salmon rivers, and the brooks amongst them, all run evenly
into the sea without natural falls. At first the question as to the causes
of this constant difference in the two series is puzzling, but really its
solution is not difficult.

We notice, first of all, that this feature of their mouths is really
characteristic of their entire courses. Thus those of the western series,
running all in comparatively open country, consist largely of long dead,
waters (in some cases forming large lakes), or stretches with little fall,
and often without ledge-rock bottoms, separated by falls over rocky
ledges ; and it is up one of these deadwaters of the sunken valley to
the next fall above that the tide in every case runs. But those of the
eastern series, which all run in deep, V-shaped valleys, cut down 400
to 600 feet below the level of an elevated plateau, have bottoms of
ledge rock, and run as torrents, but with no vertical falls of any
account, and with deadwaters or lakes only on top of the plateau.
The question, then, resolves itself into this — what has produced the
falls and deadwaters in the one case and not in the other1?

* This fact is noted by Mr. Chalmers in his Report on Surface Geology, 1890, N. 13.

NATURAL HISTORY AND PHYSIOGRAPHY OF NEW BRUNSWICK. 53

Falls in glaciated regions are chiefly the result of the damming
or filling of shallow valleys by glacial drift dropped across them at the
close of the Glacial Period, by which the water was held back and
made to seek an outlet over the lowest point of the rim of the valley,
which usually is a rocky ledge. Such dams are easily to be seen at
the falls on these western rivers. On the other hand, where long
stretches of rapids or of even descents over ledge-rock occur, the river
is probably in its pre-glacial channel ; and pre-glacial channels usually
have no falls, other than small ones due to unequal hardness or jointing
of the rock, and hence to uneven erosion, because there was ample
time in the pre-glacial ages for any which may have existed to have
become eroded out, as all falls are tending to do. In general, then, we
may conclude that where falls and dead waters are, the pre-glacial
valleys are more or less filled up, while long series of rapids over ledge-
rock, as a rule, indicate a pre-glacial channel. Now, while the western
series of our rivers have large portion.! of their valleys of the dammed-up
sort, those of the eastern series show no glacial dams, and no glacial
falls — at least in their lower courses ; but the channel is always of
bed rock, except where thinly covered by gravel and boulders, brought
down by the stream itself. But why were these eastern valleys not
also dammed by the glacial drift 1 Was the region not glaciated 1
Now there is abundant evidence that it was, though probably not so
heavily as the less elevated western section. But while the quantity
of drift dropped in Southern New Brunswick was sufficient to fill the
comparatively shallow valleys of the western series, it could not fill to
the tops these eastern valleys of 400 to 500 feet of depth, and, unless
they were filled completely to the top, and a little more, the rivers
would not be forced out of them, and hence would form neither new
falls nor new valleys, but would simply cut out and wash away the
glacial dam itself and resume their pre-glacial beds. The depth of these
valleys, then, if this explanation be correct, has been their salvation,
and the different depths of the valleys in the two series is the real
reason for the presence of the falls at the mouth of the one series, and
their absence from the other.*

* The same general explanation will no doubt also apply to some other deep valleys,
such as that of the Restigouche, which has no falls, but everywhere a rocky channel.

Dr. G. F. Matthew, in remarks made after the reading of this paper, suggested, as
subordinate influences at work to aid in producing the differences between the two series,
the following: First, the high eastern plateau tended to turn aside the glacial currents
into the St, John, and hence less drift was dropped into the eastern than into the western
series, which have valleys directly along the line of the glacial flow. Second, the much
greater slope of the eastern rivers must have given them greater power to wash out drift.
Third, the formation through which the eastern series have cut their valleys is fairly uniform

54 bulletin of the natural history society.

9. — The Crayfish in New Brunswick.

Read March 1st, 1898.

In the sixth Bulletin of this Society there was published a short
paper with the above title. In the Educational Review for November,
1889, appeared an article, with some additional information, unsigned,
but known to be by the same author. In the proceedings of the United
States National Museum, volume XIII., p. 612, in a work by Dr. Walter
Faxon, the chief authority on this group, the New Brunswick localities
of the two preceding papers are summarized, but no new ones added.
Since then nothing further has appeared, nor does a paper by Dr.
Faxon, on the Crayfishes, now in press, contain any new data for this
l'egion. The subject is of sufficient interest to warrant calling the
attention of the Society once more to it.

Only a single species of Crayfish is known to occur in New Bruns-
wick— Cambarus (Astacus) Bartonij, (Fabr.) Gir. It has been found
abundantly in the valley of the St. John (into which it has no doubt
spread from Penobscot waters), in the Restigouche, Upsalquitch, and
Miramichi ; but it has not been reported from the Nepisiguit, St. Croix,
Richibucto, Petitcodiac, nor from Nova Scotia nor Prince Edward
Island. As it cannot live in salt water, it probably has not spread
into either of the latter provinces, but it ought to occur in other New
Brunswick rivers, especially those connected by low, swampy portages
with the Penobscot or St. John. The distribution of single species in
relation to the influences controlling it is always of much scientific-
interest, and members of this Society should be on the watch for
additional data in this case.

The Crayfish cannot be mistaken for any other animal. It is like
a miniature lobster, three to four inches long, of a dark, ashy-brown
color. It lives only in fresh water, and forms burrows in alluvial
lands.

in texture, while the western valleys have cut across many bands of different composition
and hardness, producing an alternation of deeply eroded, with less eroded, stretches. The
filling of the former by drift would force the rivers to seek new outlets over the harder
ridges Practically, however, the alternating bands are too broad to have had much effect
of this kind, and an inspection of the geological map of Charlotte shows that there is no
relation between positions of the falls and the transition between formations. Fourth, post-
glacial changes of level, known to be going on, may have buried falls once existing at the
mouths of the eastern series, as they have done in the case of the St. John, off Partridge
Island. But against the former presence of such falls on the eastern series must speak
the fact that there are at present none above the mouths, as on the western series.

natural history and physiography of new brunswick. 55

10. — The Marine Invertebrates of the Western Part of
Bay Chaleur.

Read March 1st, 1898.

There is no part of our marine invertebrate fauna so little known
as that uf the western part of Bay Chaleur. The subject has been
studied for the Bay of Fundy by Stimpson, Verrill, and members of this
Society, and for Northumberland Strait by Whiteaves, and the works
of these investigators are well known : but for Bay Chaleur, except
references by Whiteaves to dredgings at its mouth, and scanty notes
by Bell (Canadian Naturalist, IV, 197) on Caraquette, with a single
reference to Dalhousie, together with a reference by Morse to the
occurrence of Littorina litorea at Bathurst in 1855 (Bulletin Essex
Institute, XII, 176), there appears to be nothing in the literature of
the subject. Yet the question as to what invertebrates occur in the
western part of that bay is of considerable interest in connection with
the distribution of the southern colony so remarkably developed along
our North Shore from Caraquet to Bay Verte, the history of which
may be found fully traced in the Transactions of the Royal Society7 of
Canada, VIII, iv, 167-185, and by Upham in American Journal of
Science, XLIII, 1892, p. 203. It was therefore natural that during a
visit to Dalhousie and Campbellton in August, 1896, I should examine
the shores with some eagerness. As it was time of neap tides, I
could not see all of the littoral fauna, but to my surprise, what I did
see showed no trace of the southern species which I had expected to
find there. At Campbellton the Restigouche River makes the water
brackish and the shores muddy, conditions which result always in a
sparse fauna. At Dalhousie, however, the abundant species were
Mya arenaria, Macoma fusca, Mytilus edulis, Littorina palliata,
Tectura testudinalis, small crabs, a small starfish probably Asterias
littoralis, and many Bryozoa, etc. Littorina litorea was, however,
very rare, and I could not find a single specimen of Purpura lapillus.
Stranded on the beaches in abundance was a large medusoid jelly-fish
resembling Cyanea arctica, though often of a deep amethyst color.
Fucus vesiculosus and nodosus were abundant, the former less so than
the latter. In fact the general aspect of the shore forms, including
the dead shells cast up on the beaches, was much more like Passama-
quoddy Bay than like Shediac Harbor, which I visited last summer,
and which has the southern colony. It must be noted, however, that
Bell reports Crepidula fornicata, a decidedly southern form, from
Dalhousie, but I saw no trace of it. In general, then, these notes,

.'56 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

scanty as they are, seem to show that the southern fauna is but
slightly represented at the head of Bay Chaleur. Though the summer
temperature of the water seems high, it is probably, owing to the
proximity of deeper water and more considerable tides, lower than at
Shediac, and a little below the surviving point for these southern
forms ; and perhaps also the more rocky character of the shores is
unfavorable to sand-loving species such as most of the southern ones
are. Dredging may yield some other forms, though the general
character of the coast does not promise a rich fauna.

11. — A Natural History of New Brunswick projected in 1771.

Read March 1st, 1898.
From June, 1770, until June, 1771, Lieut. William Owen, R.N.,
lived at Campobello, and his journal, part of which has been printed
by the Historical Society, contains in the yet unpublished parts some
items of no little scientific interest. Thus, under date of October 1st,
1770, he says that, when near Indian Island, he "made here two
hauls of the trawl, but took nothing material except a few curious
shells, and other sub-marine productions." No doubt this is the earliest
existent reference to dredging in New Brunswick waters. Three years
earlier he speaks of dredging off the coast of Massachusetts and finding
scallops, and " sea-eggs, starfish, coral, weeds and other curious sub-
marine productions." During the entire year at Campobello he kept
a very careful meteorological record of temperature, wind direction
and force, and general weather, the whole given in full in his journal.
This is no doubt the earliest record kept in New Brunswick, and is so
full and carefully made that it must be of much more than antiquarian
interest. But most important of all is the following passage :

" It was his [i. c. , the author's] intention (and some time before he left the
island he began) to make very particular observations on the quantity of rain
and snow that fell; the greatest depth of the snow upon a plain: the depth the
frost penetrated into the earth; the nature and quality of the soil, and the
different strata under; some remarks in the three kingdoms — animal, vegetable.
and mineral; the progress of vegetation; the migration of birds and fish; the
seasons for the spermaceti whale, cod, haddock, and [Hillock fisheries, as well
as the river fisheries of sturgeon, salmon, shad, bass, and ale wives; the mode
and time of killing seals; the Indian's seasons and manner of hunting for their
furs and peltries; their fishing and fowling; the modi' and best season for
hunting the moose or orignal, the cariboo, the fallow deer, and every other
miscellaneous matter or event that mighl occur. This work he left to be carried
on by a sober and ingenious young man he left there, who was, unfortunately,
lost in the " Owen " (with all her crew and passengers) on his return to Eng-
land eighteen months after."

NATURAL HISTORY AND PHYSIOGRAPHY OF NEW BRUNSWICK. 57

This comprehensive plan, even though not carried out, entitles
Lieut. Owen to a place in the list of naturalists who have worked in
New Brunswick, and his name would come next afcer that of Nicolas
Denys, whose natural history of the Maritime Provinces, published at
Paris in 1672, is the foundation work for our natural history.

12. — On the Physiography of the Basin of the Mahood
(Lepreau) Lakes.

Read April 5th, 1898.

At the head of the Lepreau River lies a chain of small lakes known
to a few fishermen but hitherto un visited by any naturalist. No officer
of the Geological Survey has been there, and, aside from a brief mention
of them in one geological report, there does not seem to be a single
reference to them in all scientific literature. The published maps show
them inaccurately in details, and the manuscript plans in the Crown
Land Office differ much from one another and from the actual geography.
There is perhaps no part of the province so near to settlements which
ds so little known. Last summer, with three companions, I spent two
•weeks — July 10th-24th — on the lakes and river, and, although we
found little of interest, it is, nevertheless, some satisfaction to know
just what kind of a country it is from the scientific standpoint.

Most of the lakes in this chain were first surveyed and mapped in
1837 by William Mahood, Deputy-Surveyor for Charlotte County. As
there is no name in use for them taken collectively, I have ventured
to apply Mahood's name to them, to preserve the memory of a worthy
man and skilful surveyor, who did more than any other to make known
the geography of Charlotte County. His name is already applied on
some maps to the lake commonly called Disappointment or Mistake
Lake, which, though not shown on the accompanying map, may be
considered as belonging to the same series. The names of these lakes
were apparently all given by Mahood — Victoria in honor of the young
Queen who in that year came to the throne, Adelaide for the Consort
of the King who had just died, Ormond in honor of an Irish Earl from
near whose seat Mahood had come ; while Tomoowa, now obsolete,
seems Indian, and is perhaps that of a guide. Long Lake is descrip-
tive, but was not added until after the others, which is true also of
Robinson's Pond. Six miles to the southeast, and emptying into the
Lepreau, lie two other lakes, now commonly known as the Hurd Lakes,
but on the maps called Coronary and Rooskey, and these names also,
as the late Mr. Andrew Inches has told me, were given by Mahood in

58 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

remembrance of those places in Ireland, near which his boyhood had
been passed. The accompanying map is based partly on Mahood's
original plan, partly upon others, with many corrections based on
angles taken by compass by myself. Though still far from accurate,
it is yet much nearer the truth than any other of that region known
to me. The depths were measured by me.

The Mahood Lakes lie in an undulating country, near the summit
of a minor watershed, from 550 to 600 feet above sea level. They
drain eastward through the Lepreau, but interlocking with them are
streams which now north, west, and south. The country is built of
granite, heavily glaciated, and across it run trains of immense, and
often angular, boulders. It is to these trains of boulders that the
lakes owe their very existence, for in all cases the outlet is over a dam
of this kind, a dam so hard to erode and so impossible to remove that
the waters have not been able to cut their way through it. The lakes
are all shallow, even the deepest part of Long Lake not exceeding
sixty feet. We have here all of the conditions and characteristics of
a land of bad drainage. Mr. Chalmers, simply from an inspection of
the maps, has described this region with perfect exactness, and I cannot
do better than to quote his words, especially since they contain the
only printed scientific reference to these lakes :

" The great number of small lakes which dot the surface of the region
about the head-waters of the Musquash, Lepreau and New rivers is a somewhat
remarkable feature. The region here would seem to be a comparatively un-
drained one. The small volume of the rivers, their consequent feeble erosive
power, and the hardness of the I'ocks, are such that the rivers have been unable,
since the glacial period, to cut channels sufficiently deep to drain off these
lakes. These rivers and lakes are therefore in much the same condition as in
their early post-glacial history, and will necessarily remain so for a long time
owing to the slow wearing processes going on." — (Geological Survey Report,
1890, X, 1.").)

The lakes may be reached by a foot-path from South Oromocto
Lake, or by an extremely bad wood-road from MacDougal Lake ; and
by the latter route we were portaged in with canoes and baggage.
Formerly there was a winter road from Lepreau Village to Lake
Victoria, but with the passing of lumbering this was abandoned. In
1839 a road, locally called the "Old Magaguadavic " or "Military
Road," was surveyed from St. George Village to the Nerepis, and
passed among these lakes by the route shown on the map. Its coarse is
shown full}' on Wilkinson's map. It was little more than a track through
the woods, was soon abandoned, and now not a trace of it remains.

NATURAL HISTORY AND PHYSIOGRAPHY OF NEW BRUNSWICK.

59

71

o

<-> IT.

1^

n, O

too Cfc.

£ |

p\ §

3 ~ o

\ p

3

« o1 °

t— !?+

—

H- --C U

p *c

5- 3

35-/

cT r-

<•* : bd

7s

< o

>

,35-

60 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

Cundy is a small lake amidst dense woods in an undulating country.
Its height above mean sea level is, according to my aneroid measure-
ment, about 600 feet. Its approximate size, shape and depths are,
like those of the remainder of the chain, represented on the accompany-
ing map.

Of Pokeawis, I know nothing, except that the stream which empties
it is much larger than that from Cundy. Like other features dotted
in on the map, it is added from other plans, principally one loaned me
by Mr. George Barnhill of St. John, who knows this region more
intimately than any other man.

Long Lake lies about forty feet lower than Cundy. Its shores rise
into low rolling wooded hills, and it occupies a winding valley, though
I do not think it is an old valley of erosion, but rather is a basin
formed by a dam amongst irregular hills. It has the typical appearance
of a northern lake of the granite country, with dark, somewhat turbid
water, shores of granite boulders lined up by action of the ice to almost
the regularity of masonry, with a dense evergreen forest above and
overhanging them. It has one sandy point, however, and altogether
is not unattractive. At its lower end it empties amongst great angular
granite boulders by a straight, rapid passage of one hundred yards,
falling about four feet into a deadwater below. From this outlet down
to Tictoria is a thoroughfare winding about amidst a heath bog which
occupies the shallow basin of an old lake, and expanding at times into
pools of considerable size. Robinson's Pond is said to be small, shallow,
and marshy, and the same is true of Cranberry or Tomoowa Lake,
which is rapidly being overgrown by the bog from its southern end.

Victoria Lake is well known to some St. John people, for it is
famous for its trout fishing. For the most part its shores are of the
typical boulder sort, but on the west and southwest occurs much
attractive white sand beach, which has no doubt been derived by wave
and ice action from the ridge of sand and gravel along the western
side. This ridge extends out northward in the peninsula shown on
the map. The height of this lake above sea level is, by aneroid, about
550 feet*. It is rather a shallow lake, especially in its western part,
which is probably due to the washing out of the sand and gravel from
the western shore. At its eastern end appear hills of considerable
height, which have been burnt over and are partly covered with a low
second growth bristling with great rampikes. Victoria is on the
boundary between the great burnt country, of which T shall presently
speak, and the unburnt country to the westward.

* See the next note of this series

NATURAL HISTORY AND PHYSIOGRAPHY OF NEW BRUNSWICK. 61'

Southwest of Victoria, some forty feet higher and emptying into
it, lies Lake Adelaide, a shallow lake with wooded shores. The same
description will apply to Ormond, and both are typical of badly-drained
granite country. Between Adelaide and Ormond is nothing but a
glacial dam of morainic materials only a few yards wide ; indeed in
places it is hardly wide enough for the road which was once intended
to run over it. Yet Ormond stands about thirteen feet higher (thirteen
feet ten inches accoi'ding to Mahood's map) than Adelaide, and drains
into New River. The dike between must be composed largely of clay
in order to form so efficient a dam. This, however, may not be perfect,
for it is said that at the western end of Adelaide, some eighty feet
from shore, is a large " bubbling spring," and moreover, that attempts
made in the days of lumbering to " flood " Ormond were always
unsuccessful. These two facts may lie connected, and mean that there
is a high-water communication between the two lakes.

From this brief account it will appear that these lakes do not differ
in any important character from innumerable others in the granite
areas of the province, and they possess no special scientific attractions.

The Lepreau River flows from the eastern end of Lake Victoria,
and runs to the eastward eight miles, where it is joined by the North
Branch. The country slopes away rapidly in that direction, and is of
the roughest granite character, so that the river, in addition to its
considerable fall, is constantly obstructed by trains of boulders and
ledges which it has been unable to erode away. While it has no marked
falls in that interval and very few dead waters (only two or three), it
has innumerable rapids, particularly of the kind over and among
boulders. Probably no stream in the province carrying an equal
volume of water is so difficult for canoe navigation. It required of
us, at a time when the water was fairly high, two long days of the
severest labor, with twenty portages by actual count, all along the
rough bed of the river, to cover this eight miles to the North Branch.
The entire country has been burnt over, and so thoroughly that it can
bear no second growth. The very soil has been burnt and washed
away, and nothing shows but the bare granite boulders, with scanty
moss and an occasional low bush, while the great rampikes show how
noble a forest once clothed this land. The view from some of the low
hills as one looks eastward is the most desolate it is possible to imagine ;.
to me the Arizona deserts are less forbidding. It is said that this
country was burnt shortly after the Saxby gale, which levelled immense
quantities of timber, and this gave the fire tremendous power. It

<52 BULLETIN OK THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

started near Lepreau Village and swept northward and westward.
Earlier than that date a tire started near Musquash and burnt the
country to the eastward.

At the North Branch the river turns to the southward and Hows
twenty miles to the salt water. The river continues to fall much,
though with no large falls, until Eagle Mountain is reached. This
mountain, which by direct aneroid measurement we made 520 feet
above the river at the brook just above it, and about 850 feet above
sea level, affords a splendid view in all directions, including especially
the burnt country. Here, again, one has forced upon him a conception
of the awful power of these great forest fires. The granite hills are
not only stripped forever of their covering, but are scorched and
bleached. Before one's eyes lies, white and grinning, the very naked
skeleton of the land.

Below Eagle Mountain the navigation becomes easier. Just below
Squaw Mountain the sharp boundary between burnt and unburnt
country is passed, and one comes with joy into the grateful shade of
the woods. Here, too, the granite country is left behind, and the
character of the river changes. It now runs rapidly, but smoothly,
•over a gravel bottom, justifying its Indian name of Wis-e-amk-ay-nis,
•or gravelly river, and becomes a charming canoe-stream. Its water
seems to become clearer the farther it is from the lakes, and it is richer
in water-plants than any other stream I have noticed. Its course is
broken by three great falls, and one or two minor ones ; the former
are known, respectively, as Ragged, Big and Little Falls. Ragged
and Big Falls are each over eighty feet high, could very easily be
dammed, and have immense basins above them in which great quanti-
ties of water could be stored. This fact, together with the ease with
which water could be stored in abundance among the lakes at the
head of the river, is likely to make the Lepreau a valuable river in
the time to come when economical transmission of power and increasing
cost of fuel will direct attention to natural sources of power. Finally,
the river falls over a ledge into salt water at Lepreau Village.

13. — On New Heights in New Brunswick, determined with
Aneroid ix 1897.

Read April 5th, 1898.

During the summer of 1897 T made, with a good aneroid barometer,
a number of measurements for heights above sea-level in New Bruns-
wick. These have been corrected for weather changes by comparison
•with readings from the barometers of the meteorological stations at

NATURAL HISTORY AND PHYSIOGRAPHY OF NEW BRUNSWICK. 63

Fredericton and St. John. I wish here to thank Dr. Harrison of the
University, and Mr. Hutchinson of St. John for lists which they have
supplied to me. Mr. Hutchinson also, on July 9th, determined the
error of my aneroid, and this of course has been taken into account in
calculating the results below. Many of my readings were taken at
times so different from those of the two stations that I have rejected
them, and I have kept only those of the five important points here
mentioned. In none of the cases admitted did the time between my
reading and those of one of the stations exceed twenty-four minutes,
except in one of the Mount Pleasant observations, when it was sixty-six
minutes, on a very clear day. It will be noticed that in all cases
comparison with figures from the Fredericton Station gave results
higher than those from the St. John Station. The list of readings
from Mr. Hutchinson was reduced to mean sea-level, while those from
Fredericton were for a height 164 feet above it ; and the constancy of
the discrepancy suggests that the height assigned to the Fredericton
Station is too great. I do not give all of the figures in detail, since at
the best, like most other measurements of this kind which have been made
in New Brunswick, they can be but approximations, but I have calculated
them carefully and repeatedly, and think there is no error in the figuring.
The three places first mentioned have not been measured before :

Surface of Victoria Lake, Charlotte County. — Saturday and Sunday, July
17 and 18. — Two observations compared with Fredericton, 624 and 614 feet;
two compared with St. John, 480 and 510 feet; mean of all, 557 feet. This
agrees with another measurement made July 10th, which by direct, uncorrected
reading made Cundy Lake about 500 feet above the railroad at Bonny River,
and hence about 600 feet above mean tide. Cundy is about forty-five feet above
Victoria, which thus would be 555 feet above the sea.

Eagle Mountain, Charlotte County (near boundary of Kings). — By direct
measurement, July 20, this mountain was 520 feet above the mouth of Eagle
Mountain Brook; latter, by comparison with Fredericton, is 334 feet above the
sea; hence Eagle Mountain is S54 feet.

Mount Pleasant, Charlotte County. — Aug. 12 and 13. — By comparison with
Fredericton, 1,224 feet; with St. John, 1,175; mean, 1,200. Gesner, in his
first Geological Report, guessed its height to be 1,300 feet, and Mahood, upon
one of his MS. plans in the Crown Land Office, guessed it at 3,000 feet.

Bald Mountain, on the Kings-Queens Boundary. — Aug. 14. —By comparison
with Fredericton, 1,494 feet above mean sea-level; by comparison with St.
John, 1,430 feet; mean of the two, 1,462 feet. Conditions were particularly
favorable, and my observations covered the time of both stations. Gesner, in
one of his reports, guessed its height to be 1,120 feet; the Surface Geology map,
probably following Gesner, gives it as 1,120 feet; Mr. William Murdoch of St.
John, by theodolite angle, has given it to me as 1,390 feet.

Cherry Hill, Harvey. -Sept. 3. — By direct measurement, above the track,
315 feet; by comparison with Fredericton, 884 feet above mean sea-level.

64 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

ARTICLE VI.

BATRACHIA OF KEW BRUNSWICK

By Philip Cox, Ph.D.

Read April 5, 1898.

As the following list records only the writer's personal observations,
it must be found to contain fewer species than have hitherto been
assigned to the province. He does not believe it includes all our
batrachian fauna, though he regardsthe occurrence here of some forms,
included in early publications, as extremely doubtful. It is the result
of many years' research in various parts of the province, made as reliable
as possible, by means of the views and opinions of distinguished special-
ists, who were always consulted on doubtful matters.

Among the Urodela, Desmognathus fuscws, Rafinesque, and A.
opacum, Gravenhorst, the latter closely related to A. punctatum, a
common salamander, are both likely to be found. They have a place
on old lists.

Of the Anoura, Rana septentrionalis, Baird, and R. cantabrigensis,
Baird, may likely be found in the western part of the province, or in
the lake region near the Bay of Fundy.

Amulystomid.k.

Amblystonia punctatum, L. Yellow-spotted Salamander.
Generally distributed, but not abundant.

A. jeflfersouianum, Green. Granulated Salamander.

( lommon in river valleys of the southern parts of the province: rare in the

northern.
Oromocto Island, Sunbury Co. Roy McLean Vanwart,

A. jeft'ersoniamim, var. laterale, Hallow-ell.

Occurring with the Last; but more abundant, and characteristic of our

fauna.

Plethodontidje.

Pletliodon cinereus, Green. Red-backed Salamander.

Same range as . I. jqfferHonianum, l>ut rather rare. Have not collected it
on the North Shore.

BATRACHIA OF NEW BRUNSWICK. 6i>

P. cilierCUS, var. eryihromotVA, Green. Red-backed Salamander.

Specifically related to the last, but with dorsal stripe very red. Common,
and characteristic of our region.

P. glntiuosus (Salamandra glutinosa). Green. Blue-spotted Salamander.
Very rare, and only in the southern parts of the province.

Spelerpes bilineatns (Salamandra bilineataj. Green.*

Small brook at Curry's Mountain, York Co. Ro}7 McLean Vanwart.

S. bilineatus, var. borealis. Baird.
The typical form in New Brunswick.
Valley of the St. John.

Desmoi;nathid.«.

DesillOg'UathuS OChrophaea, Cope. Painted Salamander.

Oromocto Island, River St. John, Ji'de Prof. E. D. Cope. Its first record.

In gratitude to this distinguished naturalist, whose kind heart and facile
pen were ever at the service of the humblest plodder, I may be par-
doned for quoting from a letter, among the last he ever wrote: "The
specimen of I), ochrophaa represents a variety with a spotted belly,
such as I never saw in the United States."

Pleurodelidje.

DieniyctylllS viridescens, Rafinesque. (Salamandra miUepunctata, StorerJ.
Spotted Newt.
The most aquatic of our Salamanders. In all suitable lakes and ponds.

D. Viridescens, var. miniatus, Hallowell.

A smaller, red, finless, and less aquatic variety, always found with the
former. Represents, probably, a mere seasonal phase.

Bl'FOXID^E.

Bufo lentiginosns americanus, LeConte. Toad.

Very common and variable. A more extended and careful examination
may show the occurrence here of at least two sub-species.

Hylidje.

Hyla pickeringii, Storer. Tree-Frog.
Found everywhere.

H. versicolor, LeConte. Tree-Frog.

Seems to be rare. Have heard its note in several parts of the province,
but seen only one specimen, collected in Gloucester County, and now
in the museum of the MiramichiNat. Science Association, Chatham, N.B.

RaxidjE.

liana virescens (Puma halecina), Kalm. Green Frog.
Generally distributed over the province.

* Striped-back Salamander.

66 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

R. viresceus brachycephala, Cope. (ireenFrog.

A short-headed and stouter form; the dominant type in New Brunswick.

R. palUStris, LeConte. .Marsh Frog.

I»»the southern part of the province; not common. Have not met with it
in the four northern counties.

R. catesbiana, Shaw. Bull-Frog.

All over the province, but local. The most aquatic of our frogs.

R. fontinalis, LeConte. Spring-Frog.

Generally distributed; varies greatly. In fontinalis I recognize a stout,
pustular form, the prevailing type in the northern counties.

R. fOlltinalis nigricans, Agassiz. Spring-Frog.

A small, black variety, or sub-species met with in rocky brooks.
Noonan Brook, Sunbury Co.

R. fontinalis clamitans, Holbrook. Spring-Frog.

A long-legged, slender, less webbed and less aquatic variety, which I have
collected only in the St. John valley. Mr. C. F. B. Rowe has taken
specimens in the vicinity of St. John.

R. silvatica, LeConte. Wood-Frog.

Occurs generally, but not abundant. [Mr. C. F. B. Rowe has noted
that this species spawns several weeks earlier than other frogs. — Ed.]

APPENDIX — REPORT OX THE SUMMER CAMP AT QUACO. 67

APPENDIX.

REPORT ON THE SUMMER CAMP AT QUACO.

Held July 1-10, 189.

In past years the Society has held Hummer Camps at different
points of scientific interest in the province, the object being twofold —
(1) to enable members to acquire experience in field work, (2) to
stimulate, in the localities visited, an interest in the study of nature.

In July last a camp was held at Quaco, this village having been
selected as presenting a number of advantages for our purposes. About
thirty persons attended, and in every way the camp was a success.
The residents of Quaco attended the evening lectures, and a strong
interest was aroused in our work. Lectures were given by President
G. U. Hay, Dr. G. F. Matthew, Prof. L. W. Bailey, Prof. A. W. Duff,
and Dr. W. F. Ganong. Field work was carried on daily under the
different leaders, and many important observations were made on the
geology, physiography, and botany of the sui rounding region.

Professor Bailey and Dr. Matthew led the geological parties,
President Hay and Dr. Ganong had charge of the botanists, and
Professor Duff carried on tidal observations in the harbor. Messrs.
Berton and Rowe made a collection of the small mammals, reptiles
and batrachians. The camp was under the management of the Secre-
tary of the Society, Percy G. Hall, and valuable local assistance was
rendered by our resident members — Dr. Gilmour and Geo. J. Trueman.

Report on the Geological Data obtained at Quaco —
Summer Camp of 1897.

By Dr. Geo. F. Matthew.

The fine exposures along the coast at Quaco in sea-cliffs of varying
height, give excellent opportunities for studying the geology of that
district. Here only, in all New Brunswick, is there a formation of the
Mesozoic, or Reptilian Age, of sufficient extent and thickness to repre-
sent in any adequate degree the strata of vast extent in many regions
of the earth, which tell the story of this important portion of the
world's past history.

■68 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY S0CTE1Y.

Heretofore there has been recognized at Quaco only two members
of the Mesozoic system, viz., the bright red sandstones, so conspicuous
on numerous cliffs along the coast, and the overlying pebble beds. A
third member of this system, probably as important in volume and
thickness as the two lower ones together, was recognized in our excur-
sions along the eastern part of the shore. This member is so like the
Lower Carboniferous rocks that it has heretofore been confounded
with them. The proofs that it is Mesozoic are the following : 1. Its
lowest bed are found to graduate by alternation of measures into the
pebbly member of the heretofore recognized New Red Sandstone
2. Its conglomerates are full of rounded fragments of dark-red shale,
which in this district can have no other source than the Lower Car-
boniferous rocks. 3. The plant remains found in its grey sandstone
layers (though poorly preserved), by the nabellate leaves with stout
petioles, and the leathery strap-shaped leaves that are found, as well
-as by the absence of Sigillaria, Lipidodendron, and Calamites, appear
to be a Mesozoic assemblage, and certainly are not of the ordinary
Carboniferous type.

This upper member of the Red Sandstone series holds the shore
from Melvin's Beach to Fown's Beach ; it also appears on the shore at
Berry's Beach, beyond which in going westward it passes inland : and
it has a considerable width behind Quaco Village.

Our party visited the intrusive trap and manganese deposits at
Quaco Head. The trap has forced its way through the red sandstones,
partially altering it and discharging the red color from the sandstone
for some distance from the line of contact ; the trap also becomes fine
grained and loses its feldspar crystals near the contact with the sand-
stone.

The shores at Quaco and the surface deposits there abound with
pebbles derived from the pre-Cambrian volcanic rocks of the hills
inland. There is the greater profusion of these because the great
pebble beds of the middle member of the Mesozoic or Red Sandstone
system abound with fragments from this source At Vaughan's Creek
(McComber's Beach) the pebbles of the conglomerate are mostly of
purple quartzite and f el site, sometimes without any admixture of sand,
so that when the calcareous cement which holds them in place weathers
away, they fall to the beach in great numbers, and repeat in modern
times their accumulation as beach-shingle in the Mesozoic Age.

APPFNDIX — REPORT ON THE SUMMER CAMP AT QUACO. 69

Tidal Phenomena at Quaco.

By Prof. A. Wilmer Ddff.

The point that the writer was chiefly interested in was the occur-
rence of those somewhat puzzling phenomena called " secondary
undulations." Anyone who examines the record of the Kelvin Tidal
Gauge at St. John will find that it gives a wave-shaped curve, the
heights of which correspond with the time of high water and the
hollows with the time of low water ; but, in addition, he will discover
that on this main curve there are smaller indentations, indicating
minor risings and fallings of water level, the whole time from greatest
of these minor undulations to the next greatest rise being, on an average,
about forty minutes. These small and comparatively rapid oscillations
of level are the so-called " secondary undulations," and the time of
forty minutes required for them to complete their cycle of changes of
level is called their period.

The author had already shown* that these secondary undulations
could be explained as due to a long, slow oscillation of the whole body
of water between the New Brunswick and the Nova Scotia coast, the
vibrations being similar to these that are set up in a wash-basin full
of water when it is disturbed. It became, then, an interesting point
to determine whether the rest of the body of water in the bay partook
of this same general motion, and whether the period was the same as
at St. John. The author fully expected that it would be.

With this in view, the tide gauge described in a former communica-
tion f to the Society was used at Quaco. On three different days the
gauge gave clear records of " secondary undulations ;" but, contrary
to his expectations, the period in all cases was 12^ minutes. This was
a somewhat puzzling result, until it occurred to the writer to examine
the chart of the bay off the New Brunswick coast in the neighborhood
of Quaco, when he found that the presence of a reef called the Quaco
Ledges, and the two headlands that project into the bay above and
below Quaco, respectively, marked out a smaller bay (open, it is true,
to the east), in which the water would naturally oscillate in a period
of its own, determined by its own dimensions. From the smallness of
its dimensions these oscillations might be expected to be much quicker
than those across the bay at St. John, although the irregularity in
shape of this small bay precludes any attempt to calculate mathemati-
cally what the period of the oscillations of the water in it would be.

♦See American Journal of Science, Vol. Ill, No. 17, 1897.
tSee Bulletin XV of the Natural History Society of N. B., 1897.

70 BULLETIN' OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

The author has thus been led to the view that a large body of
water such as the Bay of Fundy is broken up into smaller areas of
oscillations, each having its own characteristic period as determined
by its dimensions. In a part of the bay where there is a comparatively
free, unobstructed sweep from side to side, as between the general
contour of the New Brunswick coast at St. John and that of the
opposite Nova Scotia coast, the period of oscillation would be that of
the whole bay, or perhaps half that dimension, since such a large body
of water might have itself a tendency to divide up into two halves*
each oscillating in half the period that the whole would take if set
into free swingings to and fro.

The author hopes on future occasions to explore other parts of
the bay in the same way, with a view to confirming or refuting this
hypothesis.

It should be noted that the point here considered is merely the
cause of the periods characteristic of these motions. How the motions
themselves originate, what causes the initial disturbance, is a different
question. The difference is similar to the difference between the
enquiry, What disturbs a wash-bowl, and, the other enquiry, what
determines the rate at which the water " wish-washes " when disturbed '
It can, however, hardly be doubted, I think, that the first disturbance
in the bay comes from the action of wind in a storm, since an exam-
ination of many cases of " secondary undulation " at St. John and at
Quaco seems to show that they are only prominent when the sea has
been disturbed by a gale. Thus there need be none of the mystery as
to the origin of " secondary undulations " which some writers delight
in attributing to them.

Report on the Botany of the Summer Camp.

By (J. U. Hay.

During the ten days that the Society was at work at Quaco and
vicinity, several botanical excursions were made about the village, and
one to Salmon River. There was much interest manifested in these
excursions and in the lectures given in the evenings, one by Dr. W. F.
Ganong, and the other by Mr. G. U. Hay. Many smaller gatherings
were also held for the study and analysis of plants, in which many of
the young people of Quaco took part. The examination of the beach
in front of the village revealed an absence of plant and animal forms
that mighl he expected to occur here. The two common forms of

APPENDIX — REPORT ON THE SUMMER CAMP AT QUACO. 71

Fuci — F. Vesiculosus and F. Xodosus — were common. Corallina
officinalis was quite abundant in pools, with several species of Ulva.
On the adjacent cliffs of West Qaaco, clumps of the brilliant Sedum
Rhodiola, with patches of Ligusticum Scoticum, form a pleasing contrast
to the dark back-ground of trap rock. In the salt marshes above the
limit of the tide the vegetation was more varied and abundant. Atriplex
hastata, Sal sola kali, Stat ice limonium, Carex panciflora, Carex norvde-
ffica, Carex maritima, Comandra Uvida, Glaux maritima, and other
forms common to such a habitat, were observed. Further up from
the shore were Kahnia glauca in great abuundance, Cypripedium
acaule, Andromedra poly folia, etc., and the honeysuckle. Lonicera
involucrata, its first recorded appearance in the southern part of the
province.

The visit to Salmon River did not result in the discovery of any
rare species of plants. This river, with its narrow gorge and lofty
hills on each side, reminds one strongly of the Restigouche.

At Greer Settlement, five miles from Quaco, the beautiful Cypri-
pedium spectabile was found in great abundance, and on the roadside
near by a few groups of Scrophularia nodosa, its first recorded appear-
ance in this province. This plant belongs to Southern New England
and the Middle States. It was thriving well here, but whence or how
it came no one in the vicinity could tell. The abundance of the showy
blossoms of the Cypripedium made our lecture hall during the remainder
of our stay a place of beauty, from the presence of this orchid of tropical-
like richness of color.

A visit to the ravine near Rourke's River, during the half-day
previous to our departure, was one of the most pleasant outings that
the botanists enjoyed. Amid the sandstones and calcareous slates,
there was growing, in the greatest profusion, Cystopteris bulbifera,
Cystopteris fragilis, and other ferns ; Geranium Robertianum in great
luxuriance, Habenaria rotundifolia, Equisetwm scirpoides, etc.; and on
a hill near by one specimen of Echium vulgare.

Zoology.

The beaches at Quaco show little animal life, and that only of the
very commonest forms. There are few tide-pools, and these are rather
barren.

Several hauls of the dredge were made in Quaco Bay, but with
disappointing results. A few dead shells and two or three living forms

72 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

of the commonest species were brought up from muddy bottoms. The
conditions off Quaco are not at all favorable to an abundance of animal
life, which clusters rather about sheltered passages where gentle tidal
cui'rents sweep constantly through. — [W. F. G.]

Origin of the Name Quaco.

By Dr. W. F. Ganong.

There is no real doubt as to the origin of this word. By the
Micmacs it was, and is, called Gool-wah-gah-kek (the first g very obscure
and easily missed), from Goolwaakw, the hooded seal, with the locative,
eh. Hence the word means, " Place of the hooded seal." It first
occurs on the Franquelin-DeMeulles map of 1686 in the form Ariquaki,
which, allowing for the French sounds, for the omission of the obscure
preliminary g, for the replacement of the / by r, as was invariable with
the French, and for the omission, common on French maps, of the
final k, is plainly from the Indian word. It next appears on Black -
more's map of 1712 as Roquaque, of which the relation to the French
form is plain, and later plans have Oreequaco. Finally, on a plan of
1762, it first occurs in its present form. Several other explanations
of she word have been given, but in no case has any evidence been
adduced in their support. The history of the word is traced with
greater fulness in the Transactions of the Royal Society of Canada
(new series), Vol. II, section ii, page 264, and in a letter in the St.
John Daily Telegraph, Nov. 16, 1896.

Another word, in the same vicinity, of great interest is Point St.
Tooley, applied locally, though on no chart, to the eastern headland of
Quaco Bay. This is probably a survival, and English corruption, of
Point St. Louis, given by Champlain in 1 604. Champlain named a
river at Quaco (probably Vaughan's Creek), Riviere de St. Louis, and
it seems probable, though there is no proof of it, that this name became
extended to the cape, and was passed along by the French and New
England pilots down to the present.

APPENDIX — REPORT ON ZOOLOGY. 73

REPORT ON ZOOLOGY.

The Committee beg to submit the following notes. Dr. Cox has
prepared a list of the Batrachians of the province, which will be found
in another part of this bulletin. Several inquiries have been made for
a list of our insects, and the Committee hope to have a list of our
Butterflies and Hawk Moths prepared in time for publication in the
next bulletin. Dr. Cox has kindly furnished the notes on fishes for
this report.

Additions to the List of New Brunswick Fishes.

(For Catalogue, see Bulletin XIII, 1896.)

Siphostoma fuSClim (Storer). Jordan and Gilbert. Common Pipe-fish.
A single specimen taken in a smelt bag-net in Miramichi Bay, February,
1898, and donated to the museum of the Mir. Nat. Hist. Association.

Atberina llOtata, Mitchell. Silverside.

Abundant around the shores and islands of Mir. Bay in mid-summer.

Aspidophoroides monopterygius (Block). Storer. Alligator -fish.
One found among smelts in a net in Mir. 'Bay, Feb., 1S98, and donated to
museum of Mir. Nat. Hist. Association.

Phycis tenuis, Mitchell. White Hake.

Not uncommon in Mir. Bay in early part of winter.

Pleuronectes glaber, Storer. Smooth Flounder.

Miramichi Bay and Bay des Chaleurs, but not abundant.

Birds.

The numbers refer to the list of birds printed in Bulletin 1, 1883.

Section A.
(Species which occur in St. John and Kings Counties.)

6. Bluebird (Sialia Sialis). Only three authentic instances of occurrence

in the province said to be known.

Note. — A female collected by M. G. B. Henderson on October 20th, 1897,

on Loch Lomond road, about four miles from this city. Several seen.

76. Rusty Blackbird (Scoleophagus Carolinus). A male collected on April

2nd, 1898, by A. Gordon Leavitt.
101. Red-headed Woodpecker (Melanerpes Erythrocephalus). Only reported
from " Garnett's."
Note. — A male collected at Little Lepreau on June 5th, 1897, bjT G. L.
Hanson.

74 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

114. — American Hawk-owl (Surnia Ulula Caparoch). Given as rare, and none

reported for this immediate vicinity.
Note. — A female collected by Byron Lingley at Lily Lake on November

24th, 1894. Also a female collected at Little Lepreau by <*. L.

Hanson on January 29th, 1896.
136. Black-crowned Night Heron (Nycticorax nycticorax Naevius). Only a

few observed near St. John.
Note.— Male collected at Little River, October 24th, 1895: two males

on September 5th, 1896, by M. 6. B. Henderson; and a female. "at

same place, on September 7th, 1896, by Wm. Hare.
197. Ruddy Duck (Erismatura rubida). Only two instances of its occurrence

known.
N0TE. — A. Gordon Leavitt has a pair, male and female, in the same

plumage (brown and grey), which were brought to him by a farmer

living near Quaco. They were shot on October 23rd, 1893.

Section B.

(Species which have not been observed in St. John or King Counties, but which occur
in other parts of the Piovince.)

227. American Titlark (Anthus Pensilvanicus). On Red Head marsh, on
October 9th, 1897, A. Gordon Leavitt collected a female, and on the
game day, at the same place, Walter Harrison collected two females.
Lincoln's Sparrow (Mdo&piza IAncolni). A specimen taken in June,
]S!i7. at Scotch Lake, York County, by W. H. Moore. Mr. Moore also
observed two Shore Laiks at Macnaquack, February 26th, 1898, and
at Scotch Lake, on March 5th, 1898, the White-winged Crossbill.

Mammals.

Mr. Geo. W. Bailey reports a specimen of the Grey Squirrel (Sciurus
carolinensu ), taken in York County. Not before observed, except in
Charlotte and Carleton Counties.

A. GORDON LEAVITT.
WILLIAM M(TNT< )SH.
CHAS F. B. ROWE.

Zoological ' 'omrnittee.

APPENDIX — BIBLIOGRAPHY OF SCIENTIFIC PUBLICATIONS. 75

Report of the Botanical Committee.

The following are the names (printed in full-faced type) of new
plants added to our provincial flora during the past year, and new
localities for some rare plants :

89. Stellaria borealis, Bigel. Salt Springs, near Sussex. Dr. W. F.

Ganong.
91. Arenaria peploides, L. Portage Island, Miramichi. Dr. Cox.
273. Lonicei'a involucrata, Banks. Quaco. Hay.
366. a Hieraceillll pilosella, L. Charlo, and Eel River, Restigouche. Dr.

Cox.
436. a Sabbatia chloroides, Pursh. St. John. Miss A. R. Warner.
457. a Seliropliularia nodosa, L. Greer Settlement, near Quaco. Hay.
513. a Chenopodium Boillis-Henricus, L. Chatham. Dr. Cox.

901. Pella?a gracilis, Hook. Loch Lomond, St. John Co. R. B. Gilmour.

902. a Aspleililllll triehOllianes, L. Loch Lomond, St. John Co. R. B.

Gilmour.

G. U. HAY,

Chairman Botanical Committee.

Bibliography op Scientific Publications Relating to the
Province of New Brunswick, other than those contained
in the Bulletin of the Society, 1898.

By Samuel W. Kain.

Lists similar to the one here given will be found in Bulletins
XIII-XV. They contain titles from 1890 to June, 1897. The
present list contains titles from July, 1897, to June 1898, with a few
omitted from previous lists.

Geology.

Bailey, Prof. L. W. — The Bay of Fundy Trough in American Geological History.
Trans. Royal Soc. Canada, 2nd series, Vol. Ill, Sec. IV, pp. 107-116,
1897.
Belding, A. M. — Bog Manganese in Albert County.
St. John Daily Sun, December 25th, 1897.
(Pub. Anon.)
Dawson, Sir J. W. — On the Genus Lepidophloios.

Trans. Royal Soc Canada, 2nd series, Vol. Ill, Sec. IV, pp. 57-78,
14 pi., 1897.

76 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

Matthew, George F. — The Rockwood Bog. (Abstract.)
St. John Daily Sun, November 4, 1897.
Studies in Cambrian Faunas:

Part I. On a new sab-fauna of the Paradoxides Beds of the St. John

Group.
Part II. Billing's Primordial Fossils of Vermont and Labrador.

Tram. Roy. Soc. Can., 2nd series, Vol. Ill, Sec. IV, p. 175, 4 pi.,
1897.
Mickwitz, August. — Uber Die Brachiopodengattung Obolus. Eichwald.

Memoirs Imp. Anal. Sciences, St. Petersburg, 8th series, No. 2, pp.
21-22, 1896.

(Describes fossil shells from Caton*s Island, and reviews Dr. G. F.
Matthew's studies on the genus Botsfordia.)

Trueman, Howard — Reclaiming the Misseguash Marsh.
St. John Daily Sun, December 29, 1897.
(Pub. Anon.)

Whittle, Charles Livy- — The Beach Phenomena at Quaco, New Brunswick.
Am. Geologist, Vol. VII, pp. 183-187, 1891.
(Omitted from list in Bulletin XIII )
Genesis of the Manganese Deposits at Quaco, New Brunswick.
Boston Soc. Nat. Hist.. Proc., Vol. XXV, pp. 2.53-238, 1891.
(Omitted from list in Bulletin XIII.)

Meteorology.

Kain, Samuel W. — Thunderstorms in New Brunswick, 1897.

U. S. Weather Review, Vol. XXVI, pp. 105-106, March, 1898.
McLaughlin, W. B. — Remarkable Sounds heard along our Southern Coast.

St. Croix Courier, March 31st, 1898.

Also U. S. Weather Review, Vol. XXVI, April, 1898.

Botany.

Ganong, W. F. — On Raised Peat Bogs in the Province of New Brunswick.

Trans. Royal Soc. Canada, 2nd series, Vol. Ill, Sec. IV, pp. 131-163,
1897.
Vroom, James — Trees and Forests.

St. John Daily Sun, August 2, 1S97.

Zoology.

Hall, Ansley — The Herring Industry of the Passamaquoddy Region, Maine.

U. S. Fish Com. Report, 1896. pp. 443 447, map, L898.
Moore, H. F. — Observations on the Herring and Herring Fisheries of the
Northeast Coast, with special reference to thfi vicinity of Passamaquoddy
Bay.

Ibid., pp. 387-442, pi. 1, map, 1898.
Perkins, Henry F. — Notes on the Turtles of New Brunswick.
St. John Daily Sim, February 5th, ls'.»s.

APPENDIX — METEOROLOGICAL ABSTRACT FOR 1897,

77

•sinjo^g japunqx

© — -f

'S3aiK ivxox

co

,.

N

m

©

CO

--

--

o»

CO

-■

l-

00

t-

m

o

Tl<

io

to

i>

s

CO

botibq

CO

CO

0»

CO

o

>n

o

■-

CO

-

o

in

©

~

in

£

•sanw

©

CO

o

-
oj

o

-
©
o

CT

CO

—

©
53

CO
0!

CO

--

X

re

—
In

oa

|

fc

■sjnou

§

8

co

CO

o»

to

—
-J

-
01

CO

©

•sanitt

s.moH

£

saiJK

00

•sanoH

'saI!K

sjnoj£

w

'sai!H

CO

•sjnoH

s

'S8I!K
sanoH

H

S3I!K

fc

s.moH

2

■sauw

sjnojj

■MOUg

pajpK pae nrejj
uorjB^idioajj

pepnop^noqAv = oi

•JBS|Q = 0

:ssanipnoio
'innuiiaijg

•mntinx'eni

OT2aj\r

•jsaMoq

•IsaqStH

UB9I£

— ?> o> o

0»

1G

co

CO

X)

CO

o

CO

re?

1-

in oo cm

co co —

co co m in co i- co
9a x o» (- T
— x x _. -r

at

"

to
cm

©

CO

CO

s.

CO
X

©

CO

CO

©
t-

CO

©

CO

o

cr.

o
*c»

re
—

CD

s

lO

in

c

-C:
CO

i'

I

3

ao
ex

CO

to

ID

X

t-

CO

CO

:•

cb

3D

m

5

©

2

i

©

CO

CC

©

-
•-o

In

-

a:

-

-r

0J

c

-

m

s

CO

to

5

m

-5

2

s

3

l- CO .-i

— 5 o rh oo

oo in i! ■— ct

CJ — —

m co o in

— . ce ©

■n o to

o in in in

CO i-c

I I

l- X CS

-c" w 0<

CO TT O

51 J S 3

m ci to co

3 s

«« s

co -r ?» in

© o © ©

•-c: — co © — •

- ^ £

to O fc Q

~

<o

—

-

=

i-

V

•w

ro

H g

-2 £

— ~

J 3
p'aj

So 2

1 *
r of

78 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

MEAN SEA LEVEL AT ST. JOHN

(Abstract of paper by E. T. P. Shewen, C.E.; read March 1st, 1893.)

The determination of mean sea level at St. John furnishes a fixed
datum from which to calculate tidal fluctuations, besides elevations
for geological, geodetic, and physiographic studies.

Last year this determination was made from an analysis of two
years of tidal observations, recorded by the Thomson gauge at Reed s
Point, covering the period between April 1894, and May 1896. The
gauge is in charge of Mr. D. L. Hutchinson of the St. John Observa-
tory ; and the records obtained have been carefully reduced to datum
by Mr. W. Bell Dawson, Engineer in charge of the Tidal Survey. The
resulting values of mean sea level, and of high and lowwatei, ordinary
spring tides, have been referred to a bench mark cut for the purpose
on the southeast corner of the Custom House. (See Bull. N. H. S. of
N. B., No. XIII, p. 109.)

Mean sea level is 41.65 feet below the bench mark, or 12.67 feet
below high water- ordinary spring tides, the range being 25.33 feet.

City Levels. — City levels are taken from forty feet below assumed
(extreme) high water. The elevation of any point above mean sea
level is the reduced level, according to city datum, minus 25.49 feet.

Intercolonial Railivay Levels (St. John to ijhediac). — The elevation
of any point above mean sea level is the reduced level, according to
I. C. R. datum, minus 86.95 feet.

European and North American Railway Datum (now I. C. R.)

Feet.

High water spring tides, St. John (Buy of Fundy).. . . ion. on

Mill street 104.95

The Marsh 102

Lawlor's Lake 162

Rothesay ( 9 miles from St. John) 107

Hampton ( 22 "

Susses ( 44 " "

Penobsquis ( 51 " "

Mom-ton Station (89 " "
Sackville (128 "

Shediac Wharf , rail level (Northumberland Strait) 93.30

High water, Shediac ( lOS miles from St. John) 89.30

117
1 55. .">:>
154

i:<ii.74
116.25

APPENDIX — MEAN SEA LEVEL AT ST. JOHN. 79

A detailed statement of levels from St. John to Shediac is given
in Report of the Railway Commissioners of New Brunswick, 1859,
pp. 84-88.

Mr. A. L. Light, Chief Engineer of the European & North American
Railway, reported, on the 2nd Feb., 1859 : " It will be observed that
the level of the rails on Shediac wharf is 6.70 below high water at
St. John, and the level of high tide at the latter place is 10.70 feet
above that at Shediac Harbour."

On the close of the exploratory survey for the Intercolonial Railway,
made in 1864, Sandford Fleming reports that the various levels were
found to be relatively as follows :

First Datum.

Restigouche to Green River; then to Toledi and Rimouski waters;
thence to River Trois Pistoles; also from the Restigouche to the
Tobique; thence to Nashwaak and to Keswick Summit — said to
be high water on the Miramichi 84.81

Second Datum.

From a point five miles up Keswick valley to Keswick Summit; also

from the same point past Fredericton to Little River.. . 101.81

Third Datum.
On this datum levels were carried from Little River to Coal Creek 58.08

European and North American (now I. C. R. ) Pvailway Datum.

Fourth Datum.

Said to be 100 feet under high water on Bay of Fund}7, at St. John City, 0.00

The datum for Nova Scotia is low water at Parrsboro, on the Basin of
Minas.

The datum for the Matapedia survey is high water above Campbellton on
Bay Chaleur, and on the River St. Lawrence at St. Flavie.

High water, River St. Lawrence, at Trois Pistoles 70.00

80 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

THRTY-SIXTH ANNUAL REPOR'
OF THE COUNCIL

NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY

OF

NEW BRUNSWICK.

The Council of the Natural History Society beg leave to submit
the following report for the year now ending :

Membership.

A very satisfactory increase has taken place in the membership, to
which we note the following additions :

Ordinary 1-

Associate 24

Corresponding v 1

37
Finance.

The Treasurer makes the following statement :

Receipts.

Balance from 1897 * 6 44

Membership fees 1 40 i >~

Investment, interest on 144 00

Proceeds of lecture by Prof. Bailey 14 50

Bulletins sold 19 90

Dividend from Botsford estate 10 00

Donations 11 ,,l)

Government grant 125 00

8470 91
Expi nditures.

Balance on Bulletin XIV . . . J 88 75

Printing and distributing Bulletin XV 183 37

Maintenance of Museum 88 60

Expense < !amp for field work at Quaco --'7 99

Miscellaneous (expressage, labor, postage, etc 50 64

Balance on hand 31 • >(>

$470 91

appendix — report of the society. 81

Library.

The rapid expansion of the library has necessitated some changes
in arranging for space to accommodate the books we now have, and at
the same time allow for future additions.

Among important accessions we notice Geological Reports on Xew
Brunswick (complete set), written by Dr. A. Gesner, presented by Henry
F. Perley, and the Journal of the Royal Geographical Society, which
we obtain in exchange for our bulletin.

Publications.

Bulletin XV was issued in June last. It contains valuable articles
by Dr. Geo. F. Matthew, Professor A. Wilmer Duff, and Dr. W. D.
Matthew. As this number concludes Volume III, it is furnished with
an index.

Bulletin III (1884) has long been out of print, and the Society has
been unable to supply copies to numerous applicants. We are glad to
be able to announce that, by the enterprise of one of our members, this
number has been reprinted without any expense to the Society.

A number of the shorter papers read before the Society have been
published in the daily papers.

Lectures and Essays.
Nine regular meetings were held, at which papers w ere read as follows :

Feb'y 2. Tidal Phenomena of the St. John River at Low Summer Level, by

Prof. A. Wilmer Duff. (Pub. in Bulletin XV.)
March 2. Address on Peat-Bogs, by Dr. Geo. F. Matthew.

Note " Upon the Colour of the Waters in New Brunswick Rivers,"
by Prof. W. F. <Tanong.
April 6. Note "Upon the Heights of New Brunswick,"' by Prof. W. F. Ganong.
Address on the Geological Features of Quaco, by Dr. Geo. F. Matthew.
The Relations of France to Newfoundland, by H. Geo. Addy, M.D.
May i. Address on "A New Palaeozoic Insect, with Notes on the Fauna in
which it Occurs," by Dr. Geo. F. Matthew. (Pub. in Bulletin XV. )
" Some Probable Jesuit Influences Upon our North-Eastern Flora,"
by Prof. M. L. Fernald.
June 1. t( The Indian Potato; What was It?" by Rev. W. 0. Raymond.

"Trees and Forests," by James Vroom.
Oct. 4. Reports on the work of the Quaco Camp, by President Hay, Dr.

Matthew, and Percy G. Hall.
Nov. 2. Address on the History of Rockwood Bog, by Dr. Geo. F. Matthew.
Dec. 7. "Notes on a Wild Garden," by Geo. U. Hay.

Note " Upon the Manner in which the Bay of Fundy Rivers of New
Brunswick empty into the Sea," by Prof. W. F. Ganong.

82 BULLETIN' OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

Jan'y 4. "Niagara," by Prof. L. W. Bailey.

Canadian Earthquakes in 1897, by Samuel W. Kain.

In addition to the above, an elementary series of lectures was
delivered, viz.:

London Museums; Geologj- from a Railway Train; Peat-Bogs — three
lectures by Dr. Geo. F. Matthew.

* Philosophy of Art — Dr. D. R. Moore.

Upon Trinidad and the Customs of Its People — J. V. Ellis, Jr.

Pre-Historic American Pottery — S. W. Kain.

Anatomical Features of Birds; Plumage of Birds; Observation, Collecting,
and Mounting — three lectures by A. Gordon Leavitt.

Invertebrates.

The Chairman of this Committee reports that the entire collection
of insects has been re-mounted and re-arranged by Mr. Wm. Mcintosh.
He has also added some 500 specimens, which, with about 200 speci-
mens presented by Mr. Philip Mcintosh and Mrs. S. B. McPherson,
constitute the most important accession of the year.

Archaeology.

But little work has been done in this department. A circular has
been received from Prof. Penhallow asking the co-operation of the
Society in a scheme having for its object the collection of information
relative to the ethnography of Canada. The Committee hope to aid
in this work when definite plans have been arranged by the promoters.

Museum.

The museum has been open to the public, as usual, on Tuesday
evenings and .Saturday afternoons, and, as the register shows, has
attracted many visitors. The rooms underwent a thorough cleaning
in October, but constant attention is required to keep them in good
condition.

Botany.

The Committee on Botany record a few plants found new to the
province. A list of these will be found on page 75.

Geology.

The report of the Chairman of the Geological Committee deals at
some length with the work at Quaco (in connection with the Summer
Camp), where a third member of the Mesozoic system, the presence of
which has not been before noticed, was recognized by Dr. Matthew.

* Published in pamphlet of 88 pp , 1807; reviewed in Pop. Sei. Monthly, Oct., 1897.

appendix report of the council. 83

General.

A movement, originating, we need scarcely say, in the minds of
the Associate Members, is now on foot to open the rooms to the public
three afternoons in the week. They propose to employ a lady librarian
and curator, who will place and keep the museum in good order, and
catalogue and re-arrange the library, under the direction of the regular
officers of those departments. The necessary funds will be obtained
by enlarging the membership and by special donations.

A programme of the winter's work has been distributed, and
exhibits a new departure — that of laboratory work — which we think
will prove both interesting and profitable.

We desire to remind you that a building fund has been established
by one of our members ; and we trust that further donations will soon
be forthcoming ; for we must remain alive to the fact that the space
at our disposal is quite inadequate to our purpose, and that our collec-
tions, being unsafely housed, must, in case of fire, be entirely destroyed.
Let us hope that our new building is not so very far in the future.

The Summer Camp of July last was, perhaps, the most enjoyable
in the history of the Society. The trustees of the St. Martins Seminary
very courteously placed their large building at our disposal, and we
found ourselves in comfortable quarters, provided with excellent facili-
ties for class-work and lectures, and centrally and pleasantly situated.
Amongst those who attended we may mention Prof. L. W. Bailey,
Dr. Geo. F. Matthew, President G. U. Hay, Prof. W. F. Ganong, and
Prof. A. Wilmer Duff.

To the press of St. John we owe our best thanks for the free pub-
lication of notices and reports of meetings, and of articles of much
greater length ; and also to the gentlemen who contributed to the
lectures and essay series during the year.

While on reviewing the past year we do not find so many remarkable
features as in its predecessor, yet we feel quite justified in considering
it one of more than average excellence. It witnessed a large addition
to the membership, a most successful Summer Camp, considerable
accession to the museum and library, the issue of a large bulletin, and,
finally, the appointment of a permanent assistant librarian and curator.
We feel confident that the ensuing year will be equally active and
equally prosperous.

Respectfully submitted.

PERCY G. HALL,

Secretary.

84 APPENDIX — REPORT OF FREDERICTON SOCIETY.

REPORT OF THE FREDERICTON NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

(Instituted February 2nd, 1895.)

The Fredericton Natural History Society, of which L. W. Bailey,
Ph.D., LL. D., is President, held nine regular meetings during the year
ending 20th February, 1898, at which the following papers were read :

1897.
Mar. 15. " The Geology of England from a Railway Train," by Dr. G. F.

Matthew.
April 19. " The Body -Covering of Animals," by Dr. L. W. Bailey.
May 17. " The Bony Framework of the Human Body," by H. H. Hager-

man, B.A.
May 27. " The Forms, Sizes, and other Characteristics of Flowers," bj Prof.

W. F. Ganong.
Oct. IS. "Niagara," by Dr. Bailey.
Nov. 22. " The Face of the Earth," by Dr. Bailey.
Dec. 13. " The Botany of the Restigouche," by G. U. Hay, M.A.

1898.
Jan'y 17. " Rocks, and What They Tell Us," by Dr. Bailey.
Feb'y2l. " Rock Ruins," by Dr. Bailey.

Through the efforts of members of the Society, the common schools
of the city of Fredericton have been supplied with sets of common
minerals for class use, and the High School is being supplied with a
collection of the minerals of New Brunswick. Some field work has
been done by the members of the Society, but not as much as might
be desired. Mr. AY. H. Moore, however, one of our ornithologists, has
been able to add two birds to the list of summer residents of New
Brunswick — the Marsh Wren (Cistothorus palustris) and Lincoln's
Song Sparrow (Melosphiza Jincclni).

JOHN BRITTAIN,

Secret* try.

APPENDIX REPORT OF KINGS COUNTY SOCIETY. 85

REPORT OF THE KINGS COUNTY NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

Organized October 2nd, 1897, at Sussex, Kings Co., N. B.

Officers.

President — Robert King, A.B., Sussex.
Vice-President — Miss Louise Wetmore, Sussex.
Secretary-Treasurer — Mr. W. N. Biggar, Sussex.
Chairman of Executive Com. — Mr. Win. Goold, Sussex.

Objects of the Society.

The objects of the Society, as set forth in its Constitution, are as
follows :

The study of the natural history of the Province of New Brunswick in

general, and especially of Kings County;
The collection and preservation of specimens;
The foundation of a library of scientific books;

The meeting of members at regular periods for mutual instruction in natural
science.

Meetings, Membership, Etc.

Regular meetings are held at 9. 30. a. m. on the first Saturday in
each month. The Society, which started with twenty-four charter
members, has now fifty-two names on its roll. The increase in mem-
bership and interest has been steady, and the results obtained by
united endeavor, so far, satisfactory. For convenience in working,
the members are divided, according to their own preference, into five
sections, as follows : Geology and mineralogy, botany, zoology, orni-
thology, and entomology. Each of these sections is in charge of a
committee of three. The annual membership fee is twenty-five cents,
and visitors, invited by members, are welcomed. The election of officers
takes place on the Saturday before Labor Day in each year. The
thanks of the Society are due the Natural History Society of New
Brunswick, and especially to President G. U. Hay for help in organ-
izing, copies of bulletins, and many other favors.

W. N. BIGGAR,

Secretary.

86

APPENDIX — DONATIONS TO THE LIBRARY.

DONATIONS TO THE LIBRARY, 1897.

Donor's Name.

Royal Geographical Society

Hugh Robert Mill

Trustees British Museum

Royal Society

Royal Colonial Institute

Geological Societ y

Director Royal Gardens

Manchester Geological Society

Biological Society

Liverpool Geological Society

Marine Biological Association. .

Natural History Society

Mason College

Royal Society of Canada

Ottawa Field Naturalists' Club

Department Inland Revenue

Department of Agriculture

Experimental Farms

Hon. Geo. E. Foster

Henry F. Perley

Entomological Society of Ontario

Hamilton Association

Natural History Society

Historical and Scientific Society of Manitoba

Nova Scotia Institute of Natural Sciences

Canadian Institute

Toronto Public Library

Astronomical and Physical Society

R. F Stupart

Government of British Columbia

Natural History Society of British Columbia

Dr. Geo. F. Matthew

Dr. W. D Matthew...

Thomas Cunard

D. Russell Jack

Mrs. Gilbert Murdock

Samuel W. Kain

New Brunswick Historical Society

Scientific Association of Trinidad

Australian Museum

Australian Association for Advancement of Science. . .

Linna^an Society of N. S. W

New Zealand Institute —

U. S. Bureau of Ethnology

U. S. Geological Survey

U. S. Fish Commission

U S. National Museum

U. S. Department of Agriculture (Botanical Division!

U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey

U. S. Weather Bureau

Smithsonian Institution

University of California

University of Michigan

Cornell University

Tufts' College

John Hopkins University

Amherst College

Leland Stanford, Jr., University

Boston Society of Nntural History

Boston Public' Library

Essex Institute

New York Academy of Sciences

New York Microscopical Society

Linmi ii Society of New Y'ork

American Museum of Natural History

London .
do .
do .
do .
do .

Residence.

Work.

Journal

1 Vol., 4 Pamphlets.

Guides.

Proceedings.

Journal.

do Abs of Proceedings.

Kew Bulletins.

Manchester. . . Proceed, and Trans.

Liverpool do

do do

Plymouth Journal.

Glasgow Proceedings.

Birmingham.. .Calendar

Ottawa [Proceed, and Trans.

do :Ottawa Naturalist.

do [Bulletins.

do Census Reports.

do [Bulletins.

do 4 Volumes.

do I Gesner's Reports.

London. Ont. . jCan. Entomologist.

Hamilton 'journal

Montreal Can. Record of Scien.

Winnipeg Report.

Halifax Proceedings.

Toronto Transactions.

do ........ Report.

do Transactions.

do Weather Review.

Victoria Mining Reo ird.

do Bulletin 3.

St. John, N. B. Pamphlets,
do do

do 3 Volumes,

do 30 do

do Water Rep , 1854-94.

do Gr ty's Botany,

do Collections.

Port of Spain . . Proceedings
Sydney, N.S.W. [Report.

do Report. Vol. VI.

Elizabeth Bay. 'Proceedings.
Wellington, N.Z Proceed, and Trans.
Washington . . . Reports.

do Keportsand Bulletins

do do

do Reports and Proc.

do Bulletins,

do Report,

do Weather Review,

do Report.

Berkeley. Cal. . Bulletins.
Ann Arbor, • • Report.
Ithaca. N. Y. .. Bulletins.
Tufts'CoL.MaB* studies.
Baltimore . Circulars.
Massachusetts Calendar.
Palo Alto, Cal . Proceedings.

Boston Proceedings.

do Report.

Salem Transactions.

New York .... Journal.

do Abstract of Proc.

do Report,

do Bulletin.

APPENDIX — DONATIONS TO THE MUSEUM. 87

Donations to the Library — (Continued).

Donor's Name.

New York Public Library

University of New York

Colgate University

Natural Science Association of Staten Island.

Rochester Academy of Natural Sciences

Iowa Academy of Sciences. . .

Academy of Natural Science

Minnesota Academy of Natural Sciences

Texas Academy of Science.

Indiana Academy of Natural Sciences

California Academy of Sciences

Colorado Scientific Society

C. G- Lloyd

Missouri Botanical Gardens

Field Columbian Museum

Societe Scientifique du Chili

National Museum

Royal Academy of Science „

Comite Geologique du Russie . .

Imperial Academy of Sciences

Residence.

Work.

New York.. . .

A lbany

Hamilton

New Brighton. .
Rochester, N.Y
DesMoines. . . .
Philadelphia...
Minneapolis. . .

Austin

Indianapolis. ..
San Francisco.

Denver

Cincinnati

St. Louis

Chicago

Santiago.
Montevideo . .

Stockholm

St. Petersburg,
do

Bulletins.
Museum Report.
Circulars.
Proceedings.

do

do

do
Bulletins.
Transactions.
Proceedings.

do
Transactions.
Plates.
Report.
Publications.
Actes.
Annales.
Proceedings.
Memoirs.
Bulletins.

DONATIONS TO THE MUSEUM.

Date.

Donor's Name and Description of Article.

1897.
Feb.

Mar.

Apt

May.

Mr. E. J. Armstrong. Specimen of Asbestos.

Mr. L. L. Cassidy. Specimens of Gold, Silver, and Copper

Ores.

Mr. G S. Fisher. Specimens of Wood gnawed by Beavers,
from Rockwood Bog.

Mr. W. A. Jack. Tadpoles and small Fishes.

Mrs. Gilbert Murdock. Cup and Saucer, manufactured in
15th century. Fire Bucket, Two Vases, One Dollar
Bill and one Quarter Dollar, which went through St.
John fire of June 20, 1877.

Mr. A. Gordon Leavitt. Harlequin Duck (mounted).

Gen. D. B. Warner. Honeycomb in spruce tree, on stand.

Mr. W. F. Best. Star-fishes and Sea-urchins from Partridge
Island.

88 APPENDIX — DONATIONS TO THE MUSEUM.

Donations to the Museum — (Continued).

Date.

Donor's Name and Description op Article.

1897.

May

Oct.

Mr. Jos. Allison. Curious section of Wood.

Mr. Norman Robertson. Mineral specimens from Kootenay,

B. C.
Mr. W. A. Butler. Calamites approximates.

Mr.

Robert ThOxMSON. Ammonite imbedded in flint pebble ;
also minerals from Giant's Causeway, Ireland.

Mr.

F. J. McNaughton, Fossil Footprints of reptile from
Joggins, N. S.

Nov

Dr.

Geo. F. Matthew. Section of Rockwood Bog, and section
of large cedar tree.

Dec.

Mr.

Wm. McIntosh, Philip McIntosh, and Mrs. S. B.
McPherson. Collection of Native Insects, 534 speci-
mens.

Mr.

Joshua P. Clayton. Pair of child's clogs from Bury,
Lancashire, G. B. Chart of St. John Harbor, dated
September, 1761.

DONATIONS TO THE FUNDS, 1897.

A. Gordon Leavitt, Esq. (to Building Fund) .$10.00

Anonymous 1.00

$11.00

OFFICERS AND COMMITTEES. 89

Officers and Committees of the Natural History
Society for 1898.

Patron — His Honor the Lieutenant Governor, Honorable A. R.
McClelan.

Council for 1898.

President -Geo. U. Hay, M.A., F.R.S.C.

Vice-Presidents — H. George Addy, M.D.; William Murdoch, C.E.

Treasurer — Robert Matthew, Esq.

Secretary — Percy G. Hall, Esq.

Librarian — Samuel W. Kain, Esq.

Curators — Dr. Geo. F. Matthew, A. Gordon Leavitt, and William

Mcintosh.
Additional Members — J. Roy Campbell, W. Frank Hatheway, Frank

E. Holman.
Delegate to the Royal Society — William J. Wilson.
Assistant Librarian and Curator — Miss Edith McBeath.

Associate Members' Branch.

President — Mrs. Geo. F. Matthew.
Secretary-Treasurer — Mrs. Frank E. Holman.

Standing Committees for 1898.

Physics — Wm. Murdoch, Prof. A. Wilmer Duff, E. T. P. Shewen, C.E.
Geology— Dr. G. F. Matthew, Prof. L. W. Bailey, Geo. J. Trueman.
Ornithology — A. Gordon Leavitt, A. Morrisey.
Botany — Geo. U. Hay, Mrs. Wm. Bowden, J as. Vroom, Mrs. H. Geo.

Addy, Wm. Mcintosh.
Archaeology — S. W. Kain, F. E. Holman, R. Matthew.
Library — S. W. Kain, Mrs. Geo. U. Hay, R. Matthew, Mrs. W. F.

Hatheway.
Rooms— Dr. H. Geo. Addy, Miss K. A. M. Cotter, Mrs. Geo. U. Hay,

J. E. Wilson, Wm. Mcintosh, Mrs. F. E. Holman.
Finance — R. Matthew, J. Roy Campbell, W. F. Hatheway.
Press — S. W. Kain, A. Gordon Leavitt, P. G. Hall, Miss Dorothea

Matthew, Miss Edith McBeath.
Lectures — Geo. U. Hay, Miss A. Jack, Dr. H. Geo. Addy, S. W. Kain,

P. G. Hall.
Publications— Dr. G. F. Matthew, S. W. Kain, Geo. U. Hay, P. G. Hall,

A. Gordon Leavitt.
Microscopes — Dr. W. W. White, W"m. Mcintosh, Chas. F. B. Rowe.

MARINE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY.

Received

Accession No. /...Q../.*l .

Given by ^H<^L..^.C<X
Place,

***No book op pamphlet is to be removed from the Iiab-
opatory cuithout the permission of the Trustees.

BULLETIN

Natural History Society

NEW BRUNSWICK

No. XVII

(Volume IV. Part II.)

PUBLISHED BY THE SOCIETY,

SAINT JOHN, N. B. , CaSADA :

Barnes & Co., Printers, 84 Prince William Street,
1899.

BULLETIN

Natural History Society

NEW BRUNSWICK.

ARTICLE I.

THE MARSH AND LAKE REGION AT THE HEAD OF
CHIGNECTO BAY.

By George J. Truemax, M. A.

Read April 2, 1896.

CONTENTS.

Geographical Description Page 93

Surface Geology, " 94

Marsh Improvements, " 96

Formation of Lake and Bog " 98

The Marsh Soil, " 102

Geographical Description. — The Isthmus of Chignecto is about
fifteen miles wide at its narrowest part. Its western shore is washed
by the head waters of the Bay of Fundy. This Bay, running up
toward the north-east, tapers into Chignecto Bay, which divides into
Shepody Bay on the north and into Cumberland Basin, between
Cumberland in Nova Scotia and Westmorland in New Brunswick.
These two arms of Chignecto Bay are separated by a somewhat boot-
shaped piece of land, known as the Meranguin Peninsula.

Shepody Bay receives the waters of the Petitcodiac and Memram-
cook, while the Tantramar, Aulac, Missiguash, La Planche and River
Hebert, with the Nappan and Maccan Rivers, flow into Cumberland
Basin.

94 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

All these streams have areas of marsh or bog lands along the
greater part of their courses. The largest bodies now in cultivation
are along the Tantramar, the most northerly of the group. The
relative position of the rivers can be best seen from the accompanying
map, but a few words of description are necessary for those who are
not familiar with the country.

The Tantramar and Aulac now into the Basin by one mouth.
Some three miles up the Tantramar is the village of Sackville. The
river, with its numerous windings is about twenty miles long. Some
eight miles from the mouth the stream divides, one branch coming
from Cookville on the north, and the other flowing down the marsh
from the north-east.

The Aulac is not separated from the Tantramar by a ridge of
highland, as is usually the case with the marsh rivers. About five
miles from the mouth, the Aulac branches, one branch, La Coup
flowing down from the Jolicure Lakes to the north of Jolicure, the
other branch coming down between Jolicure Point and the Aulac
ridge.

The Missiguash River flows almost parallel with the Aulac, from
which it is separated by a high ridge of millstone grit, called the
Aulac or Point de Bute Ridge. This river is not more than twelve
miles long, and the upper part of its course is lost in a maze of lakes
and bog. Along its lower course it forms the boundary between the
two provinces, New Brunswick and Nova Scotia.

At the same mouth by which the Missiguash enters the Basin, the
La Planche finds its way to the sea. The lower courses of the rivers
are separated by Fort Lawrence Ridge. This ridge is not so high as
that on the north of the Missiguash, and it is overlaid with Permo-
Carboniferous rocks. The lakes and bogs of these two streams unite
at their sources. The town of Amherst is south-east of the mouth of
the La Planche, beyond this the Basin takes a sudden turn to the
south, and terminates in the mouth of the River Hebert.

Surface Geology. — The Esthmus is overlaid with Permo-Carbon
iferous rocks, with the exception of the Aulac Ridge with its continu-
ation across the mouth of the Aulac and the Tantramar to Westcock.
This strip is Millstone Grit.

The marsh mud is from one to one hundred and fifty feet deep,
and is underlaid with Permo-Carboniferous shales and sandstones.
These shales are covered in many places with heavy red clay similar
to that found on the Aulac and Fort Lawrence ridges. The marsh

MARSH AXD LAKE REGION AT HEAD OF CHIGNECTO BAY. 95

mud and underlying soil are perfectly distinct, and there is every
evidence that the mud has been laid down in recent geological times ;
certainly since the Glacial period. Off Fowler's Hill, on the Aulac
Ridge, the descent is very rapid, and one-third of a mile from the
shore borings have shown the mud to be one hundred and fifty feet
thick. At the same distance from the Saekville shore, where the hills
slope more gradually, there is not more than sixty feet of mud.

Formation of the Marsh. — As to how this marsh was formed one
not thoroughly conversant with the geology of the region can do little
else than speculate. There have evidently been many changes in
the level of the southern shore of .New Brunswick in known geological
times. Dr. G. F. Matthew considers that the Isthmus was far above its
present level in the Glacial period. At that time Chignecto Bay
would be a valley and the Bay of Fundy dry land. Glacial action
would have eroded the surface and moved the loose incoherent material
to lower levels. The depression of the land that followed the glacial
period would have allowed the accumulation of marine clays such as
are now found on the Aulac Ridge and adjoining elevations. A sub-
sequent re-elevation would permit the accumulation of forest mould
and soil on these ridges and the contiguous valleys.

In 1892, when excavations for the marine dock were being made
near the mouth of the Missiguash River, numerous trunks of trees
were found about at low tide level. Sir Win. Dawson, some years
ago, found a stump there showing over one hundred rings of growth.
(Acadian Geol. p. 28-29). Some of these trees were white pine,
others beech : neither variety attain such a size on damp land.
Evidently the land where these trees were growing was much above
its present level. The trees were found rooted in a rich loamy soil
resting on a bed of red clay. To be above the reach of high tides the
region would have to be from sixty to eighty feet above the present
level.

On the Baie Verte side of the Isthmus abundant evidence is found
of recent depression. Mr. E. P. Goodwin, C. E., of Baie Verte, while
digging mud for fertilizing purposes, found oak leaves and spruce cones
in the solid mud twelve feet below the surface, and there was every
evidence that they had fallen on what was then the ground surface.

The subsidence was probably gradual, and on the Bay of Fundy
has practically ceased, as the dykes have not been made perceptibly
higher in the last 100 years.

96 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

When the regions first settled below high tide level, the salt water
would creep around the sturdy beeches and pines, and while depositing
the food for plants yet to grow, would kill off the old and hardy race
of trees. Ice would break off the tops of these trees, and the water
bear them away, or the elements would rot the tops down, and only
the lower part, encased in the solid mud, would remain to tell the story
of the old upland valleys now under the marsh. The land nearest the
Basin would at first be submerged, but as the depression went on the
salt water would make its way further and further up the valleys. It
would seem from an examination of these regions that neither moss nor
grass made any perceptible growth until the subsidence ceased. At
points down the Bay there is evidence of different surface soils of the
marsh that were formed in the process of settlement. On Cobequid
Bay near Onslow several turfs are plainly seen, each separated by a foot
or more of deposited mud. A canal, fifteen feet deep at the mouth with
a grade of two feet to the mile, is now being dug up the Point do
Bute marsh, and in no place throughout the ihree miles already dug
is there any evidence of vegetable remains below the present surface.
. In the marsh soil vegetable remains would be very readily detected by
the presence of the surrounding blue mud. The same absence of blue
turf or peaty surfaces is seen wherever canals have been dug in the

marsh soil.

The marsh rivers are constantly changing their beds. After the
depression first occurred they may have kept their channels for some
time, but by the rush of mud-laden water every curve becomes greater-
as the stream rushes against the opposite bank one side wears oil' and
the other builds on.

In the memory of men now living, marked changed have been
made in the position and direction of some of the rivers. Off Pros-
pect Farm at Point de Bute, the Aulac has, in the last two hundred
years moved some three hundred feet nearer to Sunken Island. This
change is clearly proven by the old dykes. When it is remembered
that the Aulac has been abandoned for sixty years, it will be seen
how rapidly these changes are made.

Marsh Improvements — Nature did much to make this a fertile
region, but it was necessary for man to make some exertion that he
tnight^reap the harvest. The French, settling herein the seventeenth
century, dyked the rivers and raised crops on the marshes. There are
records of their damming up the smaller streams in the firsl half of

MARSH AND LAKE REGION AT HEAD OF CHIGNECTO BAY. 9<

the eighteenth century. Father LaLoutre used the men and money
for this purpose that were sent him to be used in putting Fort Beause-
jour in a state of defense, but not until the English came to this
country were large aboideaus built.

In 1827 the Aulac was aboideaued four miles from its mouth, and
in 1840 an aboideau was thrown across less than two miles further
down.

Eighty years ago these lands presented a very different appearance
from what they do now. The Aulac was much larger, at least in its
upper course, than the Tantramar. The bridge across the Tantramar,
where the upper bridge now stands, was just eighteen feet wide, as
stated in an old contract. Above this point the whole region was
covered with moss, and the water oozed rather than flowed into a very
crooked, lazy stream. A mile north-east of the bridge, in the bog,
Goose Lake was situated. Its waters flowed north-east to Gravelly-
beach Lake, and then in about the same course to Big Lake. Big
Lake drained into the Aulac through La Coup. A large part of the
land in the lower course of the rivers was also bog.

About 1815 Tolar Thompson started a canal between the Tantra-
mar and Goose Lake. This man, a farmer, had made a careful study
of the lake region, and was convinced that the lakes could be drained
and made into marsh. Before this canal was finished in 1820, one
was dug in a northerly direction toward Log Lake. The old river
course and the canals can be seen on the accompanying map. The
new canal took a straight course. Tolar's Island and the old river
bed with its many curves, filled up level with Bay of Fundy mud.
This canal was cut through about ten feet of moss, but did not go
into the underlying mud. The moss was cut in large junks and floated
down the stream by the receding tide, hence the name " Floating
Canal " which it still bears.

In recent years, this canal has been extended five miles beyond
the Upper Bridge, and hundreds of acres of good marsh are to be seen
in the place of lake and moss. The lakes were from four to seven feet
deep, and they were allowed to fill with mud before the surrounding
moss was covered with the deposit. Several small lakes on this branch
are still unreclaimed, but they are gradually filling with the mud
from the canal. Blue or red mud underlies all the lake and bog areas,
and is found in the valley eight or ten miles above the upper bridge.
The greater part of the low moss lias been made up, but hundreds of
acres of high moss are still growing " hard hacks " and small trees.

98 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

The floating canal has greatly increased in size since it was dug
and has worn into the mud from two to four feet. On the more
southerly branch of the Tantramar, at Goose Lake, hay has been cut
for seventy years. Moss is again growing on this lake and surround-
ing lands, and large tracts are having their fertility ruined. The
more energetic farmers are digging wide ditches and using the rich
marsh soil thus obtained as a fertilizer. Good results are in this way
secured.

The Aulac river has not been so well handled. The Trueman and
Etter aboideaus have much reduced the size of the river. The system
of lakes at the head of LaCoup stream is shut off from the tide. The
rail and carriage I'oads cross the river on the Etter Aboideau. Only
at a great cost could the river be again opened and the natural fertili-
zers carried to the Point de Bute marshes. Not only this, but some
of the lakes on La Coup have been turned down the Tantramar, and
even were the stream opened, the basin above into which it might
throw its waters would be much reduced.

Formation of Lake and Bog. — One naturally wonders how all these
lakes wrere formed, and what led to the tremendous growth of moss.
The building up of the lakes has given a clue to their formation.
When the water is first let into a lake the greatest depth of mud is
deposited at its mouth, where the tidal waters enter. If the season
is rainy the outflowing fresh water may prevent any deposit, but if
the time is dry eighteen inches of mud may be laid down at a lake
entrance in a single set of spring tides. The reason for this is evident.
The water, running up the canal with great force, loses its speed as it
spreads over the lake, and the larger part of the sediment settles at
once. As the water runs slowly up the river in the neap tides, much
sediment is deposited in the river bed. When the spring tides come
on, especially those in the late summer when it is usually dry, this
sediment is lifted and carried into the lakes above. Thus the water
at the head of the stream is often more heavily laden with mud than
that further down.

Red or blue mud underlies both lake and bog, its depth varying as
the underlying soil rises or falls. Under the whole upper section the
mud is about the same level. Owing to the gathering of silt the lake
bottoms are often higher than the mud below the surrounding bog.
En idently the tide once flowed through the whole valley without being
hampered by lake or bog. Before the marsh reached its present state
of depression, lake basins were formed by the water damming itself in

MARSH AND LAKE REGION* AT HEAD OF CHIGNECTO BAY. 99

as before explained. These lakes and ponds may have been many times
drained by the water breaking out in a weaker place. The same thing
now takes place in draining the lakes. After the tide has entered,
unless the self-erected barrier is dug through, the receding tide, swelled
by the fresh water coming down will break out of the lake at some
weaker point, and find its way to the river by the path that offers
least resistance.

A lake basin once strongly formed would be made stronger by
each tide. As the moss gradually settled the barrier would become
higher and the lake deeper. One would expect a heavy flow of fresh
water to keep the barrier worn down, therefore the largest lakes
should be where there is the least flow of fresh water. This is just
what is found. Sunken Island, one of the largest lakes, has no stream
of any size flowing into it. At the head of Morice's Mill Pond, Sack-
ville, before the dam was put in, there was a small lake reaching from
W. W. Fawcett's to the mouth of Beech Hill Stream. Mud extends
all over the pond bottom and up the stream to the foot of Beech Hill.
The lake is dammed off with marsh mud. The history is evident.
The mud has shut off the lake as before described, and the rush of
fresh water down Beech Hill Stream has kept the stream open below.
When the subsidence of the marsh areas become almost nil the lauds
that had kept their drainage open in course of time became covered
with salt grasses. The growth of these grasses had been largely
checked by the salt water, while the marsh was settling. Now only
the highest tides would cover the drained marsh, and the lakes would
be practically freed from any incursions of salt water. Moss then
sprang up around these fresh water lakes. Year after year this moss
reached out and grew higher. Most of these moss plants are of the
genus Sphagnum, and growing one upon another they kept above the
level of the water, and grew out over it. This moss was always full
of water and exposed such a breadth of surface to the air that the
greater part of the water was carried off by evaporation. The moss
itself, at least in the older lakes, formed an additional barrier against
the tide. In digging the Floating Canal many trees of small size were
found buried in the moss. When once started the moss grows over a
lake very rapidly. Many of the lakes on the Tantramar have become
markedly smaller in the memory of men now living.

Sunken Island is a great lake overgrown with moss, and in this -
moss are heaths, etc., and stunted trees. Many of these trees are
from 15 to 25 feet high, 10 inches in diameter, and show 60 or more

100 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

rings of growth. Few of the lake bogs have such large trees on them,
and few have become so filled with moss. There is every evidence
that this lake was one of the earliest to be dammed off. In the first
place it is several miles nearer the mouth of the river than the other
lakes, and its position between the Aulac and Tantramar would make
it liable to damming from both sides. The small amount of fresh
water running out of it would make this easily possible. One or two
small open lakes of less than an acre in extent alone remain of the
original lake which probably covered nearly one thousand acres.
There are about seven feet of water in these lakes, and the depth is
about as great close to the shore as farther out. The moss projects
over the water in such a manner as to make it dangerous to approach
the margin. When examined last by the writer there were several
large pieces of detached moss floating in the centre. The moss is now
intergrown with heaths, bullrushes, coarse grass, cranberry vines,
pitcher plants, etc., so that the " hackmatacks ;' (larches) find a fair
amount of soil in the rotting vegetable matter.

A good deal of money has been spent in Sunken Island with little
or no results. The moss is so high that a great deal of salt water will
be needed to kill it, and a long time will pass before it will be properly
settled. In fact since the aboideaus were blown out and the tide
allowed to flow in unhindered on the " Big Marsh," the water has not
risen high enough to enter this island at all.

The digging of a canal into the Jolicure Lakes has been agitated
for some time. The owners of the Sunken Island body hope the route
selected may be through the island. Should the canal take that course
the bog could be made into marsh, and probably pay a dividend to the
investors.

North-east of Cole's Island the Tantramar curves out, then
doubles back on Itself, leaving a point of land joined to the mainland
bv a narrow neck sixty feet wide. High tides swept over this and
rendered the point unfit for cultivation. The water going up the
river kept its old bed, but no sooner would it get around to the upper
side of the neck than it would rush back over the neck to return agaiu
bv the way of the main river. This gives one an idea of the rapidity
with which the water rises as it runs up the river. This neck was
cut oil' in 1893 by two of Sackville's enterprising farmers, anil in 1894
there were twenty feet of mud deposited in the old channel. Several
'acres of marsh will be made from the reclaimed point and the old
river bed.

MARSH AND LAKE REGION AT HEAD OF CHIGNECTO BAY. 101

If a canal were cut through the Ram-pasture neck, a similar curve
further down, a much larger piece of marsh would be given to the
country. Unfortunately the wharves are situated on the curve, and
such a change would necessitate their being moved to another part of
the river. So great is the rush of water back over this neck when the
tide is flowing in, that several hundreds of dollars have been spent by
the government to prevent the neck from wearing out of itself.

The work that has been done in building up the marsh soil is but
small in comparison with what can be done. At the head of the Mis-
siguash and La Planche rivers the lake and bog areas are extensive.
With proper handling, thousands of acres of marsh can be made. The
work is being agitated, but the large immediate outlay required, and
the prospect of slow returns, deter capitalists from hastening into
what at first sight appears to be a fine investment.

Since writing the above paragraph a company has been formed for
the purpose of draining the areas at the sources of these rivers. They
have had a surveyor on the ground for the past year, and at present
have dug two miles in a canal intended to tap all the lakes on the
marsh. At present a steam dredge is working about five miles above
the mouth of the Missiguash. They began to dig three miles from
the mouth, and have made a canal fifteen feet deep by thirty wide,
decreasing in depth at the rate of two feet per mile as it approaches
the lakes. At Round Lake, which is six miles above the mouth of
the canal it should be six feet deep. A number of smaller lakes will
be drained before Goose Lake at the head of the marsh is reached.
In all there are about ten thousand acres at the head of the two rivers.
Near the mouths of these rivers there are already valuable marsh
areas. Surveys made in connection with the projected ship canal and
marine road, have given abundant material in regard to levels, etc.,
on this bog. From a study of the levels used by the Missiguash
Marsh Company the following data have been obtained : Taking a line
one hundred feet below the Sax by tide as a basis, the ground surface at
the mouth of the Missiguash is ninety-two feet above datum. The
bog surface ten miles up the marsh at Round Lake is ninety-five feet
above datum. The average spring tide is ninety-six feet above, while
the Saxby tide was one hundred feet above. As the bottom of the
lakes is scarcely ninety feet above datum, there will be a good fall from a
high tide in the river into the lakes ; these should therefore fill with
mud and come quickly into grass. The bog begins about six miles
from the mouth of the river, and the whole area above that is floating

102 BULLETIN OF THE* NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

bog and lake. That the bog is actually floating on mud and water,
there can be no doubt. There are from two to three feet of moss and
below that as much more rotted moss and water, forming a semi-fluid
substance. It does not seem possible that the lakes are held in by
this moss ; on the other hand the water in places run under the moss,
and acts in some ways as a lake with a thin layer of ice on its surface.
E, P. Goodwin, C. E., who has been engineer for the company for
the last year, thinks that this moss can be cut in large squares and
floated out the canal when the barrier of mud is cut away. It would
seem as if the canal being dug is too small when the very slight fall is
considered, and the area of the submerged lands.

Borings are to be made this winter all over the bog by Mr. Goodwin,
and in the spring new light may be thrown on the history of these
regions. So far the canal has not cut through to the bottom of the
marsh mud in one instance, nor has it come in contact with one stick
or other sign of vegetable remains.

The Marsh Soil. — The sediment floated up by the water is formed
from the wearing away of carboniferous sandstone and shales. As
the water is comparatively clear at the entrance to Cumberland Basin,
the rocks which yield the deposit must be situated above this. At
South Joggins nearly two feet of rock are worn away each year, and
no doubt the wash is carried up the bay to make marsh soil.

The mud is of an exceedingly fine texture. While very little grit
can be detected by the fingers or teeth, it nevertheless contains a large
amount of sand as seen in an analysis. Tools that are used in working
it soon become blunted. A heavy bolt was worn through on the
steam dredge in a few weeks from friction with the soil in shovelling.
When wet it seems almost soluble, and is very sticky. After being
quickly dried by the sun a harrow has little effect on marsh mud, it
being almost as hard as brick. In many cases seed is thrown on
the plowed land and the rain causing the soil to run buries it with
little or no harrowing.

The marsh soil is naturally of a red color, and this red soil consti-
tutes the valuable marsh. Hay has been cut from this for 100 years
and more without materially impairing its fruitfulness. Large quanti-
ties of red mud are annually carted on the highlands, and, as a fertilizer,
for many soils it is considered equal to barnyard manure. No analysis
that has yet been made will explain its marvellous fertility. Sir Wm.
Dawson (Acad. Geol. p. 23) thinks it may in a part be due to the
presence of fish bones and vegetable remains which do not appear in

MARSH AND LAKE REGION AT HEAD OF CHIGNECTO BAY. 103

an analysis. This seems very doubtful. May one cause not be the
extreme fineness of the soil which enables the plant to get its food
readily 1 One reason that so much land is not fertile is that the;
necessary ingredients are not in a state available for plant food. This
soil is in such a fine state of division that it must present a great deal
of surface to any dissolving agent. That it is rich there is no doubt, as
land that has been cutting heavy crops of hay for nearly two centuries
will give a rank growth of timothy when turned up by the plow, and
that without one bit of fertilizer during all this time.

Fertility is only insured by a thorough system of drainage. If
allowed to lie in the water the red soil changes to blue, and the growth
of moss and coarse grasses gives the soil a corky texture. The blue
mud covers all the low marshes, but usually has red mud under it at
no great depth. This quality of marsh is much less valuable than
the red, as it will produce coarse grasses and sedges only. When
plowed and drained a good crop of oats can be obtained, but even the
native grasses refuse to grow the following year.

This change from red to blue is an interesting one. The red mud
derives its color from peroxide of iron In the blue mud the iron is
in a state of a sulphuret. The change is brought about by the decay
of vegetable matter. The salt water contains salts of lime and magnesia.
The vegetable matter excluded from the air unites with these two
sulphates of lime and magnesia, liberating the sulphur as hydric sul-
phide and retaining the oxygen. The sulphide can be detected on any
low marsh by means of its unpleasant odor. This gas now unites
with the oxide of iron in the mud, producing iron sulphide which gives
the marsh its blue or gray color. When the water is drained off, the
iron of sulphide unites with the oxygen of the air, forming iron sul-
phate, a substance poisonous to most crops. This shows why blue
mud when drained refuses to grow even the native grasses. When
heated the iron sulphate is changed to a brown powder, an oxide of
iron similar to the ore, limonite. It is this oxide hydrated that is seen,
in the bottom and sides of so many marsh ditches. (Acad. Geol.)

104 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

Analyses of several Bay of Fundy marsh soils made at the Central
Experimental Farm, are given below for the sake of comparison : —

Unclaimed Marsh near Amherst, 1897 —

Moisture 3.78

Organic and Volatile 5. 86

Coarse Sand , 10. 0< •

Fine Sand and Clay 58.73

Nitrogen 137

Sackville Marsh, 1897 —

Potash 16

Phosphoric Acid 16

Nitrogen 131

Lime 13

Loss on Ignition 5.83

Unclaimed Marsh at Quaco, 1897 —

Air dried sample.

Moisture 7.66

Organic and Volatile 7.61

Insoluble Mineral Matter, Sand and Clay 71.96

Mineral Matter soluble in acid 12.77

Lime 42

Nitrogen 24

Common Salt 1.4

Mud from Five Islands, N. S. —

Nitrogen , . "7!>

Organic and Volatile 5.23

Sand and Clay 76.73

Mineral Matter soluble in acid 15.9

Water 2.85

Gaspereau River, N. S.

Nitrogen ,ls'

Water Ll.U

Clay and Sand 74.28

( Organic M .- < t ber ' 3.35

Oxide of Iron and A 1 8.08

Lime '*

Potash 40

Phosphoric Acid 12

THE "DIP" OF THE MAGNETIC NEEDLE IN NEW BRUNSWICK. 105

ARTICLE II.

*

THE " DIP " OF THE MAGNETIC NEEDLE IN
NEW BRUNSWICK.

By Prof. A. Wilmer Dfff.

Read December 6, 1898.

Nearly everyone knows the use of a magnetic needle for rinding
the direction of North. Those who are more familiar with the use of
such a compass know that the needle does not point to the true North,
but only approximately so ; that, in fact, the difference between the
true North, and the magnetic north as indicated by the compass,
differs by an angle which surveyors call the "variation" of the needle.
The angle is different at different places, and even at any one place it
is always gradually changing, although the change is a very slow one
and requires months to be perceptible, unless the measurements be
made with very great accuracy.

A casual glance at a compass needle is sufficient to show anyone
that the needle is only free to swing in a horizontal plane, owing to
the fact that the point of support of the needle is higher than its
centre of gravity. Now what would happen if the needle was sup-
ported so exactly at its centre of gravity that it could swing in a
vertical plane ass well as in a horizontal plane 1 It would be found to
come to rest at an inclination to the horizontal. The angle it would
then make with the horizontal is called the " dip " of the magnetic
needle, or, briefly, •' the magnetic dip." The dip, like the variation,
is different at different places, and if measured some months apart at
any one place it would be found to have changed appreciably.

106 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

The importance of the " variation " is so great in surveying and
navigation that it is frequently determined, and is pretty closely known
by any one who is in the habit of using the compass professionally ;
but, so far as I am aware, the " dip " has not been accurately deter-
mined anywhere in New Brunswick. If, however, I am mistaken,
any member of the Natural History Society who can find the record
of any past determinations of the dip, will find it interesting to com-
pare those determinations with the readings recorded in the remainder
of this paper and note the change time has produced. Before giving
the readings I have made, it may be noted that, while observations of
the dip have, at the present time, no direct practical importance, they
are of interest in assisting toward the formation of a true theory of
the nature and cause of the earth's magnetism. Moreover, very re-
markable differences, in both dip and variation, within the range of a
very few miles have been discovered in several countries, especially in
Russia, but also in France and England, and these have attracted
great interest as shedding some light on the constitution of parts of
the earth situated too far below the surface for direct examination.
Whether similar anomalous areas occur in New Brunswick must at
present be a matter of mere conjecture ; but their discovery, if exist-
ant, would be a matter of considerable scientific interest. While the
few determinations I have made are insufficient to shed any light on
such questions as the above, they will yet be of some interest to any-
one who may happen to repeat them a few years hence at the same
places.

The following observations were made with a very accurate port-
able dipping needle, made by Elliott Brothers, of London. It is t lie
property of Purdue University, and was brought east by me during a
summer holiday in 1898. A minute description of the instrument,
and the method of using it, is not called for here, further than the
statement that it was provided with means for careful levelling, re-
versing the magnetism of the needle, and eliminating the effects of
lack of symmetry in the needle or exactness in position of support.
Each reading given below is the mean of eight separate readings ; and
the angles, given in degrees and minutes, are the angles between a
horizontal line and the dipping needle, the north pole of the needle
dipping downward. Thus, it will be observed, that the needle pointed
more nearly vertically than horizontally. Many more observations
were made than those recorded below, but they were in the neighbor-

BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY. 107

hood of the places mentioned, and (with one doubtful exception, which
I hope to examine hereafter) showed no marked local peculiarities.

Station of Observation. Dip.

in August 1S98.

St. John (Fort Howe) 74° 35'

St. Andrews 74° 57'

Oak Point (St. John River) 75° 3'

The Point (Bellisle Bay) 75° 15'

Fredericton ... 75° 44'

Indian Village (above Fredericton) 75° 50'

Thus, in general, the dip increases as we go north, the change be-
tween St. John and Fredericton being somewhat over a degree.

I may add, that in addition to the variation and the dip, a third
quantity has to be measured, if we wish a complete account of the
magnetic condition at any point. This is the strength of the magnetic
force at the point ; but its measurement involves the use of a very
elaborate, heavy and expensive set of apparatus, called a Kew
Magnetometer, and this, together with the care and experience required
for its use, accounts for no determination having hitherto been made
in New Brunswick (or probably the neighboring provinces).

108 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

ARTICLE III.

NOTES OF A WILD GARDEN.

By G. U. Hay.

(Read before the Society, December 7th, 1897.)

About ten years ago the idea occurred to me of planting a wild
garden in which should be shown, as far as the conditions would war-
rant, the peculiarities and extent of the flora of New Brunswick. The
garden plot covers an extent of nearly two acres and is well adapted
for the purpose intended. It is situated about eleven miles from the
city, on a broken piece of ground overlooking the St. John river. In
one corner is a meadow, made up of alluvial deposit brought from the
neighboring hills, and adapted for plants usually found on intervales.
Through this meadow flows a small stream fed by springs on the hills
which lie to the westward. The idea of planting a native arboretum
was first suggested by finding in this meadow a group of small trees
and shrubs eight in number, forming a pretty little arbor on the bank
of the curving stream. The plants consisted of the cedar, the white
and yellow birch, American ash or rowan-tree, water alder, mountain
maple, balsam fir and black spruce. One could stand in the centre of
this arbor and touch one-tenth of all our forest trees and shrubs.
When nature had made such a beginning it was surely a broad hint
for me to do the rest.

When the remainder of the two acre plot came to be explored,
possibilities were found to exist for something more than an arboretum;
and the idea of a wild garden gradually came, which might include
most of our flowering plants, all our native ferns, and perhaps in time
a representative gathering of our mosses, lichens and fungi. Rising
from the meadow toward the south, within the bounds of the plot, is
a hill whose slope is covered with a young but quite ample growth of
spruce, fir, birch, maple, etc., the deciduous trees largely prevailing,
and giving to the soil each yeai an abundant supply of leaf mould.
Half way up this hill, in the centre of the grove, is a depression which

NOTES OF A WILD GARDEN. 109

catches the drainage of the slopes around it. The moist ground, cool
shade, and northern exposure of this basin, forms an ideal spot for a
fernery.

Thus there were provided a meadow and a grove, two very neces
sary adjuncts of a wild garden.

Crossing an intervening open space toward the south after leaving
the grove, the top of the hill is reached. Here stands an aged white
pine, the only survivor of a fire which swept over the place some years
before. The blackened trunk, and upper branches extended imploringly,
tell of its struggle for life On this knoll the soil is dry and poor,
covered with a growth of small trees and heath plants. This is called
Heath Hill. On the continuation of this knoll to the east stands a
small summer cottage overlooking the St. John river and the Nerepis
hills to the north. Sloping from the cottage toward the river is a
cultivated field in which and along its borders may be placed those
plants requiring full exposure to sunlight.

In this garden there have been about five hundred native species
of flowering plants and feins, many of which were in situ, while
others have been planted during the last ten years ; of these about
ten per cent, have disappeared, or failed to grow through lack of
proper conditions or the perils incident to long transportation, as the
transfer of plants has been made chiefly in the summer months ; so
that not quite one-half of the flowering plants of the province can be
seen in this space of nearly two acres. But little progress has been
made in planting the grasses, sedges, rushes, and aquatic plants. The
results in regard to the latter are especially disappointing, although
considerable labor has been expended on them. The (at times) tur-
bulent little stream has shown no disposition to be led into quiet
ponds or stretches of pool. It has even carried away — root, stem and
branch — the plants placed too confidingly within the limits of its bed,
and all attempts to secure its co-operation, or at least a passive non-
resistance in the scheme, have resulted in failure.

There is a larger representation of ferns in the garden than any
other class of plants. Nearly all of the forty species and varieties
found within the limits of the province were living and flourishing
during the past summer. The trees and shrubs are also very well
represented. Out of the eighty species found in the province, more
than sixty are growing and in good condition, and in a short time I
hope to have a complete representation of our forest trees and shrubs

110 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

Four years ago, Dr. Saunders, of the Experimental Farm, sent
me over one hundred plants representing, chiefly, the trees and
shrubs of Western Canada and a few northern European species. These
have been planted on the borders of the cleared spaces of the garden
and are kept quite distinct from the native species. They, with a
number of others, sent from Point Pleasant Park, Halifax, including
the Heather (Calluna vulgaris) have grown very well, although but
little care has been given them. These will serve for comparison with
similar native species as well as to illustrate the effect of our climate
upon them.

Little or no attempt has been made to put plants in rows or beds
according to their classification, the chief aim being to provide a
natural habitat and surroundings as far as possible. The only ex-
ception to this was the treatment of weeds, a colony of which, for
prudential reasons, I placed in a row beyond the pale of other plants.
With a perversity characteristic of their tribe, they spurned such
treatment and refused to grow.

Another family which does not take kindly to cultivation is the
Orchids. Manv of these, of which we have so many beautiful native
species, affect a solitary habit and are found in bogs. Others love the
rich mould of deep sheltered woods. Others such as the Calypso,
are rare or local in their occurrence.

In the future, I hope to present to the Society at the close of each
season, a few notes embodying the results of observations, especially
on the rarer species and those less susceptible of " cultivation,'"
together with the time of coming into leaf, flower or fruit of certain
species of plants, which on account of their commonness have been
generally accepted as the basis of observation. In making such obser-
vations, there is a great value in watching for results on the same
spot of ground or the same plant, or one quite near it, from year to
year. This I have endeavored to do after being assured that the
plant has adapted itself to its changed conditions, and had been long
enough in the garden to be relied on to furnish correct data. In the
results recorded below, I have not hesitated to go outside the garden
to make observations on plants more favorably situated for coming
into leaf or bloom early, always choosing the same locality, and, in
the case of perennials, the same plants from year to year.

The observations recorded below have extended over a period of
ten years, from L889 to 1898, inclusive. They are not so complete as

NOTES OF A WILD GARDEN. Ill

I would wish, as my visits wene generally confined to one day each
week (Saturday) in the months of April and May. I give the results
here, however, as they may be useful for comparison with those to
be made later, which I hope will be fuller and extending through
whole seasons.

Observations in Wild Garden and Adjacent Fields,

Ingleside. Kings Co., N. H.
1889.
May .'(. Plants in bloom : Adder's-tongue (Erythronium Americanum), May-
flower (Epigsea repens\ White Violet (Viola blanda), Gold-thread
(Coptis triloba1, Bellwort (Oakesia sessilifolia).

May 11. Purple Trillium (Trillium purpureum), Painted Trillium (T. ery.
throcarpum), Grove Anemone (A. nemorosa). Spring-beauty (Clay-
tonia Virginica), Hobble-bush (Viburnum lantanoides), Blue Violet
(Viola cucullata), June-berry (Amelanchier Canadensis), Straw-
berry (Fragaria Virginiana).

May 17-20. Rhodora (Rhodora Canadensis^, Blueberry (Vaccinium Pennsyl.
vanicum), Painted Trillium, Hobble-bush, Red Cherry (Primus
Pennsylvanicum), Shad-bush (Amelanchier botryapium).

(Hereafter the common names of plants alone will be given
except where species different from those above are named.)
1890.
May ■>. Mayflower (blooming beside the snow banks on the barrens), Adder's-
tongue (just beginning to open).

May 17. Adder's-tongue (in full bloom), Bellwort, Purple and Painted Tril-
liums, Blue and White Violets, Gold-thread, Red Maple (Acer-
rubrum.) Mayflowers still abundant on barrens,

May 23-28. Adder's-tongue, Blue and White Violets, still abundant. June-
berry, its pure white petals making a beautiful contrast with the
delicate green of the unfolding leaves of surrounding trees; Ser-
vice-berry, Strawberry, Hobble-bush, Grove Anemone.
1891.

May 2. Mayflower, Adder's-tongue. (A few in bloom).

May 9. Adder's-tongue (in full bloom), White Violet, one Blue Violet.

May 15. Trees still leafless. Weather dry. Cold and backward.

May 28. Trees (White Birch, Poplars and Maples) just coming into leaf, and
fully expanding in the next two days under the influence of
warmer weather. In bloom — Strawberry, Blue Violet, Red-ber-
ried Elder (Sambucus racemosa), Gold-thread.
1892.

April .'. No signs of leaves or flowers unfolding. Plenty of snow in hollows,
but dav warm and bright.

112 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

April 18. Willow and Alder catkins beginning to shed pollen, Adder's-

tongue leaves above ground. Very cold north winds.
April 30. Mayflowers in full bloom on barrens. Cold north winds continue.

May 7. Adder's-tongue (in full bloom), White Violet, Mayflower, Sweet
Coltsfoot (Petasites palmata).

.1/"V l.'h Bellwort, Grove Anemone, Blue and White Violets.

1893.
April ."■>. Hepatica triloba (planted the previous year) beginning to bloom
beside a snow bank.

May /•)'. Mayflower, White Violet, Adder's-tongue, Selkirk's Violet (Viola
Selkirkii , Hepatica, Red Maple.

May .'". Blue Violet, Grove Anemone, Bluets (Houstonia carulea), Spring-
beauty, Gold-thread, Bellwort, Blossoms of Red Maple falling,
White Birch and Poplar trees unfolding their leaves.
1894.

April :S. Hepatica (in bloom), Aldei and Willow catkins elongated and begin-
ning to shed pollen. Patches of snow still visible in clearings
and hollows. Adder's-tongue leaves above ground; a few flower
buds visible. Mayflower has been in bloom for ten days in ex-
posed places on the barrens. Strawberry (a few scattered
blossoms).

May /.'. Bloodroot (Sanguinaria Canadensis), Blue flowers of Hepatica falling
with white in full bloom. The Purple and Painted Trilliums,
White and Blue Violets, Bellwort, Star-flower (Trientalis Ameri-
cana), Red Maple, Dandelion, Strawberry, in full bloom. Flower
buds of June-berry and leaf buds of Red Cherry and White
Birch ready to open. Frost out of ground and gardening
commenced.
1895.

April .'a. Weather warm and sun bright, with south-west wind. Catkins of
Alder shedding pollen. Leaves of Adder's-tongue above ground,
(No further observations this year on account of absence.)
1896.

April ;.'/. Season dry with cold winds from March, continuing to the middle
of May. Flowers of Alder shedding pollen.

May 1. White Violet, Hepatica, and Red Maple, in bloom, with a few
flowers of Adder's-tongue.

May 8 11. Adder's-tongue, Blue Violet, Dandelion, Strawberry, Bellwort.
Ground hy (Nepeta gleehoma), Grove Anemone.

May 15. June-berry, Blueberry, Purple and Painted Trilliums, Hobble-bush,
Blue Violet, Dandelion, Marsh Marigold (Caltha palustris), Bluets

May .'.'. i:<d Cherry, Elder, Starflower, small flowered Crowfool (Ranunculus
■a borl i\ us).

NOTES OF A WILD GARDEN. 113

1897.
May 7-10. Weather for first three weeks cold, with east winds and rain, with
an occasional warm day. Hepatica, Adder's-tongue (only a few
in flower), White Violet, Red Maple, Hazel (Corylus rostrata),
Alders, Willows, Poplars, in full flower in shaded places, — in ex-
posed places fading, with pollen shed ; Butterwort (Pinguicula
vulgaris) with leaves extended in rosettes. This plant, with such
northern ferns as Woodsia hyperborea, W. glabella, Pellaea
gracilis, and others, were brought from the Restigouche, 200
miles farther north, the previous season, and were among the first
in the garden to unfold their leaves and fronds.

May 14-19. Adder's-tongue (in full bloom), Painted Trillium (a few), White
Violet (abundant), Blue Violet (a few), Grove Anemone, Bellwort,
Gold-thread, Strawbeny (beginning to flower), Mayflower (in
shade), Marsh Marigold.

May :1-.J~>. Bluets, Hobble-bush, June-berry, Purple Trillium, Dandelion
Ground Ivy.

May -Hi. Nodding Trillium (Trillium cernuum), False Mitrewort (Tiarella
cordifolia), Rhodora, Red Cherry, Elder, Dandelion, Strawberry.
1898.

April 23. Season cold and backward, although the fine weather of February
and March promised an early spring. Frost still in ground and
cold east winds prevail. Mayflower (in bloom), Adder's Tongue
with leaves above ground.

May 7. Hepatica and Red Maple (in full bloom), Alder and Poplar catkins
shedding pollen, a few Adder's-tongue, Blue and White Violets (in
bloom).

May //,. All the flowers named above in full bloom, with Bellwort, Grove
Anemone, Bloodroot, Leatherwood (Dirca palustris).

May .' '. Purple and Painted Trillium?, June-berry, Service-berry, Ground Ivy,
Gold-thread, Spring-beauty, Marsh Marigold, Blue Cohosh (Caul-
ophyllon thalictroides), Hobble-bush. Trees just leaved out:
White Birch, Amelanchier, Poplars, Red Maple, Lilac, Mountain
Ash, Red and Black Cherry. Buds just breaking: Horse Chest-
nut, Black Ash.

May J4. First Red Cherry blossoms, Gray Birch (Betula populifolia) just com-
ing into leaf, Red Oak, Linden, (Tilia Americana), Elm, Sumach
(Rhus byphina) bursting their buds.

Ill BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

ARTICLE IV

THE BUTTERFLIES OF NEW BRUNSWICK.

By William MclNTOSH.

(Read December 6th, 1898.)

This list of New Brunswick Butterflies can only be considered a
preliminary one, as very little collecting has been done in this
province. There can be no doubt that with a more extended knowledge
of the insect life of New Brunswick this list will be found incomplete.

In the past collections have been made by officers of the ai my and
navy, but we have no detailed record of their captures. Among the
early collectors whose specimens have remained in the province the
following are perhaps worthy of mention.

A collection of Lepidoptera captured on the Ketchum estate,
Fredericton, by Capt. Moody, A. D. C. to Governor Gordon. This
collection is in the University of New Brunswick at Fredericton.

A collection of miscellaneous insects taken in the vicinity of St.
John, by Mrs. C. E. Heustis. Mrs. Heustis was for a number of
years a contributor to the Canadian Entomologist, and may be con-
sidered the pioneer entomologist of the Natural History Society of
New Brunswick.

A collection of miscellaneous insects captured in St. John County,
by Mr. H. E. Goold. This collection contains a number of very
interesting species.

A number of insects, principally Coleoptera and Lepidoptera, col-
lected in Kings County, N. B., by Mr. Gibson Williamson, of Oak
Point.

These three collections are in the museum of the Natural History
Society of New Brunswick. At the present time these combined col-
lections contain less than a thousand specimens, and so represent but
a fraction of the species indigenous to this section of Eastern Canada.

During the past two years much interest has been evinced in this
branch of nature study, and during the present year a number of col
lectors have been working, o\cr 3,500 specimens having been taken

THE BUTTERFLIES OF NEW BRUNSWICK. 115

in the vicinity of St. John and Fredericton during the past season.
It is to be hoped that this interest will continue, so that in the
near future something may be added to the meagre knowledge of the
insect life of New Brunswick.

The remarks on the species in this list are based mainly on the
writer's personal observations during the p;ist three years.

No doubt upon more extended research not only will many addi-
tional species become known, but a number of those considered not
common will be found to be more abundant in other localities.

In the preparation of this list I am indebted to Dr. James Fletcher
for the identification of doubtful species, and to Miss Edith Darling
for a list of species found at Sussex, and to Mr. Geo. W. Bailey for a
list of Fredericton butterflies with notes, and also for procuring a list
of species taken by Mr. R. McL. Van wart. Mr. Bailey also sent me
a catalogue of Capt. Moody's collection. From the above lists all
references to Sussex and Fredericton species have been taken.

I have followed Rev. C. J. S. Bethune ("The Butterflies of the
Eastern Provinces of Canada") in adding in brackets "Mr. Scudder's
name for the species whenever it differs from the name employed."

LEPIDOPTERA.
RHOPALOCERA

Family NYMPH ALID.E.

Sub-family EUPLOEIN^E.

Damns arcliippus, Fabr.

(ANOSIA PLEXIPPUS.j

This beautiful butterfly is usually rare in the vicinity of St. John and
Fredericton, but it is occasionally seen in considerable numbers. Flies in July
and August.

Argyiinis idalia, Drury.

Very rare, only four specimens are known to have been taken in New
Brunswick. Two of these, captured by H. E. Goold, are at present in the
collection of the Natural History Society.

Argymiis cybele, Fabr.

This species is rare in the southern sections of the Province, and probably
not abundant in any part of New Brunswick.

116 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

Argyimis aphrodite, Fain.

This butterfly is common throughout the Province. It is frequently mis-
taken for A. cybele which it very much resembles, but may be separated from
that species by its smaller size. Flies in July and August.

Argyimis atlantis, Edw.

Common at St. John, Fredericton, Sussex, Belleisle, Moncton and Chip-
man. This butterfly is more abundant than A. aphrodite, frequenting the
same localities and flying in company with that species.

Argyimis myrina, Cram.

(Bkenthis myrina.)

Abundant' throughout New Brunswick. This is our most common Argyn-
nis, flying from the latter part of June to the last of August.

Argyimis bellona, Fabr.

(Bkenthis bellona.)

This species is rare in St. John County, and does not appear to be numer-
ous in any part of New Brunswick.

Melitsea pbsetoii, Drury.

(EuPHYDRYAS PHiETON.)

Rare; a few specimens have been captured near St. John. On June 18th

of the present year, Mr. Geo. W. Bailey captured a specimen at Springhill,

York County.

Melita'a harrisii, Scud.

(ClNCIJDIA HARRISII.)

A specimen of this species was taken near St. John by Philip J. R. Mcintosh
during the summer of 1897. Rev. C. J. S. Bethune (The Butterflies of the
Eastern Provinces of Canada) gives New Brunswick as a locality for this rare
< ianadian butterfly.

Fliyciocles tharos, Drury.

Abundant from early in July to September. The form makcia, Edw.
being taken in the earlier pari of the season, and the form morpheus, Fabr.
Later. It is found in open meadows and fields dining June, duly and August.

Grapta interrogationis, Fabr.

(Polycom a [NTERROG VTIOK l--. I

Forms umbrosa, Lint, morpheus, Fabr.

Rare in the vicinityof St. John, and probablj not common in any part of
New BrunsM ick.

THE BUTTERFLIES OF NEW BRUNSWICK. 117

Grapta comma, Harm.

(POLYGONIA COMMA.)

Forms DRYAS, Edw. harrisii, Edw.

This butterfly is not uncommon at St. John and Fredericton. Also
reported as occurring at Dalhousie, by Rev. C. J. S. Bethune (The Butterflies
of the Eastern Provinces of Canada.)

Grapta faunas, Edw.

(POLYGONIA FAUNUS.)

This species is not so abundant as G. comma in this locality, and is
reported as not common at Fredericton and Sussex.

Grapta profile, Cram.

(POLYGONIA PROGNE.)

Common throughout the Province, flying from May to October.
Grapta gracilis, Grote and Rob.

(POLYGONIA GRACILIS. )

Evidently rare. Mr. R. McL. Vanwart reports this butterfly from Fred-
ericton. If the specimens have been correctly identified it will be an interesting
addition to our New Brunswick list.

Grapta j-album, Boisd, Lee.

(EUGONIA J-ALBUM.)

This species does not appear to be common in the southern section of the
Province, only two or three specimens have been taken in St. John County
during the past three years.

Vanessa antiopa, Linn.

(EtTVANESSA ANTIOPA.)

Abundant throughout the Province. Flying from April to October, but
most plentiful during the latter part of August.

Vanessa milberti, Godt.

(Aglais milberti.)

This species is not common in St. John County, but it is apparently more
numerous in the interior of the Province.

118 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

Pyrameis atalauta, Linn.

i Vanessa atalanta.)

Common at St. John, Fredericton and Sussex, and probably abundant
throughout the entire Province. Flies, from June to the latter part of Sep-
tember. This species was unusually numerous from the 16th to the 25th of
June of the present year.

Pyrameis cardni, Linn.

(Vanessa cardtti. )

This butterfly is usually abundant, but during the past three years has
been rare in this neighborhood, although quite abundant twenty miles inland.
Flies during June, July and August.

Pyrameis huntera, Fabr.

(Vanessa huntera.)

This species is occasionally abundant, and is generally found flying with
P. cardui.

Limeuitis artbemis, Drury.

(Basilakchta arthemis. )

Not uncommon at St. John, Rothesay, Hampton, Belleisle, Fredericton,
and probably throughout the entire province. Flying from June to the latter
part of August.

Limenitis clisippus. Godt.

(Basilarchia archippus. )

This interesting species is not very common. Specimens have been taken
at St. John, Fredericton, Belleisle and Grand Lake. Flies in June, July and
August.

Sub-family SATYRIN^E.
Neonymplia caiitlms, Boisd Lee.
(SATYRODES EURYDICE, Linn.)
NeoNYMPHA BOISDUVALLII, Harris.

This butterfly is not uncommon on the Belleisle and at Fredericton and
Sackville.

Satyrus nephele, Kirby.

BCYON is MEPHBLE.)

EREBIA NEPHELE.

Abundanl throughout the province. Flying in July and August. Fre-
quenting swampj meadows and fields bordered by woods.

THE BUTTERFLIES OF NEW BRUNSWICK. 119

Satyrus alope, Fain
(Cercyonis alope.)

HlPPARCHIA ALOPE.

This species is reported from Fredericton, but appears to be rare in the
northern sections of the province. It is very common in the vicinity of St.
John. Frequenting the same localities and flying in company with S. nephele.

Satyrus alope nephele, Scud.

This butterfly, apparently a hybrid between alope and nephele, is some-
times taken at St. John.

Family LYC^ENID.E.
Sub-family LYC^NIN^E.
Thecla augustus, Kirby.

(IXCISALIA AUGUSTUS.)

Not uncommon, but difficult to capture, owing to its small size, dark
color, and the shrubby localities which it frequents. Flies in May.

Chrysophaiius epixantlie, Boisd Lee.

(Epidemia epixanthe.)

This little butterfly is not uncommon in two or three localities near St.
John, but it appears to be very local in its habits, frequenting the same places
(sometimes only a few yards in extent) year after year. Flies in Jul}' and
possibly into August.

Chrysoplianus hypophla?as, Boisd.

Chrysophanus amekicaxa, D'Urban.

(Heodes hypophlaeas.)

Common at St. John, Fredericton, Sussex and Grand Lake, from June to
September. This species is no doubt abundant in every part of New
Brunswick.

Lycpena pseudargiolus, Boisd Lee.

(Cyaniris PSEUDARGIOLUS. )

This butterfly is very common throughout the province. The forms vio-
lacea, Edw., being very abundant in May and June, and the form xeglecta,
Edw. , less common, in June, July and August.

120 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

Family PAPILIONIDAE.

Sub-family PIERIN^.

Pieris napi, Esper.

(Pieris oleracea, Harris. )

A number of specimens have been taken at St. John, Fredericton, and on
the Belleisle, but this species is no doubt uncommon throughout the province.

Pieris rapte, Linn.

This species is an importation from Europe, and is our most common
butterfly in New Brunswick. Flying from May to October.

Colias philodice, Godt.

(EURYMUS PHILODICE.)

Very common throughout the province. Flying from May to September,
and during the present year as late as October 23rd.

Colias interior, Scud.

(EURYMUS INTERIOR.)

Usually not very common, but during the present year this species was
unusually abundant, being much more numerous than C. philodice. Flying
from July 9th to late in August.

Sub-family PAPILIONIN^.

Papilio turnus, Linn.

(Jasoniades GLAUcrs, Scud.)

This species is common in every part of New Brunswick, and occasionally
very numerous. Flying in June and July.

Papilio cresphontes, Cram.

Papilio thoas, Boisd.

(HeraCLIDKS CRESPHONTES.)

Rev. C. J. S. Bethune, in his list of the " Butterflies of the Eastern Prov-
inces of ( lanada," gives St. John, N. B., as a locality for this species. None of
our local collectors have mel with it. It is a southern insect and no doubt
rarely occurs in this province.

Papilio brevicauda, Saunders.

At present we have do local record of the capture of this species, but
Rev. C. J. S. Bethune, in his list of the " Butterflies of the Eastern Provinces
of Canada," mentions it as having heen taken in Dalhousie, N. B. When the
insects of the northern sections of New Brunswick become better known, this
butterfly will no doubt be found among them.

THE BUTTERFLIES OF NEW BRUNSWICK. 121

Papilio asterias, Fain-.

(Papilio polyxenes. )
This species is usually abundant, but during the past two years it has been
very rare in the vicinity of St. John. Not uncommon on the Belleisle and at
Fredericton.

Family HESPERID^E.
Carterocephalus mantlan, Edw.
This species is not uncommon in two or three localities near St. John, but
it appears to be extremely local in its habits frequenting wood roads and open
grassy places in woods. Flies in June and July.

Pamphila zabulon, Bbisd-Lec.

(Atrytone zabulon. )
The form hobomok, Harris, is common throughout the Province, flying in
June and July.

Pampliila leonardus, Harris.

(Anthomaster leonardus.)
This species is rare in this vicinity, only two specimens having been taken,
and at present it is not reported from any other locality in New Brunswick.

Pamphila peckius, Kirby.

(POLITES PECKIUS.)

Pamphila wamsutta, Harris.
The most common Pamphila in this locality, frequenting meadows and
oat fields, found in every part of New Brunswick, flying in June and July.

Pamphila mystic, Scud.

(Thymelicus MYSTIC. '
This species is found in the same localities as the preceding, but it is not
nearly so abundant. Flies in July and August.

Pampliila cernes, Boisd-Lec.

(Limoghores taumas, Fabr. )
Pamphila ahaton, Harris.
Common at St. John, Fredericton, Hampton, and also abundant in
Victoria County. Flies in June and July.

Nisiouades brizo, Boisd-Lec.
(Than os brizo.)
Rare in the vicinity of St. John, only two specimens having been taken.

Nisiouades icelus, Lint.

(Thanaos icelus.)
Taken at St. John and Fredericton. This species is quite abundant in
the vicinity of St. John, frequenting wood roads and pathways bordered by
low shrubbery.

122 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

ARTICLE V

NOTES ON" THE NATURAL HISTORY AND PHYSI-
OGRAPHY OF NEW BRUNSWICK.

By W. F. Ganong, Ph. D.

14. — On the Lack and Cost of a Topographical Survey of
New Brunswick.

(Read October 4th, 1898.)

It is of course known to the members of this Society that no
unified topographical survey of New Brunswick has ever been made,
and no complete topographical map of the province exists. The entire
coast line has been surveyed by the British Admiralty which has
employed triangulation checked by frequent observations for latitude
and longitude, and the results are contained on the well-known
admiralty charts. The United States coast survey has made some
triangulation about Passamaquoddy Bay, and its results may be found
in their charts and reports. In 1841-1843 Captain W. F. W. Owen
made a fine traverse and triangulation of the St. John from its mouth
to Springhill, but his excellent contour maps were never published,
though there is a copy of them in the Crown Land Office at Frederic-
ton. Aside from these, there has been no proper topographical sur-
veying in New Brunswick, though some determinations of latitude
and longitude have been made. Our latest maps, of course, embody
all these data ; but for the rest of the Province, they are made up uf
pieced-together surveys of the most diverse age scale and authoritj7,
and hence the best of them are incomplete and inaccurate in many
places. Passing from horizontal to vertical topography, the data for
the latter are so scanty that our best maps make scarcely an attempt
to represent it at all, and show but an occasional haohure star for
some very marked height, or, as in the Surface Geology maps by
Mr. Chalmers, a limited use of hachures for local elevations. It is
true the hachure system has been used on several maps t<> show special

NOTES OX THE NATURAL HISTORY AND PHYSIOGRAPHY OF N. B. 123

ranges of highlands, etc., as on Baillie & Kendall's map of 1832.
Featherstonhaugh & Mudge's of 1839 (followed on Saunders of 1842),
but in these the data were most scanty and the results very erroneous.
The hachure topography of the coast line of the admiralty charts is of
course accurate, but is too narrow a strip to be of much service. At.
the present time the best maps elsewhere represent vertical topography
by contour lines ; for New Brunswick absolutely the only published
maps using contour lines are the following : first, a very crude folder
issued by a steamboat company showing the St. John below Frederic-
ton, with neighboring heights, taken from Captain Owen's maps
already referred to ; second, some of the surface geology maps, which
show a 200 or 220 feet contour line ; third, the United States coast
survey chart, No. 300, which shows a detailed and accurate survey
with contour lines of a strip of our coast from the Waweig to above
St. Stephen, the peninsula below the Ledge being thus the most com-
pletely and accurately mapped part of New Brunswick. A proper
contour as well as an accurate outline map of the province can be
based only upon a unified topographical survey.*

Naturally questions of first interest in this connection are the
value and cost of such a survey. Two publications which give details
on this subject are the following : " The Mother Maps of the United
States," by Henry Gannett (in National Geographical Magazine, IV.,
101, 1892), and "Topographical Surveys, their Method and Value,"
by J. L. VanOrnum (in Bulletin of the University of Wisconsin,
Engineering Series, I., 331, 1896). From these works I gather the
following facts : Accurate maps representing to the eye the vertical as
well as the horizontal topography have these values — First for military
operations ; second, as a basis for property boundaries ; third, for
study of water powers, drainage, etc; fourth, for the building of rail-
roads, saving immense sums in preliminary surveys ; fifth for selecting
the best routes for highways ; sixth, for municipal improvements,
water supply, etc ; seventh, as a basis for geological and other special
maps. Most civilized countries possess such maps of their territory.
Some, but far from all of the United States possess them. The cost
of the surveys preliminary to these maps varies immensely with local
conditions, scale, accuracy, etc. One of the greatest and best in the

* If the reader is interested to see a splendid model of modern mapmaking. which is
at the same time an illustration of the remarkable liberality of the United States govern-
ment to education, he should examine " Physiographic Types," by Henry Gannett, in
" Topographic Atlas of the United States'" It may be obtained for 25 cents from the
Director of the United States Geological Surrey, Washington, D, C.

124 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

world, the Ordnance Survey of the British Isles, cost about 8200 per
square mile, though many special areas cost far more. Such a survey
of New Brunswick, with its area of 27,000 square miles, would cost
$5,400,000. Of more practical interest is the cost in one of the
American States. That of Massachusetts, with its excellent contour
maps, cost $13 per square mile, which for New Brunswick would
amount to $351,000, but it would really be more than this because of
the unsettled state of the country and the more scanty data to start
with, and would probably l'each $500,000. If a survey of the Prov-
ince were made according to the recommendations of the topographical
commission which met at Washington in 1892, on a scale of one to
thirty thousand (half a mile to one inch), with contour intervals of
20 feet, it would cost at least $25 per square mile, or in all $675,000.
It is plain that we must wait long for a complete topographical map
of New Brunswick.

15. — Upon Natural Pavements and Their Possible Misinterpre-
tation in Arch.eolo<;y.

(Read November 1st, 1898.)
On the Nepisiguit Biver, just above the Narrows, on the left bank,
the beach is formed of flat stones fitted together so regularly and set
so nearly upon the same level as to suggest an artificial pavement.
Indeed many a city of western Europe has pavements less perfect.
The beach slopes gently towards the water and is underlaid by soft
clay full of small springs. The stones are water-worn boulders of
diverse composition, size and shape, but all have flat or nearly flat
surfaces uppermost, and there are no considerable gaps between them.
I think I have seen such pavements elsewhere, though never before
such regular ones, but probably they are well enough known to stu-
dents of surface geology. Any artificial agency in their production in
this wilderness is out of the question, and they are probably formed
by the action of the ice in the spring, which, grinding along the shore,
would tend to press the boulders into the soft and yielding beach and
to work and turn projecting angles about until a Hat surface comes
uppermost. If the river's course were to become changed, so that the
pavement were no longer on a beach it would be a most puzzling
structure and almost certain to be referred to an artificial origin.
References to pavements occur not infrequently in local archa-ologica'

NOTES ON THE NATURAL HISTORY AND PHYSIOGRAPHY OF N. B. 125

writings, and are sometimes taken to indicate the existence of early-
settlements. From the above it would seem possible that such pave-
ments may sometimes be of purely natural origin, especially when on
river banks and underlaid by yielding bottoms.

10. — On Attempts at Oyster Culture in Passamaquoddy Bay.

(Read November 1st, 1898.)

The distribution of the oyster in New Brunswick waters is peculiar.
Along with several other distinctively southern molluscs, it is found
abundantly upon our north coast, but not at all upon our southern
shore, which is occupied entirely by sub-arctic forms. The causes of
this seemingly anomalous condition are in the main well known, and
are discussed fully in a paper in the Transactions of the Royal Society
of Canada, vol. viii., section iv., page 167, and by Upham in American
Journal of Science, third series, vol. xliii., page 203. The evidence
seems to show that the oyster did once live all along the coast from
the Gulf of St. Lawrence to south of Cape Cod, and hence also in the
Bay of Fundy, but that it has been exterminated in the latter by the
entrance of cold currents allowed by geological changes of the coast
line. Hence upon theoretical grounds, any attempts to artificially
grow oysters in Bay of Fundy waters may be expected to fail. I have
been told that many years ago live oysters were placed in Oak Bay, a
branch of Passamaquoddy Bay, but they did not live. Possibly,
however, it was in this way the southern starfish Asterias Forbesii,
was introduced into the Bay (noted in the Bulletin of this Society,
No. IX., page 54), though it may be a relic of the former southern
colony. In the fall of 1896, Mr. G. W. Ganong, M. P., placed in one
or two fathoms of water on a good beach, near his cottage on the
south side of Oak Bay, some seven or eight barrels of dead oyster
shells and two barrels of live oysters from the Gulf of St. Lawrence*
In 1897 some of the oysters were washed ashore attached to kelp, and
were still alive, showing they had survived the winter. In 1898,
however, none of those thus washed ashore were alive, though the
attachment of the two valves to one another, and the fresh condition
of the hinge, showed that some of the shells were those of oysters
placed in the water alive. In September, I dredged several times
over the place, but brought up only dead shells, though some of them

1 26 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

obviously belonged, by the test just mentioned, to those placed alive
in the water. Neither the dead shells nor the seaweed showed the
least trace of any young.

There seems to me no likelihood that oyster planting would succeed
in this bay. Not only is the summer temperature too low for breed-
ing, but huge starfishes, the oyster's worst enemies, are very abundant,
and the wash of the heavy tides must at times cover the living mol-
luscs with silt very deleterious to their growth

It is to be hoped that the presence of these shells in Oak Bay will
not be taken by some future naturalist as evidence of recent natural
occurrence of oysters in the bay ; and it is partly to prevent such an
error that the present note is placed on record. There is a tradition
that oyster shells were once found in an old Indian shell-heap at Oak
Point, between this bay and the St. Croix river, but I think this very
doubtful. The statement by A. Leith Adams in his " Field and
Forest Rambles" (page 35) that quahog and oyster shells are abund-
ant in shell-heaps in this region, is, of course, altogether an error.

17. — On the Nature of the Mud in Our Many "Mud Lakes."

[Read December 6th, 1898.]
The best maps of New Brunswick show a branch of the lowermost
Nepisiguit Lake running as a cul-de-sac half a mile or more to the
southward. Last summer I went into this branch in a canoe, and
found it nowhere more than a few inches deep, while in many places
the bottom came above the surface. This bottom consisted every-
where of soft, grayish, nocculent mud, from which, as the canoe was
forced with difficulty through it, arose in large babbles an abundance
of a gas smelling like hydrogen sulphide. A pole thrust several feet
into it touched no hard bottom except near the shore, and the mud
brought up by it from depths greater than a foot or two was of a red-
dish rather than a grayish color. I collected abundant samples, and a
microscopic examination has shown that it consists almost entirely of
minute Plants, Desmids, Diatoms and other unicellular and filament
mis Algae, alive on the surface grayish layer and dead in the dtvpcr
reddish layers. The members of the Society will recognize these forms
as among the most varied and beautiful in form and sculpturing of all
living organisms. This mud then is all alive on the surface, and grows
where it is found, thus filling up the lake ; as the individuals die,

NOTES ON THE NATURAL HISTORY AND PHYSIOGRAPHY OF N. B. 127

their siliceous shells gradually sink and become compacted, thus form-
ing the valuable siliceous deposits (infusorial earth) often dredged
from lakes fur economic use under the name of "Fossil Flour." It is
thus no doubt the great beds of diatomaceous earth were formed in
past geological periods.

Another lake of this kind appears to be the Fifth Green River
Lake, which according to J. W. Bailey (" The Saint John River,"
page 53) is " very shallow with a soft bottom of white mud, which the
men call ' paint,' from its quality of sticking to the canoe-poles, like
white lead." Of course there are plenty of others, and the question
at once arises, whether the brown mud which gives the name " Mud
Lake " to dozens of small shallow lakes in Maine and New Brunswick
may not be of essentially the same nature, the different color resulting
from admixture of peaty matters or other impurities. In any case it
is a problem to determine what favors the growth of these organisms
in some lakes and not others, and why they are so much purer in
some than in others. Here is a good place for the student of the
freshwater Algae of New Brunswick to begin his labors upon the most
attractive group of Plants yet unstudied in our Flora.

To the unaided vision, nothing could be more unattractive than
the muddy bottoms of these lakes ; but with the microscope to aid,
they become replete with a beauty of form hardly to be matched else-
where in Nature.

18. — Preliminary Outline of a Plan for a study of the Precise

Factors determining the Features of New Brunswick

Vegetation.

[Read December 6th, 1898.]
The most marked tendency of botanical investigation at the pres-
ent day is towards the elucidation of the dynamical factors determining-
structure and distribution in Plants. In the study of local Floras, it
is taking the form of an attempt to find out the exact factors which
place each plant where it is, and make it the size, form, color and
texture it is, a discipline known as Ecological Plant-geography.
Though a new study, many valuable contributions to it have already
appeared in Europe and this country, and a great extension of the

128

BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY,

bounds of knowledge in this direction may confidently be looked for
in the near future. Much of this rapid progress is due to the stimulus
given by the appearance of Warming's great work on this subject, a
work likely to be viewed in the future as one of the classics of
Botanical Science.* To the members of this Society, eager for the
advancement of Science and scientific education in New Brunswick,
this new phase of Botany must be of especial interest, and some
formulation of it for this province will therefore be acceptable.

A complete treatment of the Ecological Plant-geography of New
Brunswick will involve three parts, as follows :

Tart. I. THE ELEMENTS COMPOSING THE NEW BRUNSWICK
FLORA — An account of the species actually occurring in tin-
Province and their habits here ; a systematic list of all the
species, with the situations they occupy, and the variations in
their structure in the different situations. So far as concerns the
listing of the species, much work has already been done by our
local botanists, but the study of the other phases has hardly been
attempted. The great difficulty in this study of habits is the
lack of accessible guides in which its principles are distinctly
formulated.

Part II. THE GEOGRAPHIC ORIGIN OF THE ELEMENTS OF THE
NEW BRUNSWICK FLORA—

A. Present provincial and world distribution of the species.

B. Past History and Changes now in progression, including

occurrence of Colonies, and Migrations.

This part is capable of, and needs, thorough statistical study.
upon which suggestions will later be offered. It has alt tad \
received some investigation by Dr. Matthew , Professor Fowler
and others.

Part III. THE ECOLOGICAL COMPOSITION OF THE NEW BRUNS-
WICK FLORA — The vegetation of no very large region is homo-
geneous as to its adaptations, but segregates itself into (iron p.*
including plants, most diverse in their systematic relationships,
brought together by their common adaptations to a particular
si -1 of external conditions. These groups as they occur in New
Brunswick may tentatively be classified as follows.

* The original is in Danish, liut tin; German translation is most used. It is entitled
"Lehrbuch der Oekologisuhen l'llanzengeographie," Berlin, 1896. An English translation
is said to be in preparation.

NOTES ON THE NATURAL HISTORY AND PHYSIOGRAPHY OF N. B.

129

A Preliminary Ecologic-geographic Classification of the Vegetation of

Neiv Brunswick.

(Primary Divisions in part after Warming.)

Section 1. Groups in adaptation to other organisms — Includes Climbers,
Epiphytes, Saprophytes, Parasites, Symbionts, Insectivora
Myrmecophila, etc. All of these groups are of minor import-
ance in our vegetation.

Section 2. Groups in adaptation to external physical conditions.

I. Xerophytes [Desert- Plants) — Typical forms

entirely wanting in our Flora ; repre-
sented only by xerophytic characters in
species living where transpiration nor-
mally exceeds supply, either because
water drains off quickly or for other
reasons is available in but small quan-
tity.

II. Halophytes (Strand Plants) — But a few

herbaceous species in our Flora ; some
inland colonies.

III.

IV

Hydrophytes ( Water-plants) — Very well
developed in our Flora.

Mesophytes {Normal Plants) — Comprises
the great bulk of the vegetation of this
section of America.

1. Original Vegetation.

2. Effects of Cultivation.

A. Rocky hills, etc.

B. Sea-cliffs.

C. Sand-dunes.

D. Dry Barrens.

[See also some features in L.]

E. <; ravel and Sand Beaches.

F. Salt Marshes.

[See also T.J

H. Algae

•{'

G. Plankton.

a Marine.

b Fresh water.
I. Immersed Phanerogams.
J. Stream and Lake margin.
K. Fresh water marshes.

a Flat

L. Sphagnum Bogs,

b Raised

M. Coniferous Forest.

N. Deciduous Forest.

0. Mixed Forest.

P. Intervales.

Q. Flood-bank and Bar.

[See also J.]
R. Swamps.
S. Common Crops.
T. Reclaimed Salt marshes.
U. Abandoned Lands.
V. Burnt Lands.
W. Roadsides and Dooryards.

130 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

The only one of these groups which has yet received study of this
kind in New Brunswick is, L.b Raised Peat- Bogs, on which there is a
memoir, far from adequate, in the latest volume of the Transactions of
the Royal Society of Canada. I have done some work upon F and T,
which I hope soon to bring to completion. But this is not a task for
one student, but for many.

19. — On a Current Error as to the Location of (Nictor)
Bald Mountain, Tobique.

[Read January 3rd, 1899.]

In discussions upon the still unsettled question of the location of
the highest land in New Brunswick, Bald Mountain near Nictor Lake
is often mentioned. Yet curiously enough most visitors to Nictor Lake
have identified the wrong mountain as Bald Mountain, and our two
best maps of the Province, Loggie's and the Geological Survey, air
also in error on this point. Rising abruptly from the shore of Nictor
Lake is a splendid mountain, or rather, ridge, densely wooded to and
over the top. This mountain was named in 1863 by Governor Gordon,
Mount Sagamook, Maliseet for "Mount of Chiefs," ("Wilderness
Journeys," 54). Professor Bailey in the same year climbed it and
considered it Bald Mountain (Canadian Naturalist, April, 1864), and
speaks of the error of the maps in placing it away from the shore of
the lake. Chalmers also (Geological Report, 1885, GG, 1 1 ) considered
Sagamook and Bald Mountain as identical, and the Geological Map
names Sagamook " Bald or Sagamook Mountain." By all of these
writers, and others, Sagamook has been considered the highest land in
that vicinity, if not in New Brunswick. Yet Sagamook is not the
same as Bald Mountain, nor is it the highest land in the vicinity.
The real Bald Mountain, whose position is correctly shown on Wilkin-
son's map of 1859, is about three miles to the south-west of Sagamook,
markedly higher, and has a perfectly bald conical top. Tt is this
mountain which can be seen from far down the Nepisiguit, and which
from the upper stretches of that river and from the Nepisiguit Lakes
shows a bare top crowned by a wart-like projection. The reason for
the failure of different explorers to see it seems plain. Sagamook is
the mountain naturally climbed by all visitors, but its top is so densely
wooded a view cannot be obtained from it, but only from some bare
I m I--.-S of rock near the summit on the northern side, and it is only

NOTES ON THE NATURAL HISTORY AND PHYSIOGRAPHY OF N. B. 131

from one of the most westerly, smaller, and probably least visited of
these, that Bald Mountain can be seen. Otherwise one can see it only
by climbing a tree on the southern edge of the summit of Sagamook,
and it was from this position Bald Mountain rose before my astonished
eyes, distinctly higher than Sagamook, on a fair day last August. If
Mr. Chalmers' height of 2,537 feet, given to Sagamook, proves correct,
then Bald Mountain may well be the highest land in New Brunswick.

20. — Upon Biological Opportunity in New Brunswick.

[Read January 3rd, 1899.]

Specialization in biological investigation is rapidly reaching such a
point that in some lines, such as anatomy, morphology, physiology,
embryology, it is becoming impossible to make discoveries away from
the great centres in which extensive libraries, abundant appliances and
considerable leisure are available. While therefore the local student
is cut off from making contributions to knowledge in those lines, there
are nevertheless other directions in which large possibilities for useful-
ness are open to him, namely in the study of Occurrences, Distribution,
Habits and Adaptations to External Conditions of the organisms in-
habiting his district. In such study the local student is liable at
present to little interference from the specialists, for the latter are
largely engrossed in laboratory problems.

Local Natural History is studied most of all by teachers, and next
to them, by men of other professions and of business, who make of it
a recreation or a hobby. If it were more widely realized what great
and pure pleasure may be derived from the outdoor study of Nature,
and how great an advantage it is to have some healthful engrossing
subject to which one can turn for relief from the too pressing cares of
life, the ranks of local naturalists would be overflowing. One must
however possess the right temperament, — a love of outdoors, a fair
measure of the collecting instinct, and a liking for one's own society,
and one should begin young, and command some leisure. But for
such persons there is no part of New Brunswick that does not offer
ample scope for Natural History study with assurance of much per-
sonal profit and possibility of making some contribution to Science as
well. But he who would enter upon such pursuits should not cover
too wide a field, but, selecting that phase which most interests him,
should devote himself to that. He should make careful collections for

132 RULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

himself, for his local Natural History Society, with which he should
keep in close touch, and for specialists to whom -he must turn for ad-
vice in all difficulties. He should gather books and papers relating to
his subject, enter into correspondence with other students of it
and publish accounts of his discoveries. Naturally he will explore
first the region nearest about his home, then later in his holi-
days extend his journeys to other parts of the county or province he
tries to cover. Thus gradually will he rise in his specialty until he
comes to feel the joy of accomplishment, the charm of authority, and
the satisfaction of having done something whose value is permanent.

The first and most important problem of local Natural History is
that of occurrences — exactly what species occur within the given area
and in what abundance. In New Brunswick, study of this kind has
been made for the few groups that will be mentioned below. Its re-
sults are expressed in lists whose value is in direct proportion to their
accuracy, which should be secured by asking the advice of specialists
upon all doubtful points. Such lists are the very foundation of local
Natural History study.

Second of local problems is that of geographical distribution, the
precise range of species, not only in this Province, but also in relation
to their distribution generally. Involved with this is the occurrence
of colonies and the position of the lines of migration of species into the
Province, and the proportion of the species that are derived from dif-
ferent directions, etc. Practically this could, I think, be best worked
out by aid of simple small outline maps of the Province and of the
World, on which the range of species could be shown in color, and
new facts added as gained. I have no doubt that these maps, appeal-
ing to the eye, would suggest facts, principles, and clues for further
study that the mere printing of localities in lists or tables would not.
No such study of distribution has yet been made for any group of
animals or plants in New Brunswick.

Third of local problems is that of habits of Animals and Plants.
Surprisingly little is known accurately of the habits of organisms in a
state of nature, and accurate records of fact in this line are most
valuable.

Fourth of local problems is adaptation of organisms to external
conditions, how their forms and sizes and colors are related to their
habits and bO outside influences, and especially how all these vary with
the external conditions. It is true this division of local study is at
present very difficult because of the lack of good books which can be

NOTES ON THE NATURAL HISTORY AND PHYSIOGRAPHY OF N. B. 133

used as guides, books showing what facts are already known and what
principles may best be used in further study. Such books are the
great need of local Natural History study to-day, and they will prove
as great a stimulus to it when supplied, as Gray's Manual, for ex-
ample, has been to the study of classification of the flowering plants.

To these problems may be added another of no small importance,
the local and aboriginal names and uses and folk-lore of plants and
animals, and other historic associations, including their relation to the
early settlement or progress of the country.

The groups of New Brunswick Animals and Plants, with the work
already done in listing them, is as follows. In cases where there is
more than one list, only the later is cited.

Plants.

Flowering Plants. Fully listed for Occurrences in Fowler's List in Bulletin IV,
with many additions in later Bulletins. Distribution, Habits and
Adaptations yet to be studied.

F( rns, Lycopods and Equisetums. Listed with the Flowering Plants.

Mosses. Partly listed by Fowler Rep. Secretary of Agriculture of N. B. ,
1878), and in Moser's List in Bulletin XVI.

Livt rworts. Preliminary List (very incomplete) by Fowler in 1878.

Lichens. Preliminary List (very incomplete) by Fowler in 1878.

Fungi. Preliminary List (ver}' incomplete) by Fowler in 1878.

Algae. Marine : List by Hay in Trans. Royal Soc. Canada, 1887.
Fresh-water • Not at all studied ; a most attractive group.

Animals.

Mam nml in. List by Chamberlain in Bulletins III and X.

Birds. List by Chamberlain in Bulletin I.

Reptilia. No published list.

Amphibia. List by Cox in Bulletin XVI.

Fishes. List by Cox in Bulletin XIII.

Insects. List of Butterflies in this Bulletin ; others to follow.

( 'rustacea. No published lists.

Worms. No published lists.

MoUusca. Marine : List by Ganong in Bulletin VI.

Land and Fresh- water : No published lists.
Echinodermata. Attempt at a Natural History of this group by Ganong in

Bulletin VII.
Coelenttrata. No published lists.
Protozoa. No published lists.

From the above it will appear that even preliminary lists have
been made of but a part of our groups, and that hardly any study at
all has been made of Distribution, Habits, or Adaptations. Here is
scope enough for many students for a long time to come.

134 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

The logical end of all local studies in Natural History is the pre-
paration of a complete Natural History of the Province. The char-
acteristics of such a work I have elsewhere tried to sketch (in
Educational Review, v, 141).

21. — Bibliography of the Freshwater Pearl Fishery in
New Brunswick.

(Read February 7th, 1899.)

Pearls of considerable, and often great, value are occasionally found
in the freshwater clams or mussels occurring abundantly in the brooks
and rivers of North America, and there are periodical revivals of interest
in the search for them. The latest Bulletin of the United States Fish
Commission (Vol. XV IT) contains a most valuable article upon this
subject by George F. Kunz, entitled " The Freshwater Pearls and
Pearl Fisheries of the United States," and to this the future pearl
fisher will do well to turn. The work contains, however, but a single
reference (on page 395) to New Brunswick. Additional data for this
province are to be found in this Society's Bulletin, No. VIII, page 85,
and in the St John Sun for October 26, 1889, and for November 2,
1889. Of some interest, too, is an article "On the Pearl," by J.
Hunter Duvar, in Transactions of the Nova Scotian Institute, II, 86,
87, and a brief despatch probably exaggerated in the St. John Telegraph
for November 15, 1898.

22. — Wind — Effects on Vegetation on the Isthmus of Chignecto.

(Read February 7th, 1899.)
Every field botanist is familiar with the effects produced upon
plants by winds blowing much in one direction, but these phenomena
arc shown upon an unusually large scale and in extreme degree upon
the Isthmus of Chignecto. As one travels along the ridges in that
district, he observes the trees bent strongly to the northeast with
their branches trailing off in the same direction. This is of course
best seen in the most exposed places, but is also well marked in many
orchards; and where the wind has a clear sweep over a wide marsh, as
at Sunken Island, the effects are particularly plain. Three exam pies,
well marked though not extreme cases, are shown on the accompanying
cuts, which are exactly traced from photographs taken along the Fori
Cumberland Ridge between Point de Bute and Baie Verte. Of the
three a is a yellow birch, b is a spruce, and c a hackmatack.

NOTES ON THE NATURAL HISTORY AND PHYSIOGRAPHY OF N. B. 135

The cause producing these effects is perfectly obvious and agreed
upon by all residents, i. e., the great prevalence, particularly in summer,
of southwest winds. The Bay of Fundy acts as a sort of funnel

a b

converging at the Isthmus. It would be of great interest to compare
the aggregate prevalence of southwesterly winds and their velocity for
a summer on the Isthmus with the corresponding facts for other parts
of the province, but the data are not available, for there is no station
for wind measurement in this district.

I have not studied the subject minutely but the effects are plainly
of two and perhaps of three kinds. First, there is the mechanical
bending of the growing shoots giving them all a set in the northeast
direction. Second, there is diminished branch growth on the windward
side ; this is no doubt due to the greater transpiration upon that side,
for it is known that increased transpiration is accompanied by lessened
growth of the transpiring parts. With this is correlated, too, an
observable greater abundance of dead branches on the windward side.
Third, it is possible, though not probable, that branch-development
responds, to some extent, irritably to wind direction as a stimulus, in
which event we would have a phase of Rheotropism.

One naturally looks in such a case as this for wind effects on other
objects, but the only ones I have seen are occasional inclined telegraph
poles, which on the Eddy road almost all lean strongly to the northeast,
and the blowdowns in the burnt woods along the Ship Railway which
a,re almost invariably in the same direction. More minute observa-
tion may show effects on the small lakes of the marshes and even also
in some of the details of tidal movements.

136 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

PLATE III.

/-/

METADOXIDES MAGNIFICUS, n. sp.
Restoied — Reduced |.

A NEW CAMBRIAN TRILOBITE. 137

ARTICLE V

A NEW CAMBRIAN TRILOBITE.

By G. F. Matthew, M. A., D.Sc, LL.D.

(Read February 7th, 1899.)

ERRATA.

"Article V." — A New Cambrian Trilobite,
read, Article VI.

we proceed to describe under the name

Metadoxides magnifictjs, n. sp.,

a species of the Lower Cambrian beds in Newfoundland.

A large species with wide, semicircular head-shield, and long genal
spines. Middle piece of the head subquadrate. Front broadly arched ;
anterior marginal fold flat, and scarcely distinguished from the front
area of the cheeks (in the flattened tests) ; the two together in front,

* " Fauna Cambriana-Trilobiti,'1 Memoirs Geolog. Commis. Italy, vol. iii, pt. 2nd.

It would be more correct to say that Meneghini described two of the species of which
he had only the thoraces under Paradoxides, and the third under Olenus. Rornemano hav-
ing known heads and thoraces for all three, described them under his new genus.

t Die Versteinerungen des Cambrischen Schichtensystems der Insel Sardinien, von
Dr. Joh, Georg Bornemann. Halle, 1891.

136 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

PLATE III.

'//.

METADOXIDES MAGNIFTCUS, n. sp.
Restoied— lied need ~.

A NEW CAMBRIAN TRILOBITE. 137

ARTICLE V.

A NEW CAMBRIAN TRILOBITE.

By G. F. Matthew, M. A., D.Sc, LL.D.

(Read February 7th, 1899.)

During my. visit last summer to Newfoundland I had the good
fortune to discover a new link between the Cambrian of Europe and
that of America.

In 1888 Meneghini described some trilobites which had been dis-
covered in Sardinia under the genus Paradoxides,* but which are
different from the types of that genus as known in the north and west
of Europe. Subsequently, J. G. Bornemann redescribed these fossils
under a new generic name, Metadoxides.i Bornemann found a de-
cided difference between this genus and Paradoxides in the form of
the glabella ; this part of the head-shield in the latter genus is club-
shaped, whereas in Metadoxides it is conical. Now, as the glabella is
the most important part of the head-shield, and a part which exhibits
prospectively in the larval form, its shape in the adult, it is important in
generic classification, and it appears to me that Bornemann was quite
right in dividing off his genus from Paradoxides.

Regarding the forms with conical glabella as a separate genus —

METADOXIDES, Bornemann,

we proceed to describe under the name

Metadoxides magnificus, n. sp.,

a species of the Lower Cambrian beds in Newfoundland.

A large species with wide, semicircular head-shield, and long genal
spines. Middle piece of the head subquadrate. Front broadly arched ;.
anterior marginal fold fiat, and scarcely distinguished from the front
area of the cheeks (in the flattened tests) ; the two together in front,

* " Fauna Cambl•iana-Trilobiti,', Memoirs Geolog. Commis. Italy, vol. iii, pt. 2nd.

It would be more correct to say that Vleneghiui described two of the species of which
he had only the thoraces under Paradoxides, and the third under Olenus. Bornemano hav-
ing known heads and thoraces for all three, described them under his new genus.

t Die Versteinerungen des Cambrischen Schichtensystems der Insel Sardinien, von
Dr, Joh. Geo rg Bornemann Halle, 1891.

138 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

nearly half as wide as the glabella, both widen on each side of the
glabella, so that at the facial suture they are as wide as three
•quarters of the width of the glabella, the marginal fold being the
wider of the two. Glabella conical, bluntly pointed in the anterior
quarter. The glabella and occipital ring together are about as long
as half of the space between the facial sutures in front. The gla-
bella has three pairs of furrows plainly shown, and a fourth pair
faintly indicated. The furrows do not connect across ths axis. The
■occipital furrow and ring are not well preserved in the specimens
known, but the furrow appears to extend quite across the back of the
glabella. The fixed cheek is broad and fiat, with a strongly arched
eyelobe, about halfway between the side of the glabella and the edge
of the head-shield.

The movable cheek is wide and strongly arched in the anterior
part, becoming straighter behind. The area is about half of the width
of the marginal fold in front, but less than that at the eyelobe. The
posterior margin is sinuate, having a strong sinus near the genal
spine ; and the furrow and fold are broad and weak. The genal spine
is narrow, and more than twice as long as the movable cheek. The
facial suture along the eyelobe is somewhat shorter (?) than behind it,
and not quite so long as the anterior extension of the suture. This
goes forward from the eyes with a sigmoid curve, to the nearest part
of the anterior margin. The posterior extension of the suture is ob-
scure in all the specimens obtained, but a detached free cheek appears
to indicate that it was nearly direct to the posterior margin.

Only detached segments of the thorax are known; they have a nar-
row rachis and short pleura; the latter is traversed by a strong farrow,
which in some (the anterior) run along the centre of the pleura, but
in others begins towards the front side, and is more oblique; the pleura
are bluntly pointed.

In the restorationof the thorax given in Plate ///the anterior pleurae
arc longer than some examples would indicate, and the thorax wider:
the number of segments is not known, but it may be assumed that
they were numerous. In some pleune the ring has a tubercle or
fractured base of a spine, on the posterior edge; it is supposed that
there was a slender axial spine at the back edge of each thoracic
ring, as such spines are found on the joints of the pygidiura.

The pygidium is elongate semi-circular with a rather flat axis
extending two-thirds of its length; three joints are present in the axis,
•of which the middle one bears a slender spine at the back; an ap-

A NEW CAMBRIAN TRILOBITE. 139

pressed spine, which extends across the anterior joint, appears to
belong to the posterior joint of the thorax. The side lobes are con-
vex, and are of nearly equal width except at the back. The margin
is entire, except that it is notched behind at the axial line.

Fragments of the hypostome have been found, but are not suffi-
cient for description.

Sculpture. The surface of the marginal fold of the movable cheek
is marked by widely spread, anastomosing, raised lines; along the
front margin of the shield, close to the edge, a few of these lines
appear, but are closely crowded, both on the free cheek, and on the
middle piece of the head shield; along the genal spine the raised lines
run diagonally downward from the outer to the inner margin; along
the posterior border of the head shield there are crowded raised lines,,
as along the anterior border. On the doubleur the lines are crowded
and more distinct. The edges of the ring of the l-achis show similar
crowded wrinkles; on some pleura? there is a narrow band, or trans"
verse wrinkling on each side of the pleural groove; in . others the
wrinkled band covers the whole under surface, and the wrinkles or
raised lines become gradually drawn out in V-shaped lines along the
pleura, so that towards. its extremity they become parallel to the axis
of the pleura. On the pygidium there are raised lines, but finer and
more crowded, and parallel to the posterior border.

Size. Length of the middle piece of the head about 70 mm.
Width in front 110 mm.; at the eyelobe 95 mm. at the posterior
angle about 90 mm. Length of the cord of the anterior extension of
the facial suture 25 mm.; of the eyelobe 17 mm.; of the posterior
extension about 20 mm. Length of glabella and occipital ring about
55 mm. width at third furrow 25 mm. at the first furrow 32 mm.
Length of movable cheek 60 mm. and with general spine about 175
mm., width at the front 25 mm., at the back of the eyelobe 37 mm., at
the posterior margin about 35 mm. Length of the pygidium about
20. mm. ; width 27 mm.

Horizon and locality. Occurs in a very fine, greenish-grey shale,,
resting on volcanic ash rock, seen in a railway cutting at Manuel's
.Station, Conception Bay, Newfoundland. What appears to be the
original surface of the ash rock in Cambrian time was uneven, and the
fine mud of the shale settled into the inequalities of the surface. Al-
most directly upon the old rock surface, there is a layer of a few inches
of shale abounding with the detached parts of this trilobite ; the tests
are confusedly crowded together, flattened and somewhat distorted in
the shale, and are accompanied by a large Hyolithes.

140 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

On comparison with Mr. Walcott's section on Manuel's Brook, (a
short distance to the north); I find no volcanic rock mentioned, hence
I suppose the rock on which the bed of shale rests that contains
M. magnijicus, belongs to the older Intermediate, or Huronian system.
To the east of the ash rock are Nos. 3 and I of Mr. Walcott's section,
hence it is presumed that No. 5 corresponds in position to the volcanic
ridge, as a shore deposit, and that the bed of shale with M. mag-
nificus will be at the bottom or near the bottom of No. 6 of Walcott's
section. Here, it is stated, the head of an Olenellus was found.

This fine species shows many points of resemblance in a general
way to Hohnia Broggeri, Wale, but there can be no doubt it is dis-
tinct, if only by the fact that it has movable cheeks. The genal spines
and pygidium differ also from those ascribed to that species by Walcott.
It differs from all the Paradoxides in its conical glabella, as well as in
the details of the ornamentation of the surface. Solenopleura (?)
Harveyi, Walcott, resembles this species in some respects, but is much
smaller, and belongs to a lower horizon (No 2) of Walcott's section.
In this species we have a good example of the Sardinian genus
Metadoxides, and apparently the most primitive example of the genus
known. M. torosus, Menegh., has just such a thorax and pygidium,
but has evidence of more advanced development in the head-shield ;
this is chiefly in the shorter eyelobe, closer to the glabella, the more
spreading course of the posterior extension of the dorsal suture, and
the condensation of the head in front of the glabella. The meaning of
these differences is apparent when we study the development of Para-
doxides. P. Acadicus, for instance, shows a much wider extension of
the marginal area of the head-shield in the larval, than in the adult
stage. The withdrawal of the eyelobe from the vicinity of the margin
toward the glabella, is seen to be one of the progressive changes that
occurred during the growth of the Ptychoparime of the Paradoxides
Beds at St. John. The short posterior extension of the dorsal suture
is an almost universal characteristic of the trilobites of the Protolenus
Fauna. Here, then, are three criteria from which we may infer the
Newfoundland species to be an older type of Metadoxides than those
nt Sardinia.

Another species of Sardinian Metadoxides (J/. Bomemanni) does
not show such primitive characters as M. torosus, for not only is tin-
whole head more compact, but the condensed pygidium with its

X U. S. Geol. Surv. Bull. 81, pp. 960, 961.

A NEW CAMBRIAN TRILOBITE. 141

costate side lobes, introduces a feature quite at variance with the
usual appearance of the pygidium in Paradoxides, and more like that
in Conocoryphe ; if this species may be retained with M. torosus
in Metadoxides, there is greater reason for referring to this genus
the new species from Newfoundland.

We have already called attention to the fact that the species
described by Meneghini under the name of Olenus Zoppii, and now
referred by Bornemann to his new genus Olenqpsis, bears a close
genetic relation to the genus Protolenus. In fact we may easily infer
from the development of the individuals in certain species of Paradox-
ides that 0. Zoppii is merely an advanced stage in the development
of a Protolenus, in which those advanced characters have become
fixed. Bornemann's representation of the development of 0. Zoppii
(in which, however, the figures appear to be somewhat conventional)
will readily bear out the relation of this genus to Paradoxides, and
justify our reference of Protolenus to the same rootstock.

And this leads us to remark that one of the fossils collected in
Newfoundland last summer was a Micmacca, which by its somewhat
shortened eyelobe showed an advance in development beyond the
species found in the St. John Basin in New Brunswick. Another
trilobite, an Avalonia, from the Newfoundland Protolenus Beds has a
decidedly shortened eyelobe. It thus appears that one of the criteria
of the Protolenus Fauna as found in New Brunswick, i. e. that the
trilobites as far as known have continuous eyelobes, partially fails in
Newfoundland; and in so far as it does so, would indicate that the
Protolenus Fauna in Newfoundland (at least its middle and upper
part) is of a somewhat later date than in New Brunswick. So far
then, as opinion may be based on such data, the Protolenus Fauna in
New Brunswick is one of the oldest assemblage of trilobites hitherto
discovered, and that the migration of this colony has probably been
through Newfoundland to Southern Europe. If the Sardinian species
had come from the eastward we might reasonably have expected to
find with them Olenellus, Dorypyge, or some other genus that has been
elaborated in the region of the Pacific Ocean.

Reference to Platelll — Metadoxides magnificus,T\.^. — Reduced |.
In tkis figure the different parts of the head-shield and the pygidium
are placed in position. The thorax is restored from loose pleura?
which in the restoration should be shorter and blunter ; number of
segments unknown.

14"J BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

POSTSCRIPT.

Since writing the above, it ha.s seemed to the author desirable to
make a broader distinction between the .Sardinian and American
species of Metadoxides than that given above. He has heretofore
depended upon the view of the Sardinian succession given by Bar
rande and Meneghini, from which one may infer the presence of two
Cambrian faunas in Sardinia, the lower containing Olenopsis, Meta-
doxides, Paradoxides, etc., and the upper Giordanella (Asaphus,
Menegh.) Neseuretus, etc.

JBornemann, however, seems to throw doubt upon the entire separ-
ateness of these faunas, when he says that remains of GiordaneH" are
found with Metadoxides armatiis* If this is the case it will carry
the whole Sardinian Cambrian fauna to a higher plane, and imply the
separation of these by a wider space of time from the Newfoundland
species described above.

Meneghini's view would admit of the following arrangement of the
Sardinian as compared with the Atlantic North American Cambrian
faunas.

ATLANTIC NORTH AMERICA. SARDINIA.

Giordanella Fauna.

,, ( Dictyonema Famni

/ >//"/ Peltura Fauna.

Cambrian. 1 Olenus Fauna.

Olenopsis Fauna.

i Paradoxides Fauna.

Lower ) Newfoundland species |

Cambrian, j described in this article J

' Protolenus Fauna.

In this view the lower fauna of Sardinia might be regarded as
intermediate homotaxically, between the Paradoxides and Olenus
faunas. If, however, Bornernann's observation is to be relied upon, it
seems to me that the whole fauna must be carried to the Upper Cam-
brian, notwithstanding the presence of a Paradoxides. It is therefore
desirable to emphasize the point in which the Newfoundland species
differs from the later, and supposed derived forms of .Metadoxides,
found in Sardinia, and apply to them sub-generic names, beginning
w it h the most primitive.

1 . Species baving a widely expanded front in the cephalic Bhield; somewhat
prolonged eyelobes; short posterior extension of the dorsal suture. No costs
on tin- -nil- lobes "t i In- pygidium. Catadoxides n. subgen. Example
( '. maynifiens.

•_'. Species baving a compacted front to the cephalic shield, short eyelobes,
prolonged posterior extension of tin- dorsal suture.

'/. \<> cost a' mi the sides lobes of the pygidium. M bt idoxides, sens, strict.
Ex .1/. toromis.

/;. One or more pairs of costse one the side lobes of the pygidium. Ana
doxides n. suk gen. Ex. .1. armatus, .1. Bornemanni (A. arenosus?)

►VereteineruDgen descambriscben Bcbichtensystem derlnsel Sardinian, p. 166, Halle. 1891.

ON ARTESIAN AND FISSURE WELLS IN NEW BRUNSWICK. 143

ARTICLE VII.

ON ARTESIAN AND FISSURE WELLS IN
NEW BRUNSWICK.

Hy G. F. Matthew and S. W. Katn.

Read March 7th, 1899.

One of the authoi's of this paper has for several years been engaged
in gathering information in reference to deep wells, bored in New
Brunswick, and in the following pages the writers have endeavored to
compare these borings, with a view to deduce practical results, that
may be of general interest.

To show the full range of possibility in the origin and mode of
flow of such wells, we have included some of less than ICO feet, which
are often true artesian wells, penetrating only the surface deposits of
the country.

With such inclusions we may divide the wells, referred to in
this paper, into two principal classes. 1st. Those penetrating the
surface deposits only, and those bored in the Carboniferous and Lower
Carboniferous rocks, in which the sandstones, especially those of the
Coal Measures, are porous, and so afford sources for artesian flows. —
2nd. Those which penetrate the deeply buried Lower Carbonifer-
ous rocks, and those bored in the still older rocks which have suffered
more or less metamorphic change, and in which the sandstones have
been made impervious to water by the calcareous or silicious cement
which has been deposited between the grains of the rock. From these
latter rocks it is clear we cannot have true artesian flows, and must
depend upon such water to supply the wells as may penetrate through
fissures of the rock. In many of these wells there is usually no spon-
taneous flow, but the water has to be obtained by pumping.

Wells of the first class have not received the notice they deserve,
for in many localities in the lower levels of the province, from sea
level to two hundred feet above it, there are extensive plains and
valleys of clay land, from beneath which the purest and best water for
household and farm use may be obtained.

144 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

The artesian wells have been grouped into three sets, each of which
has peculiar characters. Of these the first are those which penetrate
the surface deposits only ; the second are bored in the soft yielding
sandstones of the Coal Measures ; and the third penetrate Lower Car-
boniferous rocks of more varied nature, some of which have saline
waters of marine origin, now held in soft red and brown shales, and
sandstones.

The three wells of the first group are typical of the varieties of
deposit which are likely to be met with in shallower wells. In Dr.
Berryman's well we have the full series of the surface deposits which
it is necessary to penetrate in order to reach the porous stratum con-
taining pure water. The upper deposit here is the mud of a salt marsh
forming an impervious covering to a porous stratum of sand, etc., of a
seashore or estuary origin (Macoma sand), and therefore likely to give a
decidedly brackish water. Beneath these sands there is a heavy bed
of clay " brick clay " (Led a clay), which serves to hold in the water of
the lower level ; this water is contained in a porous stratum of sand and
gravel beneath the clay. At this well the gravels are thought by the
owner to rest on the rock, so that a still older part of the surface
deposits, consisting of a confused mixture of clay, sand, and stones
(" Boulder clay "), usually cemented into a hard, compact mass, is
probably wanting at this particular spot, having been washed away
by the current that laid down the gravel.

Of the well at St. Stephen we have less special knowledge ; it is
said to be situated on a ridge of land between two streams and pene-
trates only the brick clay. To have obtained water, however, the
porous gravels below must have been reached.

Ready's well, in Fairville, is driven through a still more limited
range of the surface deposits, for at this point the lower gravels swell
out into a great ridge, with the brick clays resting on either flank,
but not covering it. This well is driven in the gravels only (unless it
may strike Boulder clay in its lower part) and the supply of water is
drawn from the gravels alone, by direct gravitation, and does not
necessarily come from a distance.

The second group of wells may also be regarded as artesian ; they
are bored in the sandstones of the coal incisures which are "free-
stone"* and occasionally alternate with beds of shale, which would
serve as an impervious covering to the several masses of sandstone In

Sandstones thai arc easily oul with the chisel,

ox ARTESIAN AND FISSURE WELLS IN NEW BRUNSWICK. 145

a less degree the sandstones of the Lower Carboniferous series in which
the wells of the third group are bored, are capable of transmitting
water; their grains are frequently held together by a cement of calcite,
which to some extent closes the openings between the grains.

As the second class of wells have largely been made in rock that is
practically non-porous, the supply of water which such wells yield
must come from joint or fissures in the rocks, and for good practical
results it is obviously desirable that the positions in which such fissures
are likely to be numerous should be known, and also whether there
are chances that such fissures will be open, or fast closed by pressure.

Proofs that there is a pressure in a horizontal direction approxi-
mately from the southeast, have been observed at Monson, Mass., by
W. H. Niles,* at New York by Prof. J. F. Kemp,t and at St. John,
N. B., by one of the writers. I Such pressure would have a tendency to
close fissures that were at right angles to it, especially where they
occur in yielding rocks like slates and soft schist, but would not inter-
fere with those that are horizontal, or run in the direction of the
the pressure. Hence joints with a low hade to the southwest, or joints
with a northwest course are in this region more likely to carry water,
than others.

Dr. W. 0. Crosby, of Boston, has marshalled evidence to show
that joints do not extend to very great depths,^ and are most numer-
ous in the rocks toward the surface of the earth, hence in going
down on these fissures one may expect to find a level where the
water is held by the cessation of the fault or joint. Under these con-
ditions where these joints or fissures are numerous, they act as
reservoirs to hold fresh water that has been transmitted through them
from the surface of the earth, to the lower levels.

Nordenskjold || from observations made on the coast of Finland
and Norway, has drawn the conclusion that at a certain depth in
metamorphic and crystalline rocks, horizontal fissures have been
formed by expansion and contraction of the rocks, due to the difference
in temperature of the rocks down to a certain depth in the summer, as
contrasted with the winter. The rocks down to the point where they
have a uniform temperature at all seasons, would contract in winter
and expand in summer. The theory requires that at this level of

American Journal of Science, March, 1872. t Trans. N. Y. Acad., August, 1895, p., 275.
X Bulletin of this Society, No. XII, pp, 39, 1894.
SGeol, Mag., London, Sept. 1881, p. 316.
| Journal Royal Geographical Society, Vol. X, No, 5, pp. 465-469, Nov, 1897.

146 RULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTOHY SOCIETY.

uniform temperature, horizontal fissures should be formed, that would
serve as reservoirs for water from the surface, and a means of trans-
mitting the water from place to place horizontally.

So far we have no support for this theory from the phenomena of
the deep wells sunk near St. John, unless the horizontal fissures are
deeper than Nordenskjold found them to be in Finland. Of the
wells near St. John that have given a generous supply of water, two,
to the north of the harbor, draw their supply from a depth of 270
feet, and three to the east, from nearly four hundred feet in depth.
It is true that owing to the greater extremes of winter and summer
temperature, the anticipated horizontal fissures might be looked for at
a somewhat greater depth here, than in Europe, but certainly not at
such a depth as the water veins in the rocks near St. John are found
to be. It is probable, therefore, that some other cause has been active
in permitting the water to sink to these greater depths.

Explanation of the Tabular List of Wells.

Nos. 1 to 3 are entirely in the surface deposits. Nos. 4 to 8 are
in the Carboniferous basin along the Gulf of St. Lawrence. Nos. 9
to 13 are in the Lower Carboniferous rocks of the Kennebecasis valley.
Nos. 14 to 16 are deep wells ; the first two are bored in Lower Car-
boniferous rocks, and, except No. 16, are supposed to penetrate such
rocks only. Nos. 17 to 28 are fissure wells; except the first three
they are all in the vicinity of St. John, or in the city itself.

" Date," refers to the year in which the well was bored.

" Depth," that of the well, in feet.

" Bore," diameter of the main portion, in inches.

" Pressure," indicates the height of the water in the well, in feet ;
the minus mark ( — ) indicates that it is below the surface, the plus
mark ( + ) that it rises above it.

" Flow," indicates the number of gallons discharged by the well
per hour.

"Temperature," was taken with the Fahrenheit thermometer.

" Water veins," the figures indicate the level in feet below the
surface where the water enters the well.

" Height," this is in feel above sea level at high tide, except Sus-
sex Vale, where it is reckoned from mean tide level.

" Kind of rock," the thicknesses ace in feet, and the upper layers
are mentioned first.

OX ARTESIAN AND FISSURE WELLS IN NEW BRUNSWICK.

147

148

BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

a>

o

+j

ifl

<

J
J

.22

tu

■*-»

3!

c

o

a

+J

ID

m

u

Q

<*-

j-

Q

•>

Z

o

tt

5

en

C

ID

3

K

<v>

(0

z

(/)

»— i

c

11

■

•a

a>

u

o

00

a oig

om,p

•^ p +->

° a °

T3-2o £J3'«

S CO — • «> fe M

wS^a .3

0D-100 o

D

so

ajs

* aj S
00 2?

00 55 ao osOiJiJ

a

O

g

01

V

V

0

—

H

a

i

0

a

>!

X

11

d

-

—

!2 i)

fc •«!

•a *

? ** °-

m-wTH »

— ■ u
es«£

O coao

•< +

H » « «»

3 0) 3 1)

> 5 S 0) 4)
■»— 'OS**

+CB + +

Q fc

o3 10

w i_> <i» i- > O <ri

§ "a s

10 in co
I I I

> CO CO SB lO 00

lO IflQrtOO

i- . f sn-
ot osoei

~. 'X' .

5 p »

O — £4 i»

3 p Sfe

fe oprttS 5

"5 p',°,3 rf

ao »a 9

qsMO o

uP.Uin m

a £

*J 60

02 P

• 3

j.

iS*i ° 2

.2 o rpj

a ^

§ I SfS3

H O a) 00 *J -3

CO Tl< I

0) OJ Si r.>\> •>

No.

2,

Mr. J. Vroom.

No.

4.

Mr. A. W. Dobson.

No.

8.

Dr. J. Baxter and Dr. R.
Nicholson.

No.

14.

Mr. F. <i. Moore.

No.

15.

W. N. Biggar and I). P. Kent

No.

17.

Rev. E. P. Wallace.

No.

19.

Mr. W. Perkins.

No.

21,

•_'•_'. Mr. E. C. Woods.

No.

24.

Mr. James C. Robertson.

No.

26.

Mr. F. Stetson.

ox artesian and fissure wells in new brunswick. 149

Additional Notes.

Information in regard to the above wells has been had from the
following sources ;

No. 1. Dr. John Berryman.

No. 3. Mr. .las. Ready.

No. 5, 6, 7. Dr. R. Nicholson.

No. 9. Mr. L. Jewett.

No. 10-13. Messrs. D. P. Kent anil

W. N. Biggar.
No. 16. Dr. P. Cox.
No. 18. Mr. Jas. Vroom.
No. 20. Mr. D. P. Kent.
No. 23. Mr. R. Keltie Jones.
No. 25. Dr. Geo. A. Hetherington.
No. 27. Messrs. John Kelly, W. Mur- No. 28. Mr. R. W. Connor.

doch, C. E. and Count deBiuy.

Nos. 5-7, Newcastle. In reference to Ritchie's well, Dr. Nichol-
son states that the interior of the pipe became clogged with a deposit
of blue clay, but was removed by passing a hard substance up and
down.

No. 8, Chatham. The same authority states that the well near
the public wharf at Chatham, though 200 feet from the shore and
above tide level, is affected by the rise and fall of the tide in Miramichi
river, rising to the surface of the ground when the tide is full.
Dr. J. Baxter records four wells that are 100 feet or more in depth,
two of which throw the water above the surface of the ground two
and seven feet.

Nos. 10-13, Sussex. D. P. Kent, the well borer, gives the follow-
ing as the succession of surface deposits at Sussex : At the top one foot
of loam, then thirty feet sand and gravel, then twelve feet clay of a
light grey color, then — gravel and boulders (clean and smooth), finally
ten feet of boulder clay.

As Sussex has no system of sewerage, water supplied from ordinary
surface wells must be very liable to contamination. Prudence would
suggest the use of water for potable purposes from deep wells for this
and similarly situated communities.

No. 16, Chatham. Maritime Sulphite Fibre Co. ("Pulp Mill").
Dr. P. Cox says water was struck at 100 feet from the surface, there
was only a small flow, which in boring deeper was lost. At the depth

150 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

of 1,000 feet an ample flow was met which rose nearly to the surface ;
the water proved to be saline.

No. 19, Hatfield's Point. Mr. W. S. Perkins says the height of
the water in this well is not affected by the rising and falling of the
St John River.

Analyses.

No. 24. Mr. W. H. Mowatt has made a preliminary test of the
water from the well at Portland Rolling Mills and found considerable
chloride of calcium, and some sulphate of calcium. The water does not
appear to contain sodium, potassium or iron,

No. 23. The following analysis of the water at 8. Jones' was made
some years ago by Mr. Alfred E. Macintyre, a chemist, now at Morrin
College, Quebec. The water is pure and free from sediment.

Parts in 10,000 Parts in 10,000

Magnesium Sulphate . . . 0.735
Aluminium Phosphate . . 0.015
Sodium Hydrogen-Carbonate 0.003
Potassium Sulphate . . . 0.042
Calcium Chloride .... 0.778

Total solid constituents 3.256

(Signed) Alfred E. McIntyre.

The absence of bacteria, and low temperature of this water, make
it of great value to the proprietors for brewing purposes.

No. 10, Sussex ("Mineral Spring.") The following information is
furnished by W. N. Biggar. Analysis : Each Imperial gallon of this
water contains :

Chloride of Potassium 0.21 grains.

Chloride of Sodium 2.10 "

Sulphate of Soda ........ 1.47 "

Carbonate of Soda 25.35 "

Carbonate of Lime 0.35 "

Silica 1.05 "

The water contains quite a percentage of sulphuretted hydro-
gen and also carbonic acid gas.

Kxperience derived from the boring of wells in the Cambrian
slates and sandstones at St. John seem to point to certain conditions
that are favorable to obtaining water, and others the reverse.

The Jones' well was started in black, fine slates of Division 3 of
the St, John group, and no water was obtained until flagstones or

Sodium Chloride .

. 0.517

Calcium Sulphate .

. 0.127

Magnesium Chloride .

. 0.013

Calcium Carbonate

. 0.826

Iron Carbonate

. 0.082

Silicon Dioxide

. 0.118

ON ARTESIAN AND FISSURE WELLS IN NEW BRUNSWICK. 151

sandstones, presumably of Division 2, were struck. As the dip of the
rocks would indicate a great depth of slates at this point, it is to be
presumed that these slates have been overthrust on the sandstones by
pressure from the southwest in past ages. Depending on this factor as
the displacing force here, the water supply of this well would come
from the rain-fall on the exposed ridges of Division 2 flags in the city
of St. John.

While Mr. S. Jones obtained an ample supply of pure water by bor-
ing in the black slates, the Alms House Commissioners had a different
experience on boring in similar black slates on the east side of Court-
ney Bay, parish of Simonds. There though they bored a well twice
as deep as Jones' well, they struck no water vein of any consequence.
At the suggestion of a member of this Society they bored another well
470 feet further to the north, near the margin of a ridge of Division 2
flags and sandstones, and from this well they obtained a supply of
water quite sufficient for their needs. The dip of the Division 2 flags
would bring them to the lower levels in this well.

Another well where a fairly good flow of water was obtained, was
at the Portland Rolling Mill, Strait Shore, near the Falls. This
well is also driven in Cambrian flagstones and slates, though its lower
part may penetrate an outlier of Laurentian limestone which appears
in the hill near by. The strata along this shore are effected by pro-
found faults, and greatly displaced ; these displacements would give
additional facilities for the storage and transmission of water.

Some wells bored in the vicinity of St. John have not given such
good results. That driven some years ago at Pleasant Point opposite
Indiantown was wholly in granite and the yield of water was small.
This may be accounted for by the fact that the granite hill at Pleasant
Point is enclosed by more yielding strata (limestones and slates) and
joints or fissures due to pressure and disturbance, would be found in
the more yielding strata, while the hard granite would be comparatively
free from them.

Another well which was carried down to quite a considerable depth,
was that at the Convent School on Mount Pleasant Avenue. A well
was sunk at this place some years ago by the late Mr. Robert Reid,
and as the supply which he obtained was too small for the use of a
large school, a deep boring was undertaken. The boring was carried
down 300 feet below tide level and a moderate supply of water was
obtained at a depth of 245 feet, or about the sea level.

152 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

Better success, however, attended the boring of a well at Connor's
ropewalk, on the Adelaide road, which lies in a limestone valley be-
tween two granite ridges about a mile to the northwest of the Convent
well. Here an ample supply of water was obtained.

Where we have ascertained the level at which the water stands in
wells driven near the harbor or river, it would seem that the level is
affected by that of the river ; thus in both the Asylum well and that
of Mr. Ready the water surface in the well is about the level of low
water. At the Alms House, on the contrary, where the now is un-
usually heavy, it rises considerably above high tide level.

The following may be suggested as working hypotheses to govern
the search for water by deep boring in compacted sedimentary and in
igneous rocks, to be proved or disproved by further exploration.

1. Water veins are most likely to exist in bands of such rocks
that abound in joints or faults, rather than in bands where such joints
are scarce ; hence more likely to be found in valleys than on ridges.

2. In a complex of soft slates and sandstones the water veins
may be looked for in the sandstones, not ia the slates.

3. The water will stand in the wells approximately at the drain
age level of the district, and not be lifted by artesian pressure as in
wells of the first class.

In conclusion we may here call attention to the advantage of tin-
comparatively inexpensive boring of wells in the surface deposits, to
the porous stratum below the brick clays, from which in many flat
and low-laying tracts in the province, pure and copious supplies of
water may be obtained.

APPENDIX THE PRESIDENT'S ADDRESS. 153-

APPENDIX.

THE PRESIDENTS ADDRESS.

A WILDERNESS JOURNEY — WITH SUGGESTIONS.

By G. U. Hay.

Read at the Annual Meeting, January 17th, 1899.

To-night I shall depart, to some extent, from the usual order of
an annual address and first take you with me in imagination on a
canoe trip one hundred miles across northern New Brunswick — from
the Bale de Chaleur to the St. John River. I would like to impart
to you some of the pleasures of that trip, — the exhilaration that comes
from poling a canoe up a rocky and swift stream and then dashing
down long stretches of rapids, breathing the free air and taking in the
glorious scenery of our northern woodlands. But no description of
mine, I fear, can give any adequate idea of the reality of such a trip
through the entire length of two of our most beautiful rivers — the
Nipisiguit and Tobique — rivers whose windings among leafy woods
bring into view at every turn such matchless scenery that I shall
always feel my blood move more quickly at the recollection of that
journey, with its pleasures as well as its trials.

No country of the world, perhaps, presents a greater variety and
beauty of river-scenery than New Brunswick. From the tidal streams
of Westmorland and Albert rushing in from the Bay of Fundy with
impetuous haste to cover up muddy flats, on past the stretches of the
lower St. John and Kennebecasis winding smoothly among green
fields and meadows, we come to our northern rivers — the Miramichi,
Nipisiguit, Tobique and Restigouche, leaping down from their mountain
homes and running races with each other to the sea. Every river
and stream has numberless tributaries, cradled among forests of pine
and spruce and maple, rushing down the mountain sides, resting
occasionally in quiet lakes, and gathering strength and volume from
other tributaries as they sweep onward toward the sea. These streams

154 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

form a network over the whole province, — the delight of the canoe-
man now as they were in former times of his brother, the dusky
savage.

In the summer of 1896 T accompanied Dr. Ganong down the
Restigouche, an account of which trip was published in Bulletin XIV
of the Society's proceedings. As we passed the mouth of the Upsal-
quitch we formed a plan to ascend that stream in the summer of '98,
make our way from its headwaters to the Nipisiguit, reach the
sources of that stream, and thence descend the Tobique to the St. John.
Owing to difficulties in the way, chiefly the lowness of the water in
the Upsalquitch, we decided to ascend the whole length of the Nipisi-
guit. The course for canoe trips is usually up the Tobique from
Andover, and down the Nipisiguit to Bathurst. The reason of this is
obvious ; the Nipisiguit is the more difficult river to ascend, having a
rise of 996 feet from Bathurst harbor to Big Nipisiguit Lake at its
source, a distance of 80 miles, while the Tobique from the St. John
river to Lake Nictor rises 625 in a length of 95 miles.

On the eighth of August we started from Bathurst with a canoe,
camping outfit and a four weeks' supply of provisions, and were carried
by team to Grand Falls, 21 miles up the river. A few miles beyond
Bathurst we left the last settlement and soon the last house. Our
intended course stretched through a wilderness, which for over one
hundred miles contains no sign of a human habitation except a fishing
lodge at the Grand Falls. The lower Nipisiguit is rougher than the
upper portion, which some of its enthusiastic admirers told us was
'• full of quiet pools, and every pool full of fish." I well remember my
first canoe trip many years ago from Bathurst to Grand Falls and
return. Everywhere the scenery is strikingly wild and pictm-esque,
and the river tossed into foam by numerous rapids and small cataracts,
or whirling round huge granite boulders which lies scattered every-
where in the bed of the stream. The names "Rough Waters,"
" Chain of Rocks," " Moorhead's Rocks," " Pabineau Falls," and
" Round Rocks," are suggestive of some of the perils of navigation on
the lower Nipisiguit. The occasional glimpses obtained of the river
as we lumbered along over the rough wagon road, gave it a ureal
fascination when compared with dreary stretches of burnt lands with
blackened dead trunks and branches along the road. The Pabineau
Falls, about twelve miles from Bathurst, is a wild and beautiful spot,
the ri\er tumbling and breaking over a granite ledge into a deep
chasm beneath — a choice spot for salmon fishers. On the adjacent

APPENDIX THK PRESIDENT'S ADDRESS. 155

rocks was found the rare plant Aster linariifoHus, this being the only
known locality for it in the province.

Our first camping ground was on the border of a thickly wooded
terrace near the head of the Falls, not far from the deserted "farm "
of " Bear " Walsh, a once mighty hunter, who gained the name from
his many contests with bears. His favorite plan was to dress in a
bear-skin, amble on all-fours through the woods, and come upon the
unsuspecting bruin, whom he invariably knocked out in the first
round.

The Grand Falls of the Nipisiguit are less impressive than the
Grand Falls of the St. John, although the scenery is wilder. The
chasm through which the water pours by a series of pitches and
rapids is very narrow. The first pitch is about fifty feet high and a
second about twenty feet. After these plunges the dark waters pour
swiftly through a narrow gorge, three-fourths of a mile in length,
with perpendicular walls of rock on each side. So narrow is the
space between these opposing walls that in times of freshet it is said
sometimes to be completely filled, and the gorge becomes one long
rapid of seething tumultuous waters.

The Woodsia Ilvensis was the fern most thoroughly established on
the rocks about the falls, with a few patches of Polypodinm vulgare.
The blue flowers of Campanida rotundifolia filled crevices wherever
its roots could secure a foothold. A few Habenarias and other
orchids, the Wild Onion (Allium Schcenoprasum), the yellow flowers of
Utricularia, Ranunculus, and others were found on the shores of the
stream above the falls.

From Grand Falls to Indian Falls, thirty miles further up, the
river is very rough, and we had hired two guides to take us over this
part. Next morning we began the ascent in a large dug-out, in which
we were placed with our baggage, and our bark canoe was towed
alongside. A horse was attached to the dug-out with the driver on
his back. The other guide stood in the bow of the dug-out with a
long pole in his hand to fend off the vessels from the rocks. By such
conveyance as this it is possible to carry a large party and their
baggage up the river. As many as five or six dug-outs may be placed
side by side, and one horse, with skilful guiding to avoid shoals and
rocks, may pull the whole fleet up stream. But it is a very matter-of-
fact, even miserable, way to get up a stream. The water was pretty
low, the dug-out scraped on the rocks, and our course was slow, giving
abundant opportunity to observe the shores and the character of the
river.

156 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

The Nipisiguit river deserves its name, ( Win-peg-y-a-?cik, angry
waters). It is a succession of rapids, with a few falls making a
" carry " round them a necessity. The river is comparativefy wide
and shallow, but with sufficient water to float light canoes in the
dryest season. The rocky bed presents a good many obstacles to the
canoeman, who has to be constantly on the watch to prevent " scrap-
ing." As our canoe had been somewhat battered on the Restigouche
tiip, and had not been improved by two years' storing in a dry place,
we had to be especially careful to keep ourselves and it from parting
company on the trip.

The Nipisiguit is like the Restigouche in some respects, but very
different in others. There are no salmon above Grand Falls, the falls
presenting an obstacle which they are not able to surmount. One
rarely meets with the deep pools so common on the Restigouche, but
the shallower pools are the abode of trout innumerable, and casts at
any place on the river rewaid the angler with catches of fine specimens
weighing from one to four pounds. The bed of the river is an inter-
minable succession of rocks and shingle, while the bed of the Resti-
gouche is almost everywhere overlaid with gravel. There are few
terraces on the Nipisiguit, whilst these are picturesque features of the
Restigouche, especially where they are crowned with fishing lodges,
the abode of sportsmen. The flora of the Nipisiguit is less interesting
and varied than that of the Restigouche, and affords fewer rare speci-
mens, especially in ferns and those boreal species brought down by its
branches from the hills and mountains of Quebec. The Restigouche
has comparatively low land along its upper course, the land rising
gradually into mountains along the lower stretches. In the portions
of the Nipisiguit toward the mouth, especially above Grand Falls, the
hills are low, the land gradually rising as the river is ascended until alti-
tudes of from 1,000 to over 2,000 feet above sea-level are nut with
along its upper waters. The tributaries of the Nipisiguit are much
less in size and volume than those of the Restigouche, except the south-
west branch, which is nearly the size — even broader at the mouth — than
the main stream. Many islands are met with in the Nipisiguit river,
a few clothed with grass but many more covered with a growth of
trees, some of considerable size. There are more wild animals — liens,
moose, deer, caribou, along the Nipisiguit, the country being wilder
and less frequented by sportsmen.

The monotony of our second days' voyage by the novel (to us)
"horse and dug-out team" was destined to be rudely interrupted, ami

APPENDIX — THE PRESIDENT'S ADDRESS. 157

the interruption came about in this way. After we had gone about
four and a half miles we came to the " Narrows," a gorge with walls
of nearly precipitous rock and dangerous water. Most of the baggage
was carried round, and the remainder was entrusted to the guides
who undertook to pole the dug-out through the rapids, with the result
that it became a total wreck, and our supplies went to the bottom or
floated down stream. Hurrying to the spot in our canoe we rescued
from the greedy waters ham, butter, pork, fishing tackle, etc. But
there were some things dear to our hearts that the angry waters would
not yield up, and these were baked beans and the aluminum outfit,
containing cooking utensils and dishes.

Guides are a necessity. They are also an encumbrance if not of
the right kind. We decided to dispense with ours. The generous
sportsman at the fishing lodge below Grand Falls improvised for us a
cooking outfit. In the meantime our own had been recovered from
the depths of a pool. Left to our own resources we pictured the
delights of making our way unaided through the wilderness ahead of
us, taking our own time, and examining whatever we chose, — a free
life indeed, with a prospect of abundant ingenuity and exercise in
overcoming the obstacles that lay strewn in our pathway.

About four o'clock on Saturday afternoon, August 13th, we
reached Indian Falls, fifty miles from Bathurst, having poled our own
canoe for three days without any mishap, covering in that time over
twenty miles of very bad water. But we rejoiced in the prospect of a
Sunday's rest in one of the wildest and most picturesque spots on the
river, and the opportunity to review the events of the past week,
estimate our resources of strength and provisions, and to form plans to
reach the second haven of rest — the Nipisiguit lakes, thirty miles
beyond Indian Falls. We had devoted ourselves almost exclusively
during the past three days to the task of getting our canoe up through
the rapids and over rocks that strewed our pathway "thick as autumn
leaves in Vallambrosa." The last two or three miles of our journey to
Indian Falls was the tug-of-war of the trip. Rocks and huge boulders
filled the river, and there seemed at times not passage way enough for
the canoe in the swirling waters as they eddied from rock to rock.
When the rapids were too strong and the rocks made the poling of
the canoe too dangerous, we towed it up by means of ropes.

The hills on each side of the river became higher and gradually
drew nearer the banks as we ascended, occasionally forming over-
hanging precipices as on the Restigouche. Cool springs and gurgling

158 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

rivulets of ice-cold water were refreshingly near us all the way up from
Grand Falls. Droseras and Utricularias were bus}7 capturing insects
in their cool mossy retreats on the borders of these springs. Arethusa
bulbosa and other orchids, such as the purple fringed Habenaria, the
Habenaria dilatata and //. hyperborea, Arnica mollis and other plants
loving cool moist habitats were found in great abundance. Some fine
straight specimens of scrub pine (Pinus Banksiana) were seen along
the higher ground overlooking the river ; some of these towering to
the height of sixty or seventy feet forming ample groves. White
birch, black and white spruce, fir, maples, black ash, cedars of large
size, were the chief trees met with, while alder, mountain maple,
cherry, mountain ash and other shrubs drooped over the water with
clematis and bed-straw twining everywhere over their stems ; the
purple Joe Pye-weed seemed to crowd all the vacant spots, forming a
tangle of vegetation most delightful to look upon, but very hard to
get through, especially when it is l'emembered that the sweep of the
freshet and ice in the spring causes every shrub and small tree trunk
within its I'each to point down stream. It is to the thicket entangle-
ments of these shores that I owe what little skill I possess in poling a
canoe up a rapid stream. When this trip was first planned, Dr-
Ganong, with a generosity that overcame all my scruples, since I was
not accustomed to pole a canoe up stream, offered to "do all the work'
and leave me free to botanize along shore. I scrambled along
that rock-strewn and tangled shore for the greater part of two days.
On the third I got on board the canoe and seized the bow pole with a
determination to stick to the ship at all hazards.

What a charm there was about that camping-ground at Indian
Falls, with the pale light of the full moon coming to us over the dark
hills of spruce and pine beyond our tent. There was no sound except
the rushing of the waters, which was continually in our ears. We
had a feeling that the roughest part of the river was past; for was not
the assurance given us that the upper part of the river is a series of
quiet stretches, "full of pools and every pool full of fish." A spirit of
contentment is in the air. The coffee never gave out a more delight-
ful aroma. The flapjacks as they were deftly turned in the air came
down in the right place in the fryingpan and lay sizzling contentedly
with a well-browned surface, done to a charm. We enjoyed with all
thf high spirits of boyhood the charm of outdoor life in the woods.
We talked of everything under the sun : why a bountiful providence
lias given us the means of knowing when a flapjack is done on the one

APPENDIX — THE PRESIDENT'S ADDRESS. 159*

side but has left us in the dark about the other side. Again, how
many persons ought to compose a camping party. This was discussed
with some warmth as each strove to outdo the other in deftly turning
a flapjack, or win the palm in producing the richest brown surface.
The question of number could not be definitely settled. Four and
three were suggested, but these numbers were rejected as furnishing
too great a variety of interests which would possibly clash. Two was
a favorite number., but this was objected to also, the disagreement
turning on the point : if one of the two should tumble from the canoe
and go sprawling upon the flood, should the other laugh or maintain a
proper gravity under such trying circumstances. Thus we whiled
away the hours until sleep closed our eyelids on the fragrant fir
boughs, with the murmur of the waters growing fainter and fainter.

The next day — Sunday — was bright and beautiful. The series of
rapids known as Indian Falls extends up the river until a turn hides
the waters from view. Here, as the level rays of the setting sun
shone over the foaming waters and black boulders, there was a strange
fascination in watching the effects of sunlight and shadow, the crink-
ling lines of sunlight playing around the huge boulders looking like
monsters disporting themselves in a sea of gold.

On Monday morning we made a portage of about half a mile to
get round these rapids, of which Indian Falls forms the eastern end.
These portages are among the delightful troubles of a journey in the
wilderness. One wished at such a time that the camping party
consisted of four instead of two to share the toil. But it is to be
done and we might as well do it cheerfully. We take it as a pleasure,
and in two or three hours it is accomplished, over a pretty woodland
pathway, well tramped for centuries by voyageurs through the wilder-
ness. First, we take the canoe, binding our coats on the benches
nearest the bow and stern, raising and turning it over at the same
time so that it is carried bottom upward, with the benches resting on
our shoulders — Indian style. Next the baggage is taken, carrying it
as far as we can, putting it down and resting as we walk back for
more, — after the fashion of Ivlondikers.

Then we launched our canoe, rejoicing in the prospect of the
" quiet stretches ' beyond ; but the rocks and rapids are ever present.
We meet with a few pools " full of fish," but the fish are probably
suckers, the trout hiding themselves at the foot of rapids or beneath
overhanging banks. But finally the rocks and boulders which have

160 BULLETIN OF THK NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

strewn our pathway for four or five miles become fewer, and we have
a few gravelly stretches to our great relief, although they are soon
succeeded by rocky ledges and shallower water.

The country has become more mountainous and the mountains are
close to us on both sides of the river. Bald Mountain has been in
sight since Saturday, and on Monday afternoon, at three o'clock we
land at the point nearest to it and pitch our tent, intending to climb
at early dawn on the following morning. Near us was situated a
" bear camp," where the lumbermen store supplies of flour and salt
pork for use the following winter. They are made very strong, to
resist the attacks of bears, who f requently, however, get into them by
tearing off portions of the roof. We had been authorized before
leaving Bathurst to get into this one, bear fashion, and help ourselves
if we ran short of supplies, but fortunately we were not in need.

Here was noticed Euphrasia officinalis and other foreign plants
which had followed the lumbermen up from the coast. I had not
noticed this plant at the camping sites on the Restigouche, while of
the introduced plant Silene inflata, noticed in such abundance on that
river, not a vestige was to be seen on the Nipisiguit. Such are some
of the vagaries of that vagrant class of plants known as weeds !

We started at 5.20 next morning to climb Bald Mountain, and in
about an hour reached the summit without any difficulty. From the
top a beautiful panorama was presented to the view. We could trace
the outline of the Nipisiguit from Grand Falls to its source in the
Nipisiguit lakes, near which lay a number of high peaks, among them
Bald Mountain of the Tobique rising from Lake Nie.tor. To the south
stretched hills and mountains, descending to the eastward in ranges of
low hills. The height of the Nipisiguit Bald Mountain above the Bay
de Chaleur is given by Mr. Ells in the Geological Report as 1922 feet.
There is a mountain to the north, on the opposite side of the river,
with a bare summit nearly if not quite as high as this. The air on
the top was bleak and cold, and even with our coats on we were glad
at times to seek the shelter of an overhanging rock, although the day
in the valley below was warm, even sultry. 1 found the vegetation
rather interesting, with several boreal plants and the trees and shrubs
all of stunted growth. The following is a list of the plants observed ■'
Varciitium uliyiiioswm (its first recorded appearance in this province))
V. I'i'iiiisi/1 i-ii Him m, V. vitis-Idcea, Nemopa/nihes Canadensis, Pinus
Strobus, I', resinosa, I'. Banksia/na, Larix Americana (first place that I
had seen it on this river), Picea mora, /'. all>a, Abies baiaamea, Kalmia

APPENDIX — THE PRESIDENT'S ADDRESS. 161

ungustifolia, Rhodora Canadensis, Empetrum nigrum, Betula pa/py-
racea, Popidus tremidoides, Melampyrum Americanum, Aralia nudi-
canlis, Pyrus Americana, Pteris aquilina, Aspidium filir-fremiua (the
only ferns observed) Diervilla trifida, Viburnum cassinoides, Solidago
latifolia, one willow, two or three lycopodiums, a growth of lichens
that covered the rocks in every direction, chiefly the Iceland Mo^<
(Cetraria ishmdica). These plants were collected within a radius of
25 yards of the summit.

It seems rather odd that in the reports of the Dominion Natural
History Survey there are so few records of the plant and animal life
of the province, when the surface geology is reported with so much
care and minuteness. Here, for instance, was found a plant ( Vaccinium
uliginosum), the most conspicuous one on the summit of Bald Moun-
tain, which has not been detected in any other part of the province so
far as I am aware.

The scenery along the Nipisiguit, from Bald Mountain to the
lakes, is grand and picturesque. Lofty mountains, whose rounded or
dome-shaped tops form fine positions for extended and uninterrupted
views, were constantly in sight, presenting great temptations to climb.
Storms of rain, accompanied with thunder and lightning, were of
frequent occurrence and added to the grandeur of the scene. Just
after one of these down-pours, and while the hills were reverberating
with the distant thunder, we rounded a turn in the river and came
upon a Virginia deer and her fawn bathing in a sheltered nook — a
pretty woodland picture. Islands become more numerous as we
ascend the river, and low meadows on which were growing elm^,
maples and butternuts. The tall grasses and ostrich ferns, from four
to six feet in height, gave evidence of a rich soil, while the asters and
Joe Pye-weed contrasted with the vivid green of the rich vegetation
around. Passing Southwest Branch, which comes in almost at right
angles to the main stream, we reached in a short time after Portage
Brook, whose source is near the Upsalquitch Lake. We congratulated
ourselves that we had not come by that route, as the water was too
low to float our canoe. Islands now become more frequent, dividing
the diminished water of the river, and making our course tedious and
laborious.

About three o'clock one afternoon we came to a stream, probablv
the Little Forks of the Nipisiguit, and here we obtained one of the
finest views on the river. Just behind us was a high mountain, not
less, we supposed, than 1000 feet above the river, and forming an

162 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

abrupt ending to the straight piece of river we had just traversed.
The top was a perfect dome in shape, bare on the summit, reflecting
from its bronzed surface the afternoon sun in a thousand matchless
colors.

As we approached the Nipisiguit Lakes the water became less
rapid, but more shoal, with low grassy stretches along the river, in
which were seen the tracks of moose and red deer. Viburnum Opulus
and Viburnum pmiciflorum were abundant on the low banks, with
the royal fern in large clumps.

On Friday, August 19th, at 1.45 we reached a haven in the first
Nipisiguit Lake, seventy-seven miles from Bathurst Harbor, on the
twelfth day of our journey, and pitched camp Number Ten on a piece
of low ground at the source of the river. Since leaving our guides at
the Narrows we had made an average of six and one-half miles each
day.

Next morning we started bright and early to explore the Nipisiguit
lakes, four in number, connected by short thoroughfares. Nature
smiled on us, for never was there a clearer or brighter morning. We
enjoyed the rare luxury of sitting down and paddling our canoe.
That was a red-letter day in our calendar. A moose was sighted,
three plants new to the province were found, and a stream was
discovered not laid down on the maps. Of course the moose was not
captured, as moose hunting was out of season. The three plants
found were Ranunculus circinatus, myriophyllum alterniflorum, and
Carex ittriculata, var. minor. The three Nipisiguit Lakes lying to
the east are only ponds of little depth and with soft muddy bottom,
each not more than from a half mile to a mile in length. Big
Nipisiquit Lake is a fine sheet of water, over two miles long, very
irregular in shape, especially on its northern side, where there are
several islands, with a long ridge (moraine) extending into the lake
and covered with a fine growth of red pine (Pin us resinosa), and
flanked on each side by narrow bays extending far into the land. In
the western bay we found the camping ground on which for genera-
tions past aborigines and white men, mighty hunters and guides, had
encamped. Here we pitched our tent, and that night and next day
(Sunday) we called up in imagination and made them pass in array
before us that motley host of hunters and warriors that had ascended
the Tobique, crossed the portage, and thence down tin1 Nipisiguit.
The land around these lakes toward the east is for some distance

APPENDIX — THE PRESIDENT'S ADDRESS. 163

low and flat, showing that at one time it was probably one large
sheet of water. South and west the land abruptly rises into several
lofty peaks, the highest of which is Teneriffe.

On Monday, August 22nd, we "carried" across the portage, nearly
three miles, to the Tobique Lakes, and on Tuesday climbed Bald
(Sagamook) Mountain, which rises on the south side of Nictor Lake.
I ascended this mountain in the year 1884 with Mr. Chalmers of the
Geological Survey, having the same season made the ascent of the
Tobique and the portage across to the Nipisiguit Lakes.

On the 7 th October of that year I read a paper before this Society
giving some of the results of observations made on the Tobique, with
some adjacent tributaries of the St. John, so that any extended men-
tion is not now necessary.

The scenery of this portion of the province is strikingly wild and
picturesque. The two lakes which give rise to the Little Tobique
river have a united length of over four miles, and are joined by a rapid
and crooked thoroughfare difficult to navigate. Both lakes are very
irregular in outline, with rounded joints and deep coves, with virgin
forests on all sides, the abode of moose, deer and caribou. Shallow
ponds at the east extremity are fed by two streams. The temperature
of the water here was found to be 41°F., the lowest met with on our
trip, the next coldest being that of the stream flowing into the south
side of Big Nipisiguit Lake (49°F.). Two plants new to the province
were found here, Potamogeton heterophyllus and Pyrohi secunda var.
jmmila.

"We reached Andover on our trip down the Tobique the 30th
August, after a pleasant and safe run of nearly 100 miles, through
rapids and quiet stretches of river, rendered all the more enjoyable
from our toilsome ascent of the Nipisiguit.

The list of plants, recorded on another page, contains eight species
and varieties not hitherto recorded in the province. I am indebted
to Mr. Walter Leane, and others, of Cambridge, for their kind assist-
ance in determining difficult species, and to Prof. L. H. Bailey, of
Cornell University, for determinations of the carices.

Our northern rivers are better known to outsiders than they are to
our own people. In the course of a summer's exploration among them
you would meet with a dozen foreigners to one native of the province
seeking sport, recreation and rest in those wildernesses where the only

164 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

sign of a habitation is an occasional white tent, the only sounds the
Yoices of woodland songsters, the roar of the wind through innumer-
able trees, or the rushing waters through foaming rapids. To be sure
it is the sport of salmon or trout fishing, or hunting, that draws so
many to these northern streams. A few are tempted to seek rest in
the solitude of a wilderness, whilst still fewer go with some scientific
purpose in view, such as a better knowledge of our natural history
and resources. The members of our Dominion and Provincial natural
history surveys have done great service in this direction ; but the re-
sults of their observations are contained in reports not sufficiently
available for general purposes, and not sufficiently minute to suit the
specialist. What is needed is a studied and systematic investigation
of our forests, streams, mountains, plants and animals, in order to ac-
quire a fuller knowledge of the soil, climate and capabilities of the
province. This can be done to a great extent by amateur students
trained in our schools and colleges to observe and report accurately
upon the phenomena occurring about their own homes. They should
be taught to make observations with the barometer and thermometer ;
to make weather reports daily ; to study the rock exposures and soils :
to make maps on which would be outlined the courses of the streams
in their neighborhood, the lakes, cleared and wild lands, mountains,
valleys and plains ; to measure the length, course, velocity of current,
depth at various points of small streams in their vicinity ; to give the
dimensions and depth of lakes ; to measure the height of hills and
mountains, thus acquiring an insight into the use of the barometer and
level, and incidentally the importance of barometric readings at differ-
ent places ; to be able to distinguish at sight and classify the native
plants and animals of the vicinity, with observations on their habits,
mode of life, uses, appearance, occurrence. To these studies and ob-
servations might be added the survey of school grounds and adjacent
fields, the dimensions and height of the largest trees in the neighbor-
hood, the depth of the snow in the woods in winter, the dates of clos-
ing and opening of lakes and streams, the migrations of birds, and
other data that I will not here stop to detail, but which would be of
the greatest value to science if made with accuracy and regularity.
But how is all this to be done, and who is to do it? will be asked.

Children are born observers and investigators. They will become
interested in and readily undertake such observations as I have out-
lined above, under proper direction. Such work will not interfere
with school work, -it will rather stimulate and encourage a great ei

APPENDIX — THE PRESIDENT'S ADDRESS. 165

zest for knowledge at first hand. Very little of such work can be
done in the schoolroom. So much the better, if it is not, provided
that the impulse and direction come from the teacher, in the organiza-
tion of an Out-door club, a Ramblers' club, an Observation club, a
Snow-shoe club, or whatever it may be termed, provided there is a
definite end in view. Interested students will not be satisfied with
investigations in their own district. They will come to find out that
every hill, every valley, every river, stream, lake, bog, has some
peculiarity, in formation or in the life which inhabits it, which stamps
it as different from every other hill, stream, lake, etc., found elsewhere.
They will have an interest in comparing their own section with others,
and hence will travel into other sections or meet with other students
to compare the results of their observations. This is the spirit of
investigation that is abroad everywhere in this nineteenth century,
and one is surprised that it has not taken a greater hold in this
province, where so much awaits the enthusiastic and keen-eyed
explorer, and where such matchless scenery tempts him to its rivers
and woodlands.

In Massachusetts out-door clubs are found everywhere through the
state for the exploration of its mountains, hills and streams. Many
individuals in these clubs are tempted by fishing, hunting, or the mere
love of adventure, but others are investigating the occurrence and
extent of plant and animal life, and other out-of-door problems,
combining this free life with the healthful exhilaration that springs
from quest and discovery which give tone and relaxation to body and
mind. There have been many in our own province who have united
this spirit of scientific investigation with a keen love of nature, and
among many I may mention the late Edward Jack, C. E , whose
knowledge of the natural history and resources of the province were
gained through explorations' for many years, during summer and
winter, over large areas of New Brunswick. If the results of these
explorations, which were published from time to time in newspapers
and magazines in Canada and the United States, could be collected
and published, they would stimulate many amateur explorers to collect
and publish information about sections of the province that are too
little known. We have all been greatly interested in the physiographic
and natural history notes that Dr. Ganong has furnished this Society,
the results of his explorations in different parts of the province; and
we have endeavored to give the widest publicity possible to these
notes, with the hope that they will direct the attention of our amateur

166 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

naturalists and explorers to the rich field for observation that awaits
them in New Brunswick. Dr. Ganong has pointed out that the
highest mountain in the province is as yet a matter of conjecture >
that the heights of but very few mountains have been determined
with any degree of accuracy; and that a vast amount of information
in the location of tributaiy streams, in the size and depth of inland
lakes, with thorough and accurate measurements of mountains, lakes,
streams, is yet required before the maps in many sections of the
province can be reconstructed with accuracy. While the distribution
and occurrence of the flowering plants of the province have been
determined fairly well in a few sections, others have had only a pass-
ing glance by a few of our botanists, while vast areas of the province
have not been examined at all for plants. With the exception of our
mosses, ferns and algae, no attempts have been made since Professor
Fowler's list was published in 1879 to publish lists noting the occur-
rence of our lichens and fungi, the investigation of which promise to
yield rich results to the botanists of the future.

The examination into the occurrence and distribution of animal
life has not been as complete as one might wish, and there is conse-
quently much ignorance }ret as to the distribution of species, even of
the larger animals, found in the province. Since Mr. Chamberlain's
list of birds and mammals was published many years ago, no additional
results have been made public. Dr. Cox has been steadily working
up the fishes. No cne appears to be occupying the field of inverte-
brate zoology since Dr. Ganong published his results twelve years ago,
and the field of insect life, in which Mr. Mcintosh has made so pro-
mising a beginning in our own vicinity, has no worker outside of our
society in the whole province, — -at least no worker who publishes
results. When this Society last year, through the generosity of a
friend, offered a series of prizes for the best collections of weeds,
insects and fungi, the results were meagre and disappointing, so far as
the province at large is concerned. And yet the work done by our
Society is on the whole very encouraging. It is to be hoped that as
many as possible of our members will meet on the Restigouche this
year with the Summer School of Science and give what encouragement
we can to that bodv in its efforts to encourage the study of science.

But the workers are too few. Why is it 1 There should lie hun-
dreds of workers, not only in the cities but in the country districts,
where now there is but one, or at least only a very few. These should
be investigating and publishing their investigations iii local papers, or

APPENDIX — THE PRESIDENTS ADDRESS. 167

corresponding for information with the members of the Natural

History Societies already established in the province. Is there a lack
of interest in natural science among young people 1 There would not
be if an interest is once aroused and some pains taken to maintain it.
We all remember that when our summer camp was held at Lep'reau
what an active interest was taken in our investigations and at our
evening meetings by the residents, both young and old, of the place.
Two years ago, at St. Martins, you will remember what a large num-
ber of bright and intelligent? students accompanied us on our excur-
sions and gathered at our evening lectures. These had been trained
to observe at the excellent school in that place ; and it is to the
teachers and schools that we must look for a foundation of the habit
of trained observation, if the natural history of the province is to be
studied so that the results will far exceed what has been accomplished
already. The grand scenery of our province, its resources and natural
history, should be examined by scores of active and enthusiastic young
people to collect data, for which the scientific world has long been
patiently waiting. But the greatest advantage would be to young
people themselves in awakening their interest in the capabilities and
fine natural scenery of New Brunswick, thus begetting a wholesome
admiration and respect for their own country— a kind of loyalty that
needs to be patiently and insistently cultivated.

168 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

REPORT OF THE BOTANICAL COMMITTEE.

The Committee on Botany reports the discovery of several species
and varieties of plants new to the province, to which may be added
the occurrence in fresh localities of a few of our rarer species, which
will furnish data in the preparation of a revised list of New Brunswick
plants. The committee regrets that there are so few workers, and
would urge on all interested in this science the importance of investi-
gating and making yearly reports of the plants which may come under
their observation, either in their own vicinity or in their excursions
from home. Such information in regard to our weeds, as well as of
our fungi and other plants too little known, is greatly needed.

In the list appended the names of species and varieties new to the
province are printed in full faced type. The numbers correspond to
those in Fowler's catalogue (Bulletin IV). All those found on the
Nipisiguit and Tobique lakes and rivers were collected by Messrs.
Ganong and Hay on their recent trip across the province.

10rt. Ranunculus circinatus, Sibth. Nipisiguit Lakes.

222a. Myriopliylluin alterninoruin, D. C. Nipisiguit Lakes.

241) Cicuta bulbifera, L. Nipisiguit Lakes.

•_'4s Conioselinum Canadense, Torr and Gray. Nipisiguit River.

■2S') Viburnum panciflorum, Pylaie. Nipisiquit River.

L'liii'f. V. acerifolium, L. Parish of Dufferin", Charlotte Co. Vroom.

311 Aster Novi-Belgii, L. Nipisiguit River.

312a. A. juneeus, Ait. Nipisiguit River.

314 A. linariifolius, L. Nipisiguit River.

346 Artemisia caudata, Michx. Bull's Island, opposite Woodstock. Hay.

:v.)\'i. Vacciniuni uliginosum, L. Bald Mountain, Nipisiguil River.

4(111 Pyrola secunda, L., var. pumila, Cray. Head of Tobique Lakes.

Jo; P. chlorantha, Swarbz. Nipisiguil River.

,'U7". Euphorbia maculata, L. Denis Stream, near St. Stephen, Vroom.

tili.") .JuncusBa.ltic.us, Dethard. Nipisiguit River,

tiTI .1. pilocarpus, E. Meyer. Nipisiguil River.

tiT'.i Sparganium simplex, Hudson. Nipisiguil River.

697 Potamogeton Spirillus, Tuckerman. Nipisiguil Lakes.

701a. P. heterophyllus, Schreb. Tobique hakes.

7117 p. pusillus, L. Nipisiguil Lakes.

7.">s Cares Scoparia, Schk., var. minor, Boot, Nipisiguil River.

768 C. stricta, ham., var. Nipisiguil River.

APPTNDIX — REPORT ON ZOOLOOY. 169

7"ii C. fusca, All. Nipisiguit River.

783a. ( '. laxiflora, Lam., var. varians, Bailey. Nipisiguit River.

7W> C. rlliformis, L. Nipisiguit River.

SOU ( '. lanuginosa, Michx. Nipisiguit River.

811 C. utriculata, Boot., var. minor, Boot.

834 Alopecurus geniculatus, L. Nipisiguit River.

940 Lycopodium eomplanatum, L., var. ChaniEecypariSSllS, Nipisiguit
River.

I am indebted to Mr. AValter Deane and others, of Cambridge,
Mass., for identification of difficult species, and to Prof. L. H. Bailey
of Cornell University, for decisions on the carices.

G. U. HAY,
Chairman Committee on Botany.

REPORT ON ZOOLOGY.

The Committee beg to submit the following notes. Mr. Mcintosh
has prepared a list of the Butterflies found in the province, which will
be found in another part of the Bulletin. Next year it is the inten-
tion to publish further lists of our insects. The committee are pleased
with the great interest taken at the present time in zoological studies
in the province.

Insects.

During the present year, insects have not been noticeably injurious
with perhaps the exception of the Tussock Moth, Orgyia leucostigma.
Many of the trees in the city and suburbs were almost completely
defoliated by the caterpillars of this species, and judging from the
number of eggs on the trees at the present time, they will be very
numerous during the coming summer.

Wm, McIntosh.

Batrachians.

Hitherto but five species of Ranidae have been recorded as found
in New Brunswick. Rana catesbiana, R. clamata, R. virescens, R.
silvatica and R. palustris. (See Bulletin XVI. pp. 64-66, 1898.)

170 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

It has been my good fortune, during the past season, to. he able to
add to the list the Northern or Mink Frog, Rana septentrionalis.

The first specimens, which were identified by Dr. Philip Cox,
were taken in a small lake near Golden Grove Road. I afterward
saw two other specimens at Murphy's Lake, near Treadwell's place,
on the Loch Lomond Road, but only succeeded in capturing one of
them.

The specimens taken were as follows : — Length, two-and-a-half
inches ; back, dark brown, almost black with lighter greenish vermi-
culations ; white underneath, with a slight tinge of yellow on throat ;
muzzle green ; limbs more mottled than barred, much the same as
back ; tympanum slightly smaller than eye, colored brown. Fold-
down sides of back very slight, if any.

The markings of the backs of the younger were not so perfect as on
those full grown, and there were two rows of large oblong blackish
spots down the Lack, which are hardly discernible in the adults.

Chas. F. B. Rowe.

Birds.

The numbers refer to the list of birds printed in Bulletin 1. 1883

Section A.
(Species winch occur in St. John ami Kings Counties. I

147. Knot. Robin Snipe (Tringa canutus). A rare autumn visitant and only
one reported as taken at St. Martins on September 8, 188,1.
Notk. — A female taken at Red Head Beach on September 5, Isils, by
Win. Hare.
152. Red-backed Sandpiper. "Dunlin" (Tringa Alpina Pacifica) a rare
autumn visitant, two records, one each of I and 4.
Note. A female taken al <l>uae<M>n October 12, 1898, bj George Hair, Esq.
IH7. Rurdy Duck (Erismatura rubida). Onlj two instances of its occurence
known (in addition a male and female were reported in Bulletin \V1
:>■ 74) anil I now have in my collection a female taken at Wickliam,
on November It h, 1808, bj John < Iraft.

A. < rORDON LEAVITT.

A. GORDON LEAVITT.
WILLIAM M< tNTOSH,
('HAS. I-. B. ROWE,

Zoological ( 'ommittt e.

APPENDIX METEOROLOGICAL ABSTRACT FOR If 98.

171

£ W

- J

n O

•sra.iojg japnnqx

■ssnw i«v>x

•suii^o

'S3[iH[

•s.mojj

£

•s m m

•sjnoH

"S8IM

•ainoH

aa

•saiipj

•sjnoH

•sai;M

•sjmoH

H

•S 8I1PI

•sjnoH

H

'93IUtt

"

O

o

o

©

o

-

"-1

rH

o

o

o

3

„

_,

■»

-r

co

<N

o

co

t-

CO

to

i^

IO

o

■v

so

•e

t-

.-

so

m

a>

00

cc

*■*

"~

■"*

^

1-1

*""'

CO {- OJ

™ S5 =?

at ■-! e$

g: i- -w 5s « r;

^ 2

m ti a:

es o e» >—

•3 8

•sjnou

saiiw

•sjnou

•Asong

paipjVt pens ni^jj

uoivejidpa.ij

•papnop A'noqM=oi
: ssampnoio

•inmninijfl

•tunraiXBK

■oBapj

■jEaAioq

}S 'qgiH

o* co co m n

O CO CO

co as io «

o --o =i

« ; -

t- IO ■<# IH

>-> CS CC

CO CO CO

-T 0> CO OJ

io m ©>

co' — cs

t 0! «

0» C* CJ 0* IJ

It CO o —

CO

CO

CI

"

CM

""'

in

CO

3

o>

i-

o

©J

-

co

CO

-<s<

-

cDiiuOOQDOt'ltjcQ'*'

~C« CO © S> f ©i CO •— ©~
CO ?J CC « t- — CO si — >

8

e»

&

in

CC

o

s

»

•-

CO

CO

X

CO

"

£

©!

©>

©(

..

CO

©J

R

CO

CO

•*

11

CO

t-

o

CO

..

1 -

CO

©»

,.-

m

r»

©I

CO

*■*

0J

©?

ex

N

©j

u

3

5

o>

.-.

{-

z

■*

I

©»

ri

a

"'■'

c>

in

CO

©«

JZ

-

©»

-

»=

"*

t-

—

~

m

i-

in

*-

«

-

-

-

<*

=

X

*"

<-. —c CO CO -f

i- x j- in —

53 ^

■M

* p"

i =

y

o

r*

_

Es.

S
o

-4J

tN

X ' i

©

o

-

-1-1

c

3

J:

i — ;

Z

©

-

/.

o

0

r

>

tr

*

.—

CI

•aBaK

C> CO CO C! OJ OJ

03 =

>■ U

c ® B e

3 ^ ? B

< ao o ?5 a

BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY,

R [ A GNETIC DISTURBANCES.

I am indebted to Mr. W. P. Robinson, of the Canadian Pacific
Telegraph Co., for the following note :

The last magnetic disturbances of a serious nature were on Septem-
ber 9th, 1898, covering a period of five hours — from 11 a.m. to 5 p.m.,
St. John local time. The earth currents on this occasion were very
constant. We worked with Fredericton part of the time without
battery at either end. Although the manifestations of aurora were
brilliant that evening, our circuits were not affected at all after 5 p. M.
During the hours mentioned all circuits, east and west, were affected.
March 14th and 15th of 1898 we also observed magnetic disturbances,
on the latter date particularly being of unusually troublesome nature.
On that date the aurora was of remarkable brilliance. We were
affected between 2 and 9 p. m., local time. S. W. K.

EARTHQUAKE SHOCK, AUGUST 14, 1898.

A slight earthquake shock was felt on the above date at points on the
St. John River between Torryburn and Oak Point. The first shock was
felt at 3.09 a. m., the second at 3.14 a. m. (75th meridian time). The
first shock was preceded by a slight noise ; the second shock was
sufficiently strong to overturn light objects, and aroused many of the
residents at Ingleside, Westfield, Hampstead, Oak Point and Rothesay.
Mr. Shewen, who was at Rothesay, said it seemed like a train approach-
ing, followed by a shaking of the house. It was felt most severely in.

the vicinity of Oak Point.

S. W. KAIN.

APPENDIX — REPORT OF THE COUNCIL. 173

THIRTY-SEVENTH ANNUAL REPORT
OF THE COUNCIL

NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY

OF

NEW BRUNSWICK.

Your Council beg leave to submit the following report for the year
now ending :

The past year has been both active and progressive. More fre-
quent opportunities have been afforded the public to visit the museum.
The lecture courses have been excellent alike in variety and interest,
and the attendance at meetings more than usually satisfactory.

Membership.

Thirty-six members were added to the rolls in the course of the
year ; but we have had losses, caused by resignations, change of resi-
dence and death, which have reduced the actual gain to the Society to
twenty members.

We have to record the deaths of Henry F. Perley, who was for
many years a life member ; and of Mrs. Charles Medley, who took a
warm interest in the Society and its work.

Finances.

The Treasurer makes the following statement :

Receipts.

Balance from 1898 $ 31 56

Membership Fees 196 00

Bulletins sold 13 00

Interest on Investments 144 0U

Donations 37 00

Dividends from Botsford Estate 30 00

Prizes from Exhibition Association 20 00

Donation, James Manchester, Esq . . 100 00

Government Grant 1-5 00

Carried forward $696 56

174 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

Receipts carried forward $696 56

Exp> nditun .

Printing and distribution of Bulletin XVI $145 56

Prizes for Provincial Exhibition 100 00

Maintenance of Museum 223 74

Library : Books and binding 40 00

Miscellaneous 89 19

Balance 98 07

$696 50

It will be seen that a balance remains on hand, but the whole
amount will be required for the publication of Bulletin XVII.

Library.

For the first time in several years we are in a position to announce
real improvement in this department. After some correspondence
certain numbers required to complete several important series have
been secured. Sixty volumes have been bound. Not only have im-
portant additions been made by exchange, but some works on Ento-
mology and Geology have been purchased, thus providing students in
these branches with much-needed text books. The librarian recom-
mends the publication of a catalogue.

Publications.

Bulletin XVI, which was issued in the month of August, differs
from its predecessors in the size of the page, which has been enlarged.
It was necessary to print an edition of 600 copies, instead of 500 as
formerly, in order to meet the demands made upon it by a large and
growing exchange list and membership.

The articles are valuable and have been read with interest.
Dr. L. W. Bailey, S. W. Kain, John Moser, Dr. Matthew, Dr. W. F.
Ganong, and Dr. Philip Cox, each contributed.

The reports of the Fredericton Natural History Society, and the
Kings County Natural History Society, find a place in our Proceedings.

M DSEUM.

A new insect cabinet has been obtained, and good work has been
<lone by expert entomologists in naming specimens.

Among important accessions in other branches, the donations of
Dr. Reynold J. Kirkland, of Grand Rapids, Michigan, Miss Warner,
.and Geoffrey Stead, C. E., are worthy of special notice.

APPENDIX — REPORT OF THE COUNCIL. 175'

Lectures and Essays.

Nine regular meetings were held at which the following papers
were read :

1898.
Feb'y 2. (1) Study of Insects, by Wm. Mcintosh.

(•_') Xote on Turtles' Nests, by Henry F. Perkins.
March 1. (1) New Brunswick Thunder Storms in 1897, by S. \Y. Kain.
(Published in U. S. Weather Review, pp. 105-106, March 1898.)

(2) Gun Reports at Grand Manan, by W. B. McLaughlin.
Published in U. S. Weather Review, March 1898, together with

articles by Prof. W. F. Ganong and others on the same

subject.
This reprint reviewed in Nature, p. 353, August 11, 1898.
Nature, for June 9, 1898, p. 130 ; also gives synopsis of studies

1 iv an Italian on similar sounds in Umbria.

(3) Mean Sea-level at St. John, by E. T. P. Shewen, C. E.
(Published in Bulletin XVI, p. 78, 1898).

(4) Physiography of the Lepreau Basin, by Prof. W. F. Ganong.

(5) Note on Crayfish in New Brunswick, by Prof. W. F. Ganong.

(6) Note on Marine Invertebrates of the Western part of Bay de
Chaleur, by Prof. W. F. Ganong.

April 5. (1) Biographical Sketch of late R. Foulis, C. E., by Percy G. Hall.
(Published in New Brunswick Magazine,Yo\. I, pp. 247-256,1898.
(2) Habits of Birds, by A. Gordon Leavitt.
May 3. Notes on the Trees of New Brunswick, by W. S. Butler.

June 7. (1) Report of Delegate to the Royal Society, by W. J. Wilson.

(2) Early Forms of Decoration and Art, by Miss Jack.
Oct. 4. (1) Geological and Topographical Features of Newfoundland, by
Dr. Geo. F. Matthew.

(2) Xotes on Some Phenomena in Grand Manan, by D. I. W. Mc-
Laughlin. (Published in St. John Globe , October 6th, 1898),

Describes remarkable sound heard at midnight, September 15th,
1898 ; auroral display on evening of September 17th ; very
heavy ground swell on September 18th. Attributes the
heavy swell to hurricane which swept over West Indies on
September 10th.

Prof. A. W. Duff, among letters to the editor in Nature, Vol.
LIX, pp. 247-248, January 12th, 1899, refers to this heavy
ground swell in explaining the nature and cause of secondary
undulations in the Bay of Fundy and elsewhere.

(3) Note on Lack and Cost of a Topographical Survey of New
Brunswick, by Prof. W. F. Ganong.

Nov. 1. (1) Note upon Natural Pavements and their possible misinterpre-
tation in Arctueolog}7, by Prof. W. F. Ganong.
(2) Note, Attempts at Oyster Culture in Passamaquoddy Bay, by
Prof. W. F. Ganong.

176 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

1898.
Nov. 1. (3) Bird Enemies, Natural and Unnatural ; and why Birds should

be Protected, by A. Gordon Leavitt.
Dec 6. (1) New Brunswick Butterflies, by W. Mcintosh.

(2) Note on the Dip of the Magnetic Needle in New Brunswick, by

Prof. A. Wilraer Duff.

(3) Preliminary Outline for a Study of the Precise Factors Deter-

mining the Features of New Brunswick Vegetation, by Prof.
W. F. Ganong.

(4) Note on the Nature of the Mud in our many Mud Lakes, by

Prof. W. F. Ganong.
1899.
•Tan. 3. (1) Note, Upon Biological Opportunity in New Brunswick, by
Prof. W. F. Ganong.

(2) Note, Upon a Current Error as to the Location of (Nictor) Bald

Mountain, Tobique, by Prof. W. F. Ganong.

(3) Address, Economic and Social Conditions in Newfoundland, by

W. Frank Hatheway.

Elementary Series.
1898.

Jan. 11, 25. Elementary Talks and Laboratory Work on Bog and Pond De-
posits, directed by Dr. Geo. F. Matthew.'

Feb. 8, 15, 22. Talks and Laboratory Work on Plants, directed by President
Geo. U. Hay.

March 15, 22. Talks and Laboratory Work on Insects, directed by Wm.
Mcintosh.

March 29. Notes on Batrachians and Reptiles of New Brunswick, by Chas.
F. B. Rowe.

April 12, 19. Talks and Laboratory Work on Birds, directed by A. Gordon
Leavitt.

The Associates' Afternoon Series.
The weekly lecture, held on Thursday afternoon of each week,
enjoyed considerable popularity. Papers were read by Miss .lack,
Miss Eleanor Robinson, Miss Frances Murray, Miss Christine D.
Matthew, Dr. Geo. F. Matthew, Robert Matthew, and S. W. Kain.

General.

We have pleasure in announcing the complete success of the
assistant librarian scheme. The requisite number of new members
was found, and their fees amply covered all expenses. The assistant
has been at her post on Tuesday, Thursday and Saturday afternoons,
performing her duties in a manner that has given entire satisfaction,
Nor have her duties been light, for a great increase of visitors has
resulted. Formerly about one hundred and fifty persons registered in
the course of a year; during the past year over eleven hundred

APPENDIX — REPORT OF THE COUNCIL. 1 I i

names are entered, and as many as fifty persons (in this case mostly
school children) have examined the collections in a single afternoon.
No better argument for the continuance of the plan of more frequently
opening the museum to the public could be produced. The conversazione
held on the evening of June 29th, in honor of the members of the
Teachers' Institute, was a very pleasant affair, in spite of the fact that
the rooms were somewhat crowded. Addresses were delivered by His
Honor the Lieutenant Governor, His Worship Mayor Sears, and others,
after which the guests circulated through the museum, finding much
that was interesting and curious.

By the generosity of a well-known citizen the Society was enabled
to offer prizes for the best collections of insects, weeds and fungi.
Circulars setting forth the conditions of the competitions were distri-
buted throughout the province. Prizes were awarded for six collec-
tions,— four for insects, two for weeds.

Such competitions we believe to be very useful in stimulating the
study of natural history, and we trust that we may again be permitted
to offer such inducements to the young naturalists of our province.

At the request of the Exhibition Association the Society occupied
considerable space alongside of the exhibit of the Provincial Govern-
ment. The prize collections of plants were displayed on this occasion,
together with a lot of ores and other minerals and constituted an
attractive feature of the fair.

The Committee on Economics has continued to urge upon the
Dominion Government the desirability of erecting a plant for the
creosoting of timber at St. John. We believe that the government is
alive to the wisdom of such a course, and hope that they will soon
take steps in the matter.

Our thanks are due to the editors of the daily papers of St. John
for the free insertion of notices and reports of meeting, and to the
ladies and gentlemen who contributed to the various courses of lectures.

In the past year the Society has gained in membership, the lecture

courses have been more varied and extensive, the additions to the

museum and library have been important, and many hundi'ed visitors

have been attracted to the museum, including many of our young

people, in some of whom has doubtless been awakened an interest in

natural history, and from whom the ranks of our Society may in the

future be recruited. Respectfully submitted,

PERCY G. HALL,

Natural History Rooms, Market Building, Secretary to Council.

January 17th, 1899.

ITS BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTOKV SOCIETY.

FREDERICTQX NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

(Instituted February iind, 1895.)

The officers for the current year are :

L. W. Bailey, Ph. D., ------ - President.

G. X. Babbitt, --------- Vice-President.

John Brittain, --------- Secretary.

B. C. Foster, M. A., - - - - - - - - Treasurer.

H. H. Hagerman, B. A., ------ Curator.

Eight regular meetings were held during the year, at which papers-
were read as follows :

1898.

Mar. 21. Radiate Animals, by Dr. Bailey.

Apr. 1^. Electricity and the X-rays, by Dr. Bailey and Mr. <i. N. Babbitt.

May 16. Jottings by the Way. by Very Reverend Dean Partridge.

June 20. Under the Southern Cross, by Mr. H. E. West.

Oct. 17. Coal, by Dr. Bailey.

Ni>\ . 21. The Woodpeckers of New Brunswick, by W. H. Moore.

Birds and their Ways, by J.ohn Brittain.

Dec. l'.t. The Mountain Systems of North America, by Dr. Bailey.

1899.

Jan. 16. Electricity, by II. H. Hagerman, B. A.

Several donations have been made to the museum during the year.

JOHN BRITTAIN,

Secretary.

APPENDIX — REPORT OF KINGS COUNTY SOCIETY. 179

KINGS COUNTY NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

(Organized at Sussex, Kings County, N. B., October 2nd, 1897.)

The society had for president Mr. Robert King, A. B., until
September 3rd, 1898, when he resigned on account of moving to Mon-
treal, and Inspector R. P. Steeves, A. B., was elected president.

During the year closed October 1st, 1898, the society held ten
regular meetings.

The work of the year has been along the lines of collecting speci-
mens and reading of papers on scientific subjects. There have been
added to the scientific collections, eighty specimens in the five
branches, as follows : Geology and Mineralogy, 24 ; Entomology, 20 ;
Ornithology, 16 ; Zoology, 4 ; and Botany, 16.

During the year the following papers were read before the society :

Sea Plants in the Interior of New Brunswick, by R. King, A. B.

Plaster of Paris Methods in Blow Pipe Analysis, by R. King, A. B.

The Chicadees, by H. J. Petty.

A Canoe Voyage on the Restigouehe. by G. U. Hay.

Our Winter Birds, by W. N. Big-gar.

An Ice Age, by W. A. Alward, A. B.

The Structure and Characteristics of Birds, by Dr. S. H. Langstroth.

Spring Birds, by W. N. Biggar.

Spring Flowers of Kings County, by Milton Price.

Characteristics of the Frog, by Annie White.

The society has a registry department, with four divisions, for re-
cording observations in — Migrating of Birds, Leafing and Flowering of
Plants, Changes in Weather, and Observations in Insect Life. Each
division is under the management of an officer elected by the society.

During the year the society received as donations a number of
books from members, a set of Bulletins and Bye-Laws from the N. B.
N. H. Society, and a fine miscroscope from Mr. E. A. Charters.

Regular meetings are held in the Oddfellows' Hall the 1st Satur-
dav in each month, a 8 o'clock p. m.

WM. N. BIGGAR,

Secretary.

1897

Dec.

4.

1S9S

Feb.

5.

March

5.

5.

April

2.

2.

May

7.

June

i ■
4.

Sept.

4.

180 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

THE NATURAL HISTORY AND ANTIQUARIAN SOCIETY
OF PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND.

On the 28th March, 1889, Donald Montgomery, Superintendent
of Education in the Province, invited those interested to attend a
meeting in his office for the purpose of forming a Natural History
Society. Six gentlemen attended, but from this small beginning a
vigorous society developed, and continued its active co-operative work
until the winter of 1891-92, when it decided to discontinue its regular
public meetings lest they should in any way interfere with a course of
lectures upon Botany, being delivered under the auspices of the local
University Extension authorities, by Mr. Francis Bain, whose lament-
able death, in November 1894, was a great loss to the Society in that
it robbed it of its most valuable member and most frequent contribu-
tor to its lecture course. Still, while no public meetings were held,
the Society continued to exist, and it was felt that it would be desira-
ble to widen its scope, and thereby lighten the work of the few already
over-busy members upon whom would devolve the task of preparing
papers for the public meetings. Accordingly at a meeting held Jan-
uary 10th, of this year, the Society was re-organized with above name,
having added to its work the study of Provincial antiquities.

The following are the officers:
John Newson, Esq., --------- President.

John MacSwain, Esq., - - Vice-President.

Lawrence W. Watson, M. A., ------ Secy-Treas.

The above and Miss Peppy, Messrs. J. M. Duncan,

J. D. Seaman and W. J. Bulman, - Executive.

The new society hopes to publish a periodical Bulletin (probably
<|iiarterly) and desires exchanges, which may be addressed to the
Secretary at Charlottetown, P. E. [.

To give an idea of the work already done, we append a list of
papers read before the original society.

APPENDIX — REPORT OF PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND SOCIETY. 181

18S9.
-July 2. The Study of Island Botany. Francis Bain.
Sept. 4. The Ferns of P. E. Island. John MacSwain.

25. The Asters of P. E. Island. Francis Bain.
Now 14. Some Enquiry into the Ethnology of the Island. Col. J. Hunter.
Duvar.
1890.
April 20. The Red Sand-Stone of P. E. Island. Francis Bain.
May 12. Carnivorous Plants. Lawrence W. Watson, M. A.
June 9. The Animals of P. E. Island at the Beginning of the Nineteenth

Century. Geo. F. Owen.
July 14. Our Forest Trees. Hon. David Laird, P. C. (President).
1891.

The Pi-oposed Subway to the Mainland. Francis Bain.
Feb. 2. Insect Intelligence and Instinct. T. Leeming, M. D.

23. The Diseases of the Potato.* John MacSwain.
Mar. 12. Plants and their Uses. Rev. W. Hamlin, B. A.
Apr. 5. Plant Food and How they Obtain It. Prof. Schuttleworth.
1.3. The Life History of the Butterfly. L. W. Watson, M. A.

The Society has published several lists of plants of the province by
Messrs. MacSwain and Bain, which will likely appear, revised or sup-
plemented, in the proposed Bulletin of the Society.

IK:

BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

DONATIONS TO THE LIBRARY, 1898.

Donor's Name.

Residence.

'Work.

Royal Geographical Society

Trustees British Museum

Royal Society

Royal Colonial Institute

Geological Society

Director Royal Gardens

Manchester Geological Society

Biological Society

Liverpool Geological Society

Marine Biological Association

Naturalists' Field Cluh

Philosophical and Literary Society

Natural History Society

Royal Society of Canada

Ottawa Field Naturalists' Club

Department Inland Revenue

Department of Agriculture

Experimental Farms

Literary and Scientific Society

Entomological Society of Ontario

Hamilton Association

Natural History Society

Historical and Scientific Society of Manitoba. . . .

Nova Scotia Institute of Natural Sciences

Canadian Institute

Toronto Public Library

Astronomical and Physical Society

R. F. Stupart

Government of British Columbia ,

Dr. Geo. F. Matthew

Samuel W. Kain

New Brunswick Historical Society

G. U. Hay

Scientific Association of Trinidad

Australian Museum

Australian Association for Advancement of Science

LinnaL-an Society of N. S. W

New Zealand Institute

U. S. Bureau of Ethnology

U. S- Geological Survey

U. S. Fish Commission

U.S. National Museum

U. S. Dep't. of Agriculture (Botanical Division Y

U. B. Coast and Geodetic Survey

V. s. Weather Bureau

Smithsonian Institution

University of California

Cornell University

John Hopkins University

Leland Stanford, Jr., University

Boston Society of Natural History

Essex Institute

Maine State College

Society of Nat ural History

Academy of Natural Science

Geological Survey of Iowa

Iowa Academy of Sciences

New Y'ork Academy of Sciences

New York Microscopical Society

Linnaan Society of New York

do

do

Proceedings.
Journal.

do

do

Abs. of Proceedings.

Bulletins.

Manchester

Proceed, and Trans.

do

do

do

Plymouth

Journal.

Report.
78th Report.
Proceedings.

Glasgow

Ottawa

Proceed, and Trans.

do

do

Bulletins.

do

Census Reports.

do

Bulletins.

do

Transactions.

London, Ont

Can. Entomologist.

Journal.

Montreal

Can. Record of Scien.

Winnipeg

Report.

Proceedings.

Toronto

Transactions.

do

Report.

do

Transactions.

do

Mining Record.

St. John, N. B...

Pamphlets.

do

Six Yolumes.

do

Collections.

do

3 vols. His. Mank'd.

Port of Spain

Proceedings.

Sydney, N. S. W.

Report.

do

do

Elizabeth Bay. . .

Proceedings.

Wellington, N. Z.

Proceed, and Trans.

Washington

Reports.

do

Reports and Bulletins

do

do

do

Reports and Proceed.

do

Bulletins.

do

Report.

do

Weather Review.

do

Report.
Bulletins.

Berkeley, Cal . . .

Ithaca, N. Y

Bulletins.

Baltimore

Circulars.

Palo Alto, Cal....

Proceedings.

Boston

do.

Transactions.

Bulletins.

Buffalo

do

Davenport, Iowa

Proceedings, C vols.

Des Moines

Report, Vol. VII.

do

Proceedings.

New York

Journal

do

Abstract of Proceed.

do

Report.

APPENDIX — DONATIONS TO THE LIBRARY.
Donations to the Library — Continual.

183

Donor's Name.

Residence.

Work.

American Museum of Natural History

New York Public Library

University of New York

Colgate University

Natural Science Association of Staten Island.

-Rochester Academy of Natural Sciences

Society of Natural History ,

Academy of Natural Science ,

Minnesota Academy of Natural Sciences

Texas Academy of Science

Indiana Academy of Natural Sciences

California Academy of Sciences

Colorado Scientific Society

C G.Lloyd

Missouri Botanical Gardens

Field Columbian Museum

Societe Scientifique du Chili

National Museum

Royal Academy of Science

Comite Geologique du Russie

Imperial Academy of Sciences

Royal Academy

Ch. Janet

Institute of Geology

Geological Institute

Royal Society of Belgium

G. O. Sars, Esq

New York Bulletin.

do | Bulletins.

Albany Museum Report.

Hamilton Circulars.

New Brighton [proceedings.

Rochester, N . Y . do

Cincinnati do

Philadelphia. . . do

Minneapolis Bulletins.

Austin Transactions.

Indianapolis . . . Proceedings.
San Francisco . . . j do

Denver Transactions.

Cincinnati j Plates.

St. Louis I Report.

Publications.

Actes.

Annales.

Proceedings.

Memoirs.

Bulletins,
do

Pamphlets (8).

Bulletins,
do
do

Fauna Xorvegi* .

Chicago

Santiago

Montevideo

Stockholm

St. Petersburg. .
do

Barcelona

Paris

Mexico

Upsala

Brussels

Christiania

PURCHASED.

Insect Life. Vols. I-IV.

Insects of New York. Vols. I and II.

Manual of Paleontology, by Alleyne Nicholson. Vols. I and II.

A Text Book of Entomology, by Dr. A. 8. Packard.

Manual of Entomology, by Comstock.

184

RULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

DONATIONS TO THE MUSEUM, 1898.

Date.

Donor's Name and Description of Article.

March

April

May

June

October

United States National Museum. 17 Fossil Plants of the
Richmond (Va.) coal field, (" Rhcetic ") ; 40 Fossil
Plants of the Potomac formation.

Mr. Alfred Morrisey. Japanese Bird Skins.

Mr. Geo. E. Fairweather. Two St. John papers of the
year 1789.

Mr. J as. Patterson. Number of Marine Forms preserved
in alcohol.

Dr. R. J. Kirkland, Grand Rapids, Mich. 250 Fresh
Water and Land Shells.

Prof. J as. Fowler, Kingston, Ont. Number of mounted
plants.

E. T. P. Shewen, C. E. Specimens of polished marble from
Bras D'Or, C. B.

Mr. A. H. Hanington. Cocoon of the Emperor Moth.

Mrs. Jas. Warner. Collection of Shells, Egg cases of Conch
Shell, Spawn of Ray, from Gulf of Mexico.

Miss Agnes L. Warner. Collection of New Brunswick
plants.

Mk. W. Frank Hatheway. Stone Gouge, from Random
Sound, Newfoundland.

Mk. Samuel Lyons. Stone Gouge, from Westfield Beach.

APPENDIX — DONATIONS TO THE MUSEUM.

DONATIONS TO THE MUSEUM.— Continued.

185-

Date.

Donor's Name and Description of Article.

October

Geoffrey Stead, C. E. Geological specimens from New York.

JVor.

Mr. A. Gordon Leavitt. Black-hacked Gull ; Ichneumon

Fly.

Mr. C. G. Knott. Diseased root of Viburnum cassinoides.

Mr. Robert Murdoch. Diatomaceous Earth.

Dpc.

Mrs. Percy Owen-Jones. Granite ball, from Pot Hole,

Peterboro, Ont.

Miss Harriet Peters. Slate from Cape Town. South Africa

(near home of Cecil Rhodes).

Dr. Babbitt. Stone Pestle ; Skin roller and Arrow Heads,

from Oregon.

Miss Nannary. Ink-stand of California minerals, Bark and

wood of big redwood tree, California shells.

DONATIONS TO THE FUNDS, 1898.

James Manchester, Esq. (for Exhibition Prizes) $100 00

Anonymous 37 00'

$137 00'

186 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

Officers and Committees of the Natural History
Society for 1899.

Patron.
His Honor the Lieutenant Governor, Honorable A. R. McClelan.

Council for 1899.

President— Geo. U. Hay, M. A., F. R. S. C.

Vice-Presidents— William Murdoch, C. E., H. Geo. Addy, M. D.

Treasurer— Mr. A. Gordon Leavitt.

Secretary — Mr. Chas. F. R. Rowe.

Librarian — Mr. Samuel W. Kain.

Curators — Dr. Geo F. Matthew, W. Mcintosh.

Additional Members — J. Roy Campbell, W. Frank Hatheway, W. H.

Mowatt.
Assistant Librarian and Cikrator — Miss Edith McReath.

Associate Members' Branch.

President — Mrs. Geo. F. Matthew.
Secretary -Treasurer — Miss Edith McBeath.

Standing Committees for 1899.

Physics— Wm. Murdoch, Prof. A. Wilmer Duff, E. T. P. Shewen, C.E.
•Geology — Dr. G. F. Matthew, Prof. L. W. Baile}T, Geo. J. Trueman.
Ornithology — A Gordon Leavitt, A. Morrisey, Miss Annie Page.
Botany — George U. Hay, Mrs. William Bowden, James Vroom,

Mrs. H. Geo. Addy, Prof. W. F. Ganong.
Archaeology — Samuel W. Kain, F. E. Holman, William Mowatt,

Miss Alice Jack.
Library — Samuel W. Kain, Mrs. George C. Hay, C. F. B. Rowe,

Mrs. W. F. Hatheway.
Rooms I >r. H. Geo. Addy, Miss K. A. M. Cotter, Mrs. (Je... CJ. Hay,

C. F. B. Rowe, Wm. Mcintosh, Mis. F. E. Holman. _
Finance -A. Gordon Leavitt, J. Roy Campbell, W. F. Hatheway.
Press Samuel W. Kain, A. Gordon Leavitt, C. F. B. Rowe,

Miss Theodora Matthew, Miss Edith McBeath.
Lectures- Geo. U. Hay, Miss A. .lack, Dr. H. Geo. Addy, S, W. Kain.

A. Gordon Leavitt.
Publications — Dr. a. F. Matthew, Samuel W. Kain, George U. Hay.

A. Gordon Leavitt.
Microscopes — Dr. W. W. White, Wm. Mcintosh, Chas. F. 1'.. Howe.

BULLETIN

Natural History Society

NEW BRUNSWICK.

No. XVIII.

(Volume IV. Part III.

MARINE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY.

Received

Accession No. i i

Given by./. . \
Place,

***flo book op pamphlet is to be removed from tbe lab-
oratory uaithout the permission of the Trustees.

186 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

Officers and Committees of the Xatural History
Society for 1899.

Patron.
His Honor the Lieutenant Governor, Honorable A. R. McClelan.

Council for 1899.

President— -Geo. U. Hay, M.A., F. R, S. C.

Vice-Presidents — William Murdoch, C. E., H. Geo. Addy, M. D.

Treasurer— Mr. A. Gordon Leavitt.

Secretary — Mr. Chas. F. B. Rowe.

Librarian — Mr. Samuel W. Kain.

Curators — Dr. Geo F. Matthew, W. Mcintosh.

Additional Members — J. Roy Campbell, W. Frank Hatheway, W. H.

Mowatt.
Assistant Librarian and (Jinn/for — Miss Edith McBeath.

Associate Members' Branch.

President — Mrs. Geo. F. Matthew.
Secretary-Treasurer — Miss Edith McBeath.

Standing Committees for 1899.

Physics— Wm. Murdoch, Prof. A. Wilmer Duff. E. T. P. Shewen. C, V.
Geology— Dr. G. F.
Ornithology — A Go
Botany — George U
Mrs. H. Gee
A rch ecology — Sam u e
Miss Alice J
JAbrary — Samuel A

Mrs. W. F.

Rooms — Dr. H. Gee

C. F. B. Ro^

Finance — A. Gordo

Press Samuel W.

M iss Theodo

Lectures — Geo. U. ]

A. Gordon 1

Publications — Dr. (

A. Gordon I

Microscopes Dr. \\

1

BULLETIN

Natural History Society

NEW BRUNSWICK.

No. XVIII

(Volume IV,

Part III.]

PUBLISHED BY THE SOCIETY.

SAINT JOHN, N. B., CANADA :

Barnes & Co., Printers, 84 Prince William Street.
1899.

[Bull. Nat. Hist. Soc., N. Brunsw'k, XVIIL, Vol. IV, p. 189,
St. John.N. B.. June, 1899.]

ARTICLE I,

PRELIMINARY NOTICE OF THE ETCHEMINIAN FAUNA
OF NEWFOUNDLAND.

By Geo. F. Matthew, D. Sc, LL.D.

Read February 7, 1899.

For comparison with the known forms of the Etcheminian terrane
in New Brunswick and as a guide to other species which may be dis-
covered in it, the author describes here briefly, and figures the species
which have been found in the Etcheminian rocks of Newfoundland.

BRACHIOPODA.

Obolella c. f. chromatica, Billings. PI. I., fig. 1.

See 0. chromatica, Bill., Palseoz. Foss., vol. i., p. 7, fig. 7, a. to d.

A small Obolella, resembling the above species, was met with.
The surface is granulated, but shows undulations of growth and faint
obscure radiating lines.

KUTORGINA GRANULATA, n. Sp. PI. I., fig. 2, «. to d.

Another little shell, but with a straight hinge line, occurs. The
surface is minutely granulated ; concentric stria3 and faint radial lines
are visible. Size — Length, 4 mm ; width, 6 mm ; depth of ventral
valve, 1J mm.

This species is smaller than K. cingulata and diners in ornamen-
tation. It is about the size of K. pannula, but has not the diagonal
cancellation of that species.

190 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL BISTORT .SOCIETY.

GASTEROPODA.

SCENELLA C. f. RETICULATA, Billings.

c. f. Scenella reticulata, Bill. Palaeoz. Foss., vol. ii., pt. i., p. 77,
(no figure).
Some shells were observed which appear to be of this species of
Billings. The ornamentation is of sharp thread-like radiating ridges,
which, without break, cross over fine striae of growth. Size of the
aperture, 7x9 mm.

Scenella c. f. retusa, Ford.

Scenella c. f. retusa, Ford. Am. Jour. Sci., 3 ser., vol. v., p. 213
figs. 2 and b (page 214).
Another species occurs, smaller than S. reticulata, and distinguished
by its ornamentation. The radiating ridges are broader than in this
species and both radiating and concentric ridges are obscured by a more
distinct granulation of the surface.

RANDOMIA, n. gen.

This genus does not differ in form from Palseacmaea, but it is char-
acterized by strong radiating ridges, which cross the cencentric ridges
and prominent undulations of growth, that mark the shell. Mr. E. O
Ulrich says that the species of Palseacmtea have only concentric lines

Randomia Auror/e, n. sp. PI. I., figs. 3 a to c.

This is one of the most characteristic species of the Etcheminian ;
and a species, probably the same, occurs in the St. John Basin of
Eopaheozoic rocks. The surface is marked by very fine, sharply raised
lines, radiating from the apex toward the margin ; about six are found
in the space of one millimetre. Size Opening of the shell 10x25 mm.;
height 11 mm.

The very prominent ridges, straighter dorsal line, and fine radia
ting striae distinguish this species from Sienotkeca (!) rugosa and
S. (?) panpera, Bill.

Parmopiiorella (?) paupera, Bill. sp.
Stenotheca paupera, Bill. Pal. Koss., vol. ii., pt. i., p. 77 (no figure).

A few examples occur which agree with this species. The shells
are compressed laterally, indicating thai il had a narrow, oval aperture,

ETCHEMINIAN FAUNA OF NEWFOUNDLAND. 191

Platyceras transversum, n. sp. PI. I. figs. 4 a and b.

This is one of a group of three species of small gasteropods, occa-
sionally met with at Smith Sound. They are found buried in the
calcareous mud of the upper limestone, and also within the tubes of
Hyolithes, etc., where they probably concealed themselves after the
death of the animals which formed those tubes.

The surface of all those species is minutely granular, and in none
does the curve make a complete whorl, but the umbo projects too far
to allow the shell to be classed with PaUeacmsea or Parmophorella.
P. transversum is considerably larger than the other two, and is
distinguished by its fine, closely set growth lines.

Platyceras radiatuji, n. sp. PI. I., figs. 5 a and b.

This is proportionately a longer species with more projecting umbo.
[t is distinguished by about a dozen fine, narrow, sharp ribs on the
dorsum, radiating from the umbo.

This differs from any described Cambrian or Ordovician species.
It approaches the genus Heliconopsis, Ulrich and Scofield ; but its
strongly curved back and projecting umbo separate it.

Platyceras cymbula, n. sp. PL I., figs. 6 a and b.

Distinguished from the preceding by its smooth surface, and from
the first by its sub-carinate dorsum, and less concave slopes in the
anterior region.

LAMELLIBRANCH1ATA.

Modiolopsis thecoides, n. sp. PL I., figs. 7, a to c.

Only the right valve is known ; it is remarkable for its long, nar-
row shape and ear-like anterior end. When this is concealed, the
shell is easily mistaken for a Hyolithes, the form of the posterior end
and the sculpture of the surface, being like the dorsal side of a tube
of that genus. The shell is about 9 mm. long and 4 mm. wide.

ANNELIDA.

UROTHECA, n. gen.

This genus based on chitinous tubes from the Etcheminian and
Cambrian is described in an article to be communicated to the Royal
Society of Canada, May 1899.

192 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

Urotheca pervetus, n. sp. PI. I., fig. 8.
Only the distal end of this tube is known, and that pressed flat
in the stone so that the form of the orifice is not seen. Size — Length
of the part preserved 35 mm., width 3£ mm. ; rate of tapering, 1 in
17 mm.

Helenia granulata, n. sp. PI. II., figs. 7, a to e.

Small, much flattened, curved tubes, the curve not in one plane,
but the tube somewhat twisted. The tubes enlarge towards the
aperture so that in 10 mm. of the length the width is doubled.
Width of the orifice 2^ mm. Surface minutely granulated.

The form and curve of the fragments of these tubes cause them
to resemble those of the genal and pleural spines of trilobites, but
we have found nothing resembling the cheeks or head of trilobites in
the bed where these fragments are found.

Hyolithellus micans, Billings, (pars). PI. II., figs. 1., a to rf.

These appear to be much smaller than the limit of size assigned by
Mr. Billings for his species. But I surmise that objects similar to
these have been included under his name. Size — The longest are
20 mm. with a width of 1 mm. The surface, though shining, is not
quite smooth, but is minutely granulated. These objects appear to be
clustered in the shale, as though they were gregarious, or were attach-
ments of larger organisms.

Hyolithellus ( 1 ) flexuosus, n. sp. PI. I., fig. 9.

A small slender tube of which the proximal end is very slender,
sti'aight and hyaline. This enlarges somewhat abruptly into a terete,
opaque tube, which is curved in one or more planes. Rate of taper of
the known part 1 in 20 mm.

This species differs from Hyolithes Icevigatus, Linrs., (Torellella,
Holm.) in its circular form and calcareous substance.

The slender, cylindrical, hyaline tube in which this species begins
was possibly membranaceous ; if chitinous it was extremely thin.

Coleoides typicalis, Wale. PI. II., fig. 2.

Objects which appear to agree in all respects with this species are
common with Hyolithellus, from which some can hardly be distin-
guished ; they have a length of 10 mm. and a width of 1^ mm.

ETCHEMINIAN FAUNA OP NEWFOUNDLAND. 193

Orthotheca pugio, n. sp. PI. II., fig. 4 a to d.

An elongated, thick shelled species having the tube somewhat
flattened on the dorsal side, and arched longitudinally toward the
ventral side. The known part of the tube is about 27 mm. long, with
an orifice of 6 mm. The whole length would be about 40 mm. if the
shell preserved its taper and were not decollated.

This species is like Hyolithes communis, Bill, but has no " dorsal
lip." From 0. DeGeeri, of the Swedish Cambrian, it differs in its
rounded dorsal side and granulated surface. 0. Johnstrupi, of the
same country, has a more slender form and different sculpturing.

Orthotheca sica, n. sp. PI. II., figs. 5, a to e.

This species which is of about the same size as 0. pugio, may be
distinguished by its smoother surface, more triangular section and
more distinct surface stria?.

Mutation. PL II., figs. 6, a and b.

This in place of a gradually rounded ventral side shows a flattening
of the middle quarter of that side. In this it approaches H. quadri-
costatus Shaler and Fcerste, of the Attleboro fauna, but is a true
Orthotheca, while the latter by its form is a Hyolithes.

Orthotheca Stiletto. PI. II, figs. 3, a and b.

A small, slender, straight species, with a very tenuous tube. It
has a concave dorsal side, and a rounded, convex ventral side. Rate
of tapering about 1 in 8. The dorsal side has fine, closely set strne
of growth just visible with a strong lens.

This species is near 0. affinis, Holm, of the Paradoxides beds of
Sweden, but is not half the diameter and has a more elongate form.

Orthotheca bayonet, n. sp. PI. III. fig 1 a to /

Tube very thin and with concave slopes on three sides, two of
which are ventral. The dorsal side is concave in the middle and
convex towards the angles. Each ventral slope is convex toward the
middle of the ventral side and concave toward the dorsal edge. Longi-
tudinally the tube curves toward the ventral side, especially toward
the apex.

Sculpture. — The outer surface is finely granulated, and traversed
by fine transverse striae

194 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

This tube was very fragile and is found in fragments, of which the
largest indicates an aperture of 8 mm. Taper of the tube 1 in 5.

This species differs from Hyolithes Americanus in the absence of a
lip, and in having the lateral angles more acute than the median angle
of the ventral side. It differs from all Orthothecfe described by
Walcott (under Hyolithes) in its angular form. It differs from all
those described by Holm in the acuteness of the lateral angles, and by
the concave form of the ventral slopes near those angles.

This form of Orthotheca seems not to have survived the Etche-
minian time, as no similar one is found in the Cambrian.

Hyolithes excellens, Bill. PI. III., figs. 3, a to i.
This is the leading species of the Etcheminian fauna of Smith
Sound. It is a true Hyolithes of advanced type, in which a part of
the ventral surface has passed over to the dorsal side. It thus belongs
to the " Magnidorsati " section of G. Holm, which this author con-
siders the higher section of Hyolithes, sens, strict. In H. excellent the
proximal part of the tube has a more triangular section than the
distal, and this is seen to be due to the two sides of the tube here
possessing their original integrity of form, and no portion of the
ventral has passed over to the dorsal side. Hence this species at
first was among the Equidorsati, but in growing to maturity became
a Magnidorsatus.

Hyolithes rugosus, n. sp. PI. III. figs. 4, a and h.

A small, slender species, having the dorsal side flatly rounded, and
gently curved towards the ventral side longitudinally.

The ventral side is marked by prominent transverse ribs, which
are closely set on the lower part of the tube, but in the upper fifth
are more distant. Surface minutely granulated. Length 11 mm.;
width about 3| mm.

Mr. Walcott has described an object similar to this, but smaller,

as Hyolithellu8 micans, var. rugosa ; it differs in having a longitudinal

striation between the ridges of growth, where this species has only a

granular surface.

CRUSTACEA.

Ai'tyctiopsis terranovicus. PI. III., fig. 5

Each valve of this little crustacean has an oval lenticular form
with the widest part one-third from the anterior end. The hinge has

ETCHEMINIAN FAUNA OF NEWFOUNDLAND. 195

a strong fold which is more than two-thirds of the whole length of the
shield. The lower and posterior border has a distinct marginal fold.
The front border is angulated, but no rostral piece is known.

tllllt. ARCUATA. PI. III., fig. 6.

This form is somewhat smaller, is rounded in front, and the shape
is more elongate.

The surface in these little shells is granulated and there are traces
of concentric grooving. The largest is about 3|x2 mm., the mutation
about 3x1 J mm

SUMMARY.

The peculiarities of this fauna as distinguished from the Cambrian
are the following :

1. Great preponderance of the tube worms {Hyolithiihe, etc).

2. Absence or rarity of trilobites.

3. Minuteness of the Gasteropods except Capulidse.

4. Minuteness of the Brachiopods.

5. Minuteness of the Crustaceans.

The two special types of the Etcheminian fauna are, among the
Hyolithidae OrthotHeca bayonet, and among the Gasteropoda Randomia
Aurora. The minuteness of the Lamellibanchs is not peculiar to the
Etcheminian as the Cambrian species are not much larger.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PLATES.
Plate I.

Fig. 1. Obolella c. f. ehromatica, Bill. Ventral valve, mag. \. See
p. 189.

Fig. 2. Kutorgi/na granulata, n. sp. a Ventral valve; — b Dorsal

valve ; both mag. \; — c Dorsal (?) mould of, (/ Vent.

ral, hinge seen from behind. Both mag. |. See p. 1S9.

Fig. 3. Randomia Auroras, n. gen. et sp. a Side view, restored from
two examples ; — b Same seen from above ; — c Smaller
entire shell. All natural size. See p. 190.

Fig. 4. Platyceras transversum, n. sp. a Side view ; — b Same seen
from above. Mag. ^. See page p. 191.

Fig. 5. Platyceras radiatum, n. sp. a Side view ; — b Seen from
above. Mag. |. See p. 191.

196 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

Fig. G. Platycerds cymbula, n. sp. a Side view; — b Seen from above.
Mag. f. See p. 191.

Fig. 7. Modiolopsis thecoides, n. sp. a Interior of the right valve; —
b Section near the hinge ; — c Section near the posterior
end. All mag. \. See p. 191.

Fig. 8. Urotheca pervetus, n. sp. Distal part of the tube. Nat.
size. See p. 192.

Fig 9. Hyolithellus flexuosus, n. sp. Proximal end of the tube.
Mag. -f- Seep. 192.

Plate II.

Fig. 1. Hyolithellus micans, Bill, a A group of paired tubes; — b
Another group ; — c A third group, all mag. • \—d Groups
. of the tubes in association with Orthotheca bayonet. Nat.
size. See p. 192.

Fig. 2. C oleoides typicalis, Walcott. Part of a tube. Mag. 11". See
p. 192.

Fig. 3. Orthotheca stiletto, n. sp. a The tube ; — b Section at the
aperture, both mag. \. See p. 193.

Fig. 4. Orthotheca j)U(/io, n. sp. a A tube decollated ; — b Form of
aperture ; — c Section at the decollation; — d A smaller ex-
ample, side view; — e An operculum, possibly of this species.
All mag, |. See p. 193.

Fig. 5. Orthotheca sica, n. sp. a Decollated tube, ventral side :

b Form aperture ; — c Another tube with more rounded
angles; — d Form of the aperture. All mag. ~ ; — e An
operculum, possibly of this species. Mag. |. See p. 193.

Fig. G Orthotheca sica, quadricostate mutation ; a Ventral view of
the tube; — b Section at the aperture. Both mag. -r
Seep. 193.

Fig. 7. Ifeleniagranulata, n. sp ; a Side view of the tube ; -b Front
view of another tube. Both mag. 'j ; — c Section of the
second tube. Mag. \ ; — d Large end of a tube, mag. '\ :
— e Section, mag. {. See p. 192.

T7u4e I

la.

3C

V/M'U'JS".'.'
PWWBftv-r-

J CL

7h

7c

JPU-& 71

11 la.

^ \

1b u

11

3h

71 7<

r«-

6h

o

SA

Tloufc III

*5a

3d

J

ECTHEMINIAN FAUNA OF NEWFOUNDLAND. 197

Plate III.

Fig. 1. Orthotheca bayonet, n. sp. a The tube, ventral side; — b A
tube showing the dorsal side ; both nat. size ; — c Side view
of a small example, mag. f ; — d Form of the aperture of
the tube ; —e Section toward the small end, both mag. \ ;
— /Outline of the distal end of several tubes, to show the
taper; mag. f. See p. 193.

Fig. 2. Urotheca. A small species of the Mt. Stephen fauna, figured,
to show the larval tube of the young worm ; mag. \.
Seep. 191.

Fig. 3. Hyolithes excellens, Bill, a Dorsal side of the tube ; — b Side
view ; — c Form of the aperture ; — d Section near the small
end ; — e Operculum of this species ; —/Outline of side
view ; all nat. size ; — g Side view of a young opercule ;
— A A still smaller opercule, probably of this species ;
— i Side view of same, the three mag. \. See p. 194.

Fig. 4. Hyolithes rugosus, n. sp. a Dorsal side of tube ; — b Side
view of tube; both mag. f. See p. 194.

Fig. 5. Aptychopsis terranovicus, n. sp. Side view of right valve ;
mag. a. See p. 194.

Fig. 6. Aptychopsis terranovicus, mut. arcnata. Side view of right
valve; mag. ^. Seep. 195.

P. S. — In the above article is described briefly the Etcheminian
Fauna in the locality where it shows to best advantage. Those who
wish to know the stratigraphical relations of the rocks which contain
it, are referred to the Annals of the New York Academy of Science,
Vol. XII., No. 2, pp. 41-56.

198 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

ARTICLE II.

PRELIMINARY NOTICE OF THE ETCHEMINIAN
FAUNA OF CAPE BRETON.

By G. F. Matthew, LL.D., D.Sc, F.R.S.C.

(Communicated by permission of the Director of the Geological Survey of Canada,
3rd of October, 1899.)

The following brief notice of the new fauna recovered from the
Etcheminian rocks of Cape Breton is presented for the information of
those who are working in the oldest fossiliferous deposits ; and is col-
lateral to a similar notice of the Etcheminian fauna of Newfoundland
presented to the Society in the early part of this year.

The physical conditions and history of the Etcheminian deposits in
Cape Breton are very closely parallel to those in New Brunswick. In
both regions there was volcanic action in districts adjoining the areas
where the sediments of this age accumulated ; or there were exposed
areas of volcanic deposits (ashes, etc.,) from which much of the sedi
ment was derived. This is a more noticeable condition in the Lower.
Etcheminian of Cape Breton, than in that of New Brunswick ; but the
Upper Etcheminian of both regions had a very similar physical history.

Appended to this notice (See Plate IV.) are two sections of the
Cape Breton Cambrian and Etcheminian, from which the relations of
the two terranes in that region will be seen, and from which it appears
that the Cambrian of that island rests sometimes on the Etcheminian,
and at others directly upon the older felsites and syenites which form
prominent ridges of land on that island.

As regards the Cambrian it is to be noted that these sections show
no Lower Cambrian nor have the faunas of this part of the system
(Paradoxides and Prololenus) been recognized in Cape Breton. The
fauna which is found in the lowest sandstones and shales above the
basal conglomerate of the Cambrian, appears to be Upper Cambrian ;
certainly all the faunas above the latter pertain to the upper horizons.

ETOHEMINIAN FAUNA OF CAPE BRETON. 199

It is therefore more reasonable to expect a discordance of strata in this
region between the Cambrian and the Etcheminian than in the region
of New Brunswick where the Lower Cambrian is present.

The conditions for the preservation of fossils seem to have favor-
ed more the region of Cape Breton, for there we have a fuller fauna
than in New Brunswick.

Though fossils are also more abundant in the Etcheminian of
Newfoundland than in the last named province, that fauna is quite
dis-similar from the one in Cape Breton. This latter fauna has a
facies similar to that of the Protolenus Zone in New Brunswick, if we
eliminate the trilobites from the latter. In fact every geuus in this
new fauna has its counterpart in the Protolenus Zone ; but when it
comes to a comparison of species, we cannot find one that is common
to the two faunas. Hence we must believe there is a greater differ-
ence in age than at first sight appears.

It is to be remarked however, that if the sequence of similar physi-
cal events were contemporary in the two regions, the most characteristic
part of the known fauna of the Etcheminian in New Brunswick lies
below the fossiliferous zones in Cape Breton from which came the fossils
described in the following pages. Hence this fauna might be expected
to show a closer relation to that of the Protolenus beds than any
other Etcheminian fauna, described, especially if we regard also the
similar physical conditions which environed the two faunas.

DESCRIPTION OF THE FOSSILS.
Lingulella Gregwa, n. sp. PL I., figs, la to /.

This species has a long acuminate beak to the ventral valve like
Lingulepis pinniformis of a later fauna, but the dorsal valve is quite
different ; its central group of scars is advanced far to the front, as in
Obolus, and in connection with this feature a flattened band traverses
the centre of this valve ; this flattened area is narrower than that of
Mickivitzia monilifera and Obolus major, and it is a smaller species
than the latter.

Sculpture. — The surface of the valves of this species has a dull
appearance, and under the lens the ornamentation is resolved into
irregular concentric beaded ridges.

Size. — Length of ventral 12 mm., width 9 mm. The dorsal valve
is 3 mm. shorter than the ventral.

200 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

This species is like Lingulella acutangulus Roem. of the Upper
Cambrian of Texas, but is larger and differs in the more acuminate
apex of the ventral valve, etc.

Lingulella tumida, n. sp. PI. I., figs. 2a to c.

A small round, thick-shelled species, of which only the ventral
valve is known. It resembles an Obolella in form, but has a corneous
test, and a pedicle groove.

Sculpture. — The surface of the shell is marked by rounded con-
centric ridges, some of which show a beaded crest.

Size. — Length 6 mm., width 5 mm.

Lingulella Martinensis, of the Protolenus Zone, is something like
this in form, but is much larger. Lingulella Ella, H. k W., of the
Middle Cambrian of the West, is like this in size and outline, but the
surface markings are finer.

We now come to two species whose reference to the genus Lingu-
lella is doubtful, because we have not recognized the pedicle groove,
and because especially as regards the second, the form, etc., is sug-
gestive of Lingula rather than Lingulella.

Leptobolus ( 1 ) collicia, n sp. PI. I., figs. 3a to e.

A small oval species somewhat pointed in front. Margins flat-
tened, especially in the posterior half. Remarkable for the peculiar
spoutlike flexure at the front of the dorsal valve, acquired in the
later stages of growth. A corresponding pair of grooves appears in
the anterior part of the ventral valve. This peculiarity of form simu.
lates the sinus of the articulate Brachiopoda.

Sculpture. — This consists of fine concentric ridges, visible only with
the aid of a lens. These sometimes anastomose.
'Size.- Length 10 mm., width 6 mm.

Leptobolus atavus, n. sp. PI. II., figs. \a to/

Shell calcareo-corneous. Ventral valve somewhat pointed behind.
Hinge area very small and obscure, not more than a tenth of the
length of the valve. Margins of the valves arched downward all
around, except at the apex of the ventral valve. The median depres-
sion of the dorsal valve indicates that the central group of muscles
are set far forward in that valve, as they are also in the ventral valve.

ETCHEMINIAN FAUNA OP CAPE BRETON. 201

Sculpture. — Somewhat obscure fine concentric stria}, visible with
a lens, are present on all parts of the valves. A very fine granulation
also can be seen. The outer layer of the shell, which carries the
ornamentation, is calcareous.

Size. — Length 5 mm., width, 3| mm.

This species is of about the same size and geological age as
Lingulella ferruginea, Salter ; but if Davidson's figure is correct chat
species had a hinge area twice as long as this. It may be further
observed that Davidson has included in this species forms from much
higher zones of the Cambrian (Dolgelly group, etc.), but the char-
acters are so vague that any small oval species might be referred to
L. ferruginea. We are subject to the dilemma of choosing between
two or several species which by form and size represent L. ferruginea,
but which by other characters are found to be distinct from each
other ; hence, if one is L. ferruginea, the others are not.

Lingulella Granvillensis, Walcott, of the New York Cambrian, is
of about the same size as this, and approaches it in form, but the
moulding of the interior of the dorsal valve differs.

Pal^eobolus, n. sub-gen.

Distinguished from Obolus proper by the close approximation of
the vascular trunks, as shown by their impression on the ventral
valve, and by the forward direction of its branches. The callus of
the visceral cavity of this valve is correspondingly narrow (therefore
the muscle scars are also approximated). Yet the valve is round as
in Obolus.

In default of more exact criterea, we have adopted here and
elsewhere the following characters for distinguishing Obolus from
Lingulella, — roundness of outline, short cardinal area and depressed
beaks, advanced position of muscle scars in the valves, and strong
arch of the vascular trunks in the ventral as well as the dorsal
valve. There is, however, a more important distinction, which, in
consequence of imperfect preservation of the valves, can seldom be
observed, that is, the position of the secondary muscles of the central
group in the ventral valve, as compared with the great muscle of that
group. In Obolus they are lateral, but in Lingulella anterior to the
great muscle. This shows a radical difference of structure between
the two genera. It will be observed that the relation of these muscles
is as yet unknown in Palpeobolus.

202 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

Pal^obolus Bretonensis. PI. II., figs. 2a to i.

Oblately orbicular. Valves evenly rounded from the centre,
except that the borders are flattened at the sides and front. Both
dorsal and ventral valves somewhat pointed at the umbo, which is
depressed in both valves. Interior of the ventral. — This has a broad
hinge area and a triangular pedicle groove. The visceral cavity has
two pairs of diverging ridges, which mark the advance of the lateral
muscles during the growth of the shell. Between the outer and the
inner pair originate the vascular trunks, which in going forward throw
off branches at an acute angle. Interior of the dorsal valve. — This
valve has a broad, transversely striated hinge area. The visceral
cavity is traversed by two pair 5 of diverging ridges, more widely
divergent than those of the ventral valve ; there is also a strong-
median septum along the middle of the valve. The central group of
muscle scars are about a fifth from the front of the valve.

Sculpture. — The whole outer surface, except close to the umbo, is
ornamented with sharp concentric ridges which occasionally anasto-
mose ; these ridges have fine, faintly marked, radiating stria? on their
posterior slopes, and are obscurely crenulated along their crests.

Size. — Length 15 mm., width 17 mm. Dorsal valve somewhat
shorter than the ventral.

The Obolus nearest this in age is 0.(1) major, of the Upper
Etcheminian in New Brunswick ; that species, however, is larger, and
does not have the concentric ridges, on the only example of it which
is known. None of the European Oboli have the sharp ridges which
mark the surface of this species, and they all belong higher in the
geological scale. Obolus (Mickwilzia) monilifera, Linrs., has a flat-
tened dorsal valve, and thus differs from this species.

Acrothele avia, n sp. Pi. III.; figs. In to h.

Calcareo-corneous. A rather large species with oblately oval
valves, thick, horny, shell substance within, and a thin, calcareous
crust without.

Outwardly the ventral valve differs little in shape from the ordin-
ary types of Acrothele of the Protolenus and Paradoxides beds ;
internally, however, it is characterized by a single in place of the
paired pits in front of the foramina! opening, and by strong vascular
trunks and branches.

ETCHEMINIAN FAUNA OF CAPE BRETON. 20$

The dorsal valve has radiating ridges on the lateral slopes — a
character unique to the species. The interior of this valve has, at the
umbo, the usual " nail-like process," as Prof. Hartt called it, viz., the
median ridge, on each side of which are impressions of the umbonal
and lateral muscles. The group of central muscles are somewhat in
front of the middle of the valve. Faint impressions of vascular, and
of radiating ridges, are also visible.

Sculpture. — The surface of the valves is marked by fine, irregular,
concentric rounded ridges, that frequently anastomose. These ridges
are more regular in their course on that part of the shell which is near
the margins.

Size. — Length 9 mm., width 10 mm. or more.

Acrotreta proavia, n. sp. PI. HI. figs. 2a to /

Shell substance calcareo-corneous. Ventral valve obliquely coni-
cal, with a prolonged beak. Cardinal area narrow ; a tubercle below
the foramen, which opens behind the beak. The beak of this valve-
has a heavy overhang beyond the aperture (nearly half its width).
The dorsal valve is orbicular, convex, but somewhat flattened towards
the front, the interior has two strong muscular pits near the hinge
line, spreading vascular impressions, and a broad low median septum.

Sculpture. — A strong lens reveals a series of concentric striee on
the surface of the shell, of which there are about twenty in the space
of a millimetre. A still stronger magnification brings to view a gran-
ular ornamentation ; occasional rows of coarser granules are seen to
be parallel to the concentric striae.

Size. — Length of ventral valve 2 mm., width 1| mm. The dorsal
valve is 1^ mm. long.

This species differs from all others in its overhanging apex. From
having this form the ventral valves are found lying prostrate on the
layers and when their dark shining inner layers are exposed look very
like the conical teeth of fossil fishes.

They also are not unlike a long conical Lingulella, and may show
us a step by which the genus Acrotreta was differentiated from some
such form as Lingulella.

204 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

Bradoria* n. gen.

In the Protolenus Fauna are two species of Ostracods, which for
want of other known relationship were referred to the genus Primitia.
It would appear, however, that in this genus the sulcus which extends
from, or near the hinge, downward, should be subcentral. In these
two species it is not so, and the depression such as it is, is at or near
the anterior end of the hinge line — moreover one of these species (and
probably both) is marked by a prominent tubercle, which, from the
smoothness of its summit, is supposed to be an organ of vision. It
would appear now that these species are representatives of an ancient
group of Ostracods which has several specimens in the underlying
Etcheminian beds. Though having the general form of Primitia,
Primitiella and Aparchites, they do not have the median pit or sulcus
of the first, the shallow median depression of the second, or the perfectly
smooth valve of the third. Their most marked character is the promi-
nence or tubercle just at the front end of the hinge line. Some of the
species have close behind this tubercle a short vertical furrow, scarcely
extending clear of the tubercle ; or the furrow may pass around the
tubercle. In the five species referred here, the marginal furrow is
obscure, or invisible along the lower margin.

The known species are nearly of the same size (about 2£ to 4 mm.
long) and the surface of the valves is distinctly pitted, tuberculated,
or wrinkled.

The following new species come under this genus B. scrutator,
B. vigilans, B. rugulosus. It includes also Primitia oculata and
probably P. aurora of the Protolenus Fauna.

Bradoria scrutator, n. sp. PI. IV., figs, la to c.

Valves ovate, with straightened hinge-line, which is more than
half of the length of the valve. Furrow short, immediately behind
the ocular tubercle. Hinge bordered by a narrow, sharp ridge.
Ocular tubercle nearly marginal, and just in front of the hinge.
Marginal furrow obscure, extending around the lower margin of the
valve.

* Named from the Bras d'Or, a salt-water lake occupying the interior of
Cape Breton.

ETCHEMINIAN FAUNA OF CAPE BRETON. 205

Sculpture. — The whole surface is covered with closely set con-
spicuous pits that are finer toward the hinge-line, where they have a
linear arrangement.

Size. — Length 3 mm., width 2 mm.

This species is a little larger than B. oculata of the Protolenus
Zone, from which it is easily distinguished by the surface ornament-
ation ; the sculpturing is more like that of Isochilina ventricosa of the
same zone, but that species is much larger.

Bradoria vigilans, n. sp. PI. IV., figs. 2a to c.

Outline of the valves ovate with a straightened hinge line, which
is about half of the length of the valve. Ocular tubercle at the front
of the hinge line, and surrounded by a shallow groove. The margin
is gradually rounded at the front, and below, and project somewhat
behind, hence it is nearly straight to the hinge.

Sculpture. — Surface marked by closely set granulations, that be-
come finer toward the hinge line and ocular tubercle, and graduate
into a series of sub-parallel anastomosing ridges at the posterior
quarter of the valve.

Size. — Length 3| mm., width 2| mm.

Distinguished from Aparchites conchiformis of the Protolenus Zone
by its smaller size and prominent tubercle ; and from A. secunda by
the tubercle and the coarser ornamentation, etc.

Bradoria rugulosa, n. sp. PL III., figs. 3a to d.

A sub-orbicular species, with outline straightened along the hinge
line. Ocular tubercle somewhat prominent and situated a little below
the anterior end of the cardinal line, which is about half of the length
of the shell. There is a faint furrow behind the tubercle nearly
parallel to the hinge line, and a shallow pit just in front of the
tubercle. A narrow, obscure marginal rim appears at the posterior
margin of the valve.

Sculpture. — The lower slopes and posterior half of the valve are
covered with fine anastomosing ridges, concentric to the upper side of
the valve ; toward the top and front of the valve these ridges become
obscure and the surface of the valve is granulated.

Size.— Length 24 mm., width nearly as great.

This little species is easily distinguished from the others by its
circular outline and rugulose surface, which simulates that of certain
trilobites.

306 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

SCHMIDTELLA (?) PERVETUS, n. Sp. PL IV. figs. 3« to C.

Only the right (?) valve known. It is moderately arched and
without furrows, and its greatest fulness is in the upper half. The
hinge margin, which is more than half of the length of the valve is
formed by an infolding of the edge, without a furrow. No marginal
fold was observed.

Sculpture. — The surface is covered with minute pits closely placed
the raised spaces between the pits become so prominent on the lower
part of the valve that the surface seems tuberculated ; towards the
lower and the posterior (?) edges, these tubercles are arranged in rows
so that there the valve seems covered with obscure ridges, parallel to
the margin ; at the opposite side of the valve, toward the hinge, the
pits become very fine, and the surface of the valve has a shining
appearance.

Size. — Length, 3 mm. Width, 2|- mm.

This species differs from S. cambrica of the Protolenus Zone in
the less protuberent centre of the valve, and the narrower and
straighter infolded border of the hinge line. The marginal fold also is
more distinct in S. cambrica which does not have the concentric mar-
ginal ridges of this species.

SCHMIDTELLA, ACUTA, n. Sp. PI IV., figs. 4 a. C.

Valve tumid. Hinge line somewhat more than half of the length
of the valve marked by a narrow fold and furrow that extends most
of its length. Valve about as wide as long, somewhat acutely pointed
at the lower margin. A narrow marginal fold extends along one side
of the valve to the pointed end. Greatest protuberance of the valve
in the upper half, and towards the hinge the arching of the valve turns
suddenly in towards the cardinal line.

Sculpture. — The surface is smooth, somewhat shining, and covered
with minute pits or granulations, uniformely distributed.

Size. — Length, 2^ mm. Width, 2 mm.

This species, by its smooth surface and pointed form recalls the
genus Beyrichona of the Protolenus Fauna, but it has not the flattened
area near the hinge that marks that genus, and is more flattened in
lower part of the valve.

From S. pervetus this species is distinguished by its finer ornamen-
tation and pointed lower margin ; and from S. cambrica by its

ETCHEMINIAN FAUNA OF CAPE BRETON. 207

smoother surface and narrow fold at the cardinal line. No Silurian
Schmidtella has the pointed valve of this species.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PLATES.
Plate I.

Fig 1. Lingulella Gregwa, n. sp. — a Ventral valve ; b interior of
same ; — c Section of same ; — d Dorsal valve ; — e mould
of interior of same ; f Section of same. All mag. \.
Seep. 199.

Fig. 2. Lingulella tumida, n. sp. a Ventral valve ; h mould of
interior of same ; — c Longitudinal section of same. All
mag. \. See p. 200.

Fig. 3. Leptabolus (?) collicia, n. sp. a Ventral valve ; b Dorsal
valve; — c Interior of a broken ventral valve. All mag. ^ ;
— d Another venti'al, showing the callus of the visceral
cavity, mag. |; — e Section of the two valves, mag. a.
See page 200.

Plate II.

Fig. 1. Leptobolus afavus, n. sp. — a Ventral valve ; — b Mould
of the interior ; — c Longitudinal section of same ; — d
Dorsal valve ; — e Mould of the interior. All mag. ^.
— /'Portion of the outer surface of the shell. Mag. 4T°.
See p. 200.

Fig. 2. Obolus ( Palceobolus ) Bretonensis, n. subgen. et sp. ; — a Ven-
tral valve ; — b Interior of same ; — c Longitudinal sec-
tion ; — d Dorsal valve; e Interior of same; — f Longi-
tudinal section. All mag. \ ; — g Portion of outer sur-
face of the shell, mag. \ ; — h smaller portion, mag U> ;
— i Section of the two valves, mag f . See p. 202.

Plate III.

Fig. 1. Acrothele avia, n. sp. a Portion of a ventral valve; b Longi-
tudinal section of same. Both mag. j- ; — c Interior of a
ventral valve ; — d Dorsal valve; — e Longitudinal sec-
tion of same ; —f Interior of a dorsal valve. The four
mag. \ — g Enlargement of the outer surface of the

208 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

middle of a dorsal valve ; — h Enlargement of the surface
of the lateral slope of the valve. The two mag. y,
See p. 202.
Fig. 2. Acrotreta proavia, n. sp. a Ventral valve, upper side ;
— b same, lower side; — c same, side view; — d Dorsal valve ;
— e Mould of a dorsal valve ; — / Side view of a dorsal valve,
All mag. V'- See p. 203.
Fig. 3. Bradoria rugulosa, n. gen. et. sp. a Side view of right valve ;
— b Outline from the front ; — c Outline from the cardinal
side ; all mag. -| ; — d Outer surface of the valve ; mag. y.
See p. 205.

Plate IV.

Fig. 1. Bradoria scrutator, n. sp. a Side view of the left valve ;

— b Vertical section ; — c Transverse section. All mag. ^.

See p. 204.
Fig. 2. Bradoria vigilans, n. sp. a Side view of the right valve ;

— b Outline, front view ; — c Outline, cardinal view. All

mag. £ See p. 205.
Fig. 3. Schmidtella pervetus, n. sp. a Side view of (the right 1 )

valve ; — b vertical section ; — c transverse section. All

mag. f . See p. 206.
Fig. 4. Schmidtella acuta, n. sp. a Side view of (right 1 ) valve ;

— b Vertical section ; — c Transverse section. All mag. |.

See p. 206.

ERRATA TO THE PRECEDING ARTICLE.

For " Stiletto, read stilletto.

For "lip," read projecting lip.

For " trilobites," read Trilobites.

For "Capulidjv," read Patellida-.

For " Lamellibanchs," read Lamellibranchs,

Page.

Line.

193

21

194

5

195

15

195

16

195

21

Plate T.

\ 3 c

3e

Plate TT.

a

|J

2S

2c

2k

If

21

2c

Plate III.

i\

a * gas

WSSSS

SECTIONS op the CAMBRIAN and ETCHEMINIAN
IN CAPE BRETON

Showing their relation to each other and the underlying Pre-
pakeozic rocks.

No. 1. — Section at Long Island, Bras d'Or Lake, Cape Breton. — A, Lau-
rentian limestone, schist, etc. — B, Volcanic eruptive (felsites etc.) — C, Cam-
brian.— D, Prepalreozoic Syenite. — C1 Olenus Zone. — CaPeltura Zone.

No. 2. — Section from Morley Road to Marion Bridge, Mira R. Cape Bre-
ton.— A, Volcanic eruptive (felsite). — B, Etcheminian terrane. — C, Cambrian.
— D, Lower Carboniferous— B1 Lower Etcheminian. — B, -Upper Etcheminian.
— C, 1 Olenus Zone. — C,2 Peltura Zone.

3* 5b

Ac

THE NOfTUID.E OF NEW BRUNSWICK. 209

ARTICLE III.

THE NOCTUIELE OF NEW BRUNSWICK.

INTRODUCTORY LIST.

By William McIntosh.

Read November 7th, 1899.

The following list of New Brunswick Moths, with the exception of
the Jacquet River and Chatham records, is the result of the past three
years collecting in the vicinity of St. John.

In the preparation of this list I am much indebted to Dr. James
Fletcher, Ottawa, Dr. R. Ottolengue, New York, Mr. Albert F. Winn,
Montreal, and Dr. Herman Strecker, Reading, Pa., who have deter-
mined my specimens and given me valuable assistance in my entomo-
logical work.

I am under obligation to Mr. Winn, not only for identifying a
number of specimens, but also for a very interesting list (in MS.)
of Moths taken at Jacquet River in July and August, 1886. All the
Jacquet River records are taken from Mr. Winn's list.

The Chatham records are from Mr. J. D. B. F. Mackenzie's List of
the Moths of Miramichi (Proceedings of the Natural History Society
of Miramichi).

Thanks are due also to Mr. Philip J. R. Mcintosh, who kindly
placed his collection in my hands for examination.

Family THYATIRID^E.
Thyatira scripta, Cosse.
Common at light during June and July.

Pseudothyatira cymatophoroides, Gn.

Two specimens taken at light July 10th and 22nd (1897). Also at Jacquet
River.

210 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

Pseudothyatira cymatophoroides var expultrix, <;rt.

A few specimens taken every year from July 16th to August 2nd. Also at
Jacquet River.

Leptiiia doubledayi, Gn.

One specimen taken June 13th (1898).

Family NOCTUID^E.

Deinas flavicoruis, Smith.
Three specimens, June 20th and 28th.

Kaphia frater, (ht.
Two specimens, July 20th and 28th (1898).

Acronycta morula, (i. & R.
Chatham.

Acronycta innotata, Gn.

Quite numerous during June and July. Also taken at J&cquet River.

Acronycta populi, Riley.
One or two specimens taken at light.

Acronycta vulpina, Grt.

One taken at light.

Acronycta americana, Harr.

Several specimens taken at light in July. Also reported from Jacquet
River and Chatham.

Acronycta dactylina, Grt.

A few specimens taken each year ; but not at any time abundant.

Acronycta iinpressa, Wlk.

Two specimens taken during the present year.

Acronycta superaus, (in.
Jacquet River.

Acronycta dissecta, (i. & I:
Jacquet River.

Harrisinienma trisignata, \Y1L.

One perfect specimen at light Augusl 2nd (1899)),

Nik \o("rni>.r. of new BtU'Nswick. 211

Microcoelia fragilis, Gn.

Two taken July 20th (1899).

Cliytonix palliatricula, Gn.

One specimen raptured at light July 18th (1X99).

Rhynchagrotis cbardinyi, Bdv.
Several taken during- the present year. Also at Jacquet River.

Rhynchagrotis minimalis, Ort.
One specimen (1S9S).

Rynchagrotis placida. Grt.

One at light in July.

Rhynchagrotis alternata, Grt.

This species is usually abundant on Willow blossom in April and May.

Adelphagrotis prasina, Fabr.
Very common at light during July. Also taken at Jaccjuet River.

Platagrotis pressa, Grt.

Taken in limited numbers in July. Also at Jacquet River.

Eneretagrotis perattenta, Grt.

One specimen taken at light in July.

Paclmohia salicarmu, Wlk.
This species is quite numerous on Willow blossom in April and May.

Agrotis ypsilon, Rott.

This Moth is exceedingly common, dozens being taken at light in a single
evening. Also taken at Jacquet River.

Peridroma occulta, Linn.

This species, is quite numerous at light on old walls, fences, etc. Reported
from Jacquet River.

Peridroma astricta, Morr.

One or two specimens taken in July.

212 lU'U.KTIN Of THK VATI'RAI. HISTORY KnrlKTN.

Peridroma saucia, Hhn.
A few specimens taken during the past season August.

Noctua baja, Fabr.

Abundant at light in August. This species varies considerably ; sonic
specimens are ashy gray, while others are pale reddish brown. Also taken at
Jacquet River.

Noctua uoriuaniana, Grt.

Several at light duly and August.

Noctua c-iiigrum, Linn.

This is one of the most common Moths in this locality — July to October.
Also reported from Jacquet River,

Noctua jiicunda, Wlk.

One at light in July.

Dr. Strecker, referring to the specimen sent for identification, says : " A
very decidedly marked example ; I never saw one so richly colored or distinctly
marked ; but I do not doubt it is this species."

Noctua phyllophora, Grt.

Three specimens taken during t ho present year.

Noctua rubifera, Grt.

One taken late in July.

Noctua feunica, Tausch.

Twelve or fourteen specimens taken during the past three years.

Noctua plecta, Linn.

A limited number taken in .June, July, and early in August. Also at
Jacquet River.

Noctua collaris, <;. & R.

Two specimens taken at light — July.

Noctua haruspica, Grt.
Abundant at Light in July. Also taken at Chatham.

Noctua clandestina, Han
Jacquet River.

Mil \<h TI'Ili.K OV XKW HIM'NSW'ICK. 21.'!

Feltia subgotbica, Haw.

Not uncommon at light during August. Also taken at Jacquet River and
( Ihatham.

Feltia herilis, Grt.

A few specimens yearly ; not so abundant as the preceding species:

Feltia venerabilis, Wlk.

Several at light during the present year. Also at Jacquet River and

( lhatham.

Porosagrotis mimallonis, Grt.

One taken August 13th. *

Cameades quadridentata, <;. & K.

Two specimens taken, August 26th (1S99.)

.Mr. Strecker informs me that heretofore he has only seen this from the
West.

Carneades fumalis, Grt.
One at light.

Carneades pitychrous, Grt.

Chatham.

Carneades messoria, Hair.
Jacquet River.

Carneades lntulenta, Smith.

Very numerous at light for about a week in August (1898-99).

Carneades mollis, Wlk.

A few specimens of this beautiful Moth taken at Willow blossom in May.
Also a number of what appears to be a darker form taken at light.

Carneades decolor, Morr.
One at light.

Carneades tessellata, Harr.

Quite numerous at light early in July.

Carneades oclirogaster, Gn.

Very abundant at light in August. Three forms of this variable insect is
common here.

Carneades rediniicula, Morr.

A few specimens taken at light during the first week in August.

Maniestra nimbosa, Gn.

This beautiful Moth is taken in limited numbers at light in August. Also
at Chatham.

214 BULLETIN OS THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

Mamestra imbrifera, Gn.
Two at light.

Mamestra purpurissata. Grt.

Several taken at Light in August.

Mamestra detracta, Wlk.

Two taken July 20th (1899).

Mamestra radix, Wlk.

Two taken at light near Gagetown.

Mamestra canadensis, Smith.

In Prof. J. H. Smith's Catalogue of Noctuidae, New Brunswick is the only
locality given for this Moth. We have no local record of its capture.

Mamestra subjuncta, G. & R.

Four specimens taken July 12th, loth and 27th.

Mamestra grandis, Bdv.

One taken early in October (1899).

Mamestra trifolii, Rott.

One taken at light July 10th (1897).

Mamestra picta, Han.

A few taken at light during the present year — July.

Mamestra lubens, Grt.

Three taken in 1897 ; and one at light July ISth of the present year.

Mamestra assimilis, Morr.
One taken by Philip Mcintosh July istli (1899).

Mamestra latex, Gn.

< 'hatham.

Mamestra ad.juncia, Bdv.

A few specimens at light in June and July.

Mamestra legitima, Grt.

Two specimens taken at lighl early in July.

THE NOCTUID.E OF NEW BRUNSWICK. 215

Mamestra lilacina, Harv.
One taken by Philip Mcintosh July 2nd (1899).

Mamestra renigera, Steph.

A few specimens taken every year. Also reported from Jacquet River and
( 'h.itham.

Mamestra olivacea, Morr.

During July and August this species is very common at light. Also taken
at Chatham.

Mamestra lorea, Gn.

Jacquet River.

Hadeua passer, Gn.

A few taken at light during the latter part of July.

Hadena remissa, Hbn.

Two or three specimens taken each year from the Sth to 20th of July.

Hadeua vultuosa, Grt.

Two taken July 22nd (1S98) and August 1st (1899).

Hadena finitima, Gn.

One at light July 1st (1899).

Hadena dulutans, Wlk.— (Sputatrix, Grt.)

Common at light under logs and in crevices during August. A very light
form of this species is abundant here.

Hadena impulsa, Gn.

Two taken July 6th and 11th (1898-99).

Hadena devastatrix, Brace.

This species is quite common during July, August, and the first part of
September. Also reported from Jacquet River and Chatham.

Hadena arctica, Bdv.

This beautiful insect is so common in July and August that it is a nuisance
at light ; also taken at bloom resting on fences, etc. Reported from Jacquet
River.

Hadena verbascoides, <4n.

A few taken at light in July.

216 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

Hadena bridghami, G. & R.

Taken in limited numbers late in July and early in September.

Hadena minuscula, Morr.

One specimen taken August 14tli (1899).

Hadena modica, Gn,

A few taken at light early in August.

Hyppa xylinoides, Gn.

Not uncommon at light in July. Also at Chatham.

Trigonopliora periculosa, Gn.

Three specimens taken in August (1898-99). Also at Jacquet River.

Trigonopliora periculosa (var. v-brmmeum), Grt

Jacquet River.

Brotoloniia iris, Gn.

Very abundant during the last of June and early in July.

Euplexia lncipara, Linn.

Two specimens at light Jul}' 15th and 26th (1899).

Nephelodes miliums. Gn.

Common at light, in crevices, etc. — July and August.

Tricholita signata, Wlk.

Three or four specimens taken in August.

Helotropha reniformis, Grt.
One taken on bloom August 17th (1898).

Hydroecia velata, Wlk.
Extremely common from July 25th to September 20th.

Hydroecia nictitans, Linn.

Very abundant at light ; frying during the same season as Velata. Alsoal
Jacquet River.

THE XOPTLUD-K OF NEW BRUNSWICK. 217

Hydroecia nictitans (var. erythrostigma), Haw.

Taken at light during the entire month of August, but not so abundant as
the preceding species.

Hydroeeia medialis, Smith

One taken September 2nd (1898).

Hydroecia cerussata, Grt.

Several taken every year, but not at any time abundant.

Leucania pallens, Linn.
A few specimens taken yearly in July. Also at Jacquet River.

Leucania extincta, (in.

Several taken in the middle of July (1899).

Leucania insueta, Gn.

Two taken in July (1899). Also at Jacquet River.

Leucania comnioides, Gn.

Several at light during July and August. Also at Chatham.

Leucania unipuncta. Haw.

This species is taken every year, but does not appear to be very numerous.

Leucania pseudargyria, Gn.

Jacquet River.

Caradrina multifera, Wlk.
Jacquet River.

Amphipyra tragopoginis, Linn.

Abundant at light from the 12th to 30th of August.

Orthodes puerilis, Grt.
Two specimens taken in July (1899).

Crocigrapha normani, (ht.
One taken May 20th (1899).

Tfeuiocanipa furfurata, Grt.
Several specimens taken in July (1899).

IS BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

Tseniocampa alia, Gn.
Not uncommon at Willow blossom in May.

Cosmia paleacea, Esp.
Several taken at light early in September.

Pyrrhia umbra, Hbn.

Very abundant for about a week (luring t lie latter part of June.

Ortbosia conradi, Grt. (?)
Jacquet River.

Xanthia iiavago, Fabr.

Two specimens taken in 1897.

Cirroedia pampina, Gn.

Chatham.

Scoliopteryx libatrix, Linn.
One taken by Philip Mcintosh. Also reported from Chatham.

Scopelosoma d^via, Grt.

One taken by Philip Mcintosh May loth. 1898.

Xyliua disposita, Mori.
Several taken in May (1898).

Xylina ferrealis, Grt.

Two specimens taken in May (1898).

Xyliua betlumei, <:. & R.

One taken by l'biiip Mcintosh May 1st (1899),

Xyliua laticinera, Grt.

Three specimens taken in May 1898.

XyliDa tbaxteri, Grt.

One May I Oth (1898).

Colocampa uupera, Lint.
Three or four specimens taken during the past three years.

THE X0CTU1D.E OF NEW BRUNSWICK. 219

Cucullia convexipeniiis, a. & H.

Taken in limited numbers in August.

Cucullia asteroides, Gn.

A few taken in June.

Cucullia intermedia, Speyer.

Common at light June and July. Also reported from Jacquet River and
Chatham.

Aletia argillacea, Hbn.

Abundant at light in September and the earlier part of October. On the
11th of October, 1897, this species appeared in immense numbers.

Abrostola urentis, (in.

A few taken in Jul\\ Apparently rare.

Deva purpurigera. Wlk.
Two specimens taken by Philip Mcintosh.

Plusia ierea, Hbn.
Three taken in July 1898.

Plusia aeroides, Grt.

Much more abundant than the preceding species. Also taken at Jacquet
River.

Plusia balluca, Geyer.

Only two or three specimens taken each year.

Plusia contexta, Grt.

Jacquet River.

Plusia putnami, Grt.
Not common ; taken at light in July and August.

Plusia mappa, G. & R.

Taken in limited numbers in July.

Plusia bimaculata, Steph:

A very common species ; taken in July August and September. Also at
Jacquet River and Chatham.

220 BULLETIN OP THE NATURAL IHSTolU SOCIETY.

Plusia precatiouis, 6n.

Abundant from June to October. During the present year this species
was common on blossom until November 5th.

Plusia flagellum, Wlk.

(Syn. monodon-insolita. )
A few specimens taken each year in June and July.

Plusia brassiere, Riley.

Only one or two taken at bloom in August.

Plusia mortuorum, Gn.

Very common at light and bloom in July and August. (Dr. Ottolengui
states that this species is " erroneously called u-aureum in American collec-
tions.") Also taken at Jaequet River.

Plusia retanguluiu, Kirby.

Dr. Ottolengui informs me that this species, known as mortuorum in
American collections, is really Kirby's retangulum. This Moth is exceedingly
common at light and on bloom, Jul\', August, and early in September. Also
taken at Jacquet River.

Plusia octo-scripta, Grt.

Common at light and bloom, July, August, and early in September.

Plusia falcifera, Kirby.
Seven or eight specimens taken from .Inly 30th to September 7th.

Plusia selecta, Wlk.
(Syn, viridisignata, Grt.)

Four taken in August.

Plusia epigyea, Grt.
Not uncommon at light and bloom in July and August.

Plusia a in phi, Wlk.

Only three or four specimens taken during the pasl three yeara August
4th to 1 1th.

Plusia simplex. Gn.

\ i. w taken al lighl and bloom. Also at Jacquel River and Chatham.

T11IC NOCTUID.K OF NEW BRUNSWICK. 221

Calpe Canadensis, Bethune.

One specimen taken on bloom July 15th (18!>'.l).

JHeliothis armigfer, Hbn.
One taken September 15th I 1899).

Alaria florida, (in.
Two taken in August (1S97).

Metathorasa monetifera, On.

Two specimens taken in July (1897-98).

Erastria apicosa, Haw.
Jacquet River.

Drasteria erechtea, Cram.

Abundant from June to October. Also at Jacquet River.

Drasteria erichto, Gn.

Several taken with erechtea in June.

Euparthenos Eiibilis, Hbn.
Known to occur in this locality, but not taken by the writer.

Catocala cerogama, Gn.

One taken in August (1899).

Catocala ultronia, Hbn.

Several taken every year — August and September. Also at Chatham.

Catocala ilia, Cram.
Two specimens taken September 12th and 16th (1898).

Catocala parta, Gn.

Several are known to have been taken in this locality some years ago.

Catocala nuijuga, Wlk.

A few specimens taken during the latter part of August Also at Jacquet
River.

Catocala concunibens.

Not uncommon ; taken at light and sugar in August and September.

222 BULLETIN UK THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

Catocala relicta, Wlk.

This beautiful insect is not uncommon in this locality. August and
September.

Catocala antinympha, Him.

Chatham.

Catocala coelebs, Grfc.

One specimen taken by Philip Mcintosh.

Parallelia bistriaris, Hbn.
One taken July 16th (1898).

Homoptera lunata (var. edusa), Drury.

One specimen taken resting on a wall June 4th (1X97).

Ypsia UlldulariS (var. aeruginosa), On.
A pair taken resting on trees.

Epizenxis ajmula, Hbn.

A few specimens taken late in August (1899).

Hypena scabra, Fabr.

Chatham.

Family BREPHID^E.

Brephos infaiis, Mceschl.

In April this interesting Moth was quite numerous in groves of small birch
trees near the city ; but only two specimens were taken.

THE BUTTERFLIES OF NEW BRUNSWICK. 2*23

ARTICLE IV.

THE BUTTERFLIES OF NEW BRUNSWICK.

By William McIntosh.

(Read November 7th, 1899).

In Bulletin No. XVII, pages 114-121, I gave a list of the butter-
flies of this province as far as known to me. During the past season
a number of additional species have been captured near St. John ;
these will be found in the following supplementary list. Mr. Albert
F. Winn, of Montreal, also sent me some very interesting notes on
butterflies taken at Jacquet River, New Brunswick, in 1886. Among
Mr. Winn's captures are two species not recorded in my former list ;
these are also noted below :

Phyciodes nycteis, Double- Hew.
(Charidryas nycteis).
One specimen taken at Welsford, July 1st.

Thecla titus, Fabr.
(Mopsus, Hubn. Strymon titus).
Two specimens captured in the Nerepis valley in July.

Feniseca tarquinius, Fabr.

Three specimens of this curious little butterfly were taken during the past
summer, July 16th and 31st.

224 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

Lycseua couperii, Grote.

Taken at Jacquet River by Mr. Winn. " Was quite common during early
July ; one stray specimen August 8th. "

Pamphila mauitoba, Scud.
(Erynnis manitoba).
" A few taken towards the end of August" by Mr. Winn at Jacquet River.

Pamphila nietacomet, Harris.

(Euphyes metacomet).
Not uncommon at Welsford and Westfield in July and early in August.

Eudamus pylades, Scud.

(Thorybes pylades).

This species was quite abundant at Welsford, Nerepis and Quispamsis
during the past summer.

THE BUTTERFLIES OF NEW BRUNSWICK. 225

NOTES.

Mditcea phaeton. — On July 1st I had the pleasure of taking a
number of perfect specimens of this beautiful butterfly.

Melitcea harrisii.— Over forty of this species were taken in about
two hours on July 1st. Worn specimens were plentiful in the same
locality July 15th. On August 1st (my next visit) they had entirely
disappeared.

Mr. Winn, speaking of this species, says : " One specimen, taken
end of July, flying before 5 a. m.

Grapta gracilis. — Mr. Winn refers to this species as follows : " I
can confirm occurrence in New Brunswick, having taken a few
specimens during the latter part of August.

Two specimens were taken by the writer July 15th (1899).

Pieris na/pi. — Mr. Philip Mcintosh found this species quite abund-
ant on the Belleisle in July. The following is quoted from Mr. Winn's
notes: "Pieris oleracea (napi.) Was then (1886) abundant at
Jacquet River, but doubtless has decreased proportionately as Pieris
rapje increased, as it has done elsewhere."

Colias interior. — This species still continues to be our most com-
mon yellow. Colias philodice not being abundant until late in the
season.

NATURAL HISTORY AND PHYSIOGRAPHY OF NEW BRUNSWICK. 227

ARTICLE V.

NOTES ON THE NATURAL HISTORY AND PHYSI-
OGRAPHY OF NEW BRUNSWICK.

By W. F. Ganong, Ph.D.

23. — The Forestry Problem in New Brunswick.

(Read March 7th ; revised December, 1899,)

The greatest natural source of wealth of New Brunswick lies in her
forests. These are steadily deteriorating. The public is uninformed
and hence indifferent as to their fate. These three facts constitute a
forestry problem of the gravest character, and one vastly important to
the future of this province.

Probably there is no other part of the earth's surface that origin-
ally bore a nobler forest on a land so richly watered.' Some of the
most valued timber trees of the northern temperate zone grew in New
Brunswick, and completely clothed her hills and valleys from her farth-
est inland waters all around to the sea. Every part of the province is
penetrated by streams which, while swift, are never torrents ; and
these by the melting of the abundant snows of winter are made pass-
able for the lumber which thus may be carried cheaply into the many
large rivers, and down these to fine harbors at their mouths. Immense
tracts in the province are admirably adapted for tree growing, and are
useless for any other known purpose. Thus has Nature provided in
New Brunswick the conditions for a great industry, and thus does
she point out our most profitable occupation for the futui'e, when
lumbering must be based upon forestry, which consists not in the
hunting of trees but in their cultivation.

In the meantime, however, New Brunswick forests are being irre-
trievably damaged. I do not now refer to defects in forest regulations,
systems of cutting, stumpage, etc., for I know nothing about this
subject. I have inferred, however, from the numerous newspaper
writings of the late Edward Jack, who knew these matters so practi-

228 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

cally and thoroughly, that our general system of forest management is
far from provident. But there is one deadly enemy of our forests
whose worst visitations can never be entirely recovered from, and that
is the great forest fires. It is not only the timber they destroy that
makes these fires so bad, for in a generation or two it may be partially
restored, but it is the permanent injury they do to much of our soil
whereby its capacity to produce trees for the future is permanently
lessened or even practically destroyed. Where naturally the soil is
thin, as it is over the rocky hills underlying much of our forest land,
the roots and other organic matter binding it together is utterly burnt
out by the great fires, and the rain washes the earth off into the
streams, leaving behind but the naked rocks, hostile to vegetation.
Most of that soil was placed there originally by the ice of the glacial
period, and has ever since been held in position bv its continuous
covering of vegetation ; once removed it can be restored only with the
most extreme slowness. An awful example of this practically per-
manent destruction is to be found in an area many miles square on
the upper Lepreau river ; the still standing rampikes and great stumps
show how fine a forest once clothed this land, which now is but a
stony desert that not for generations, and perhaps never, can again
bear trees. Here is a tract of country that might to-day be yielding
a revenue to the province and supporting a considerable village at the
mouth of the river, but it lies waste and useless because a fire twenty
years ago was not stopped in time. This is an extreme case, but large
areas in the province have suffered in but little less degree. The pre-
vention of forest fires is the first problem of forestry in any country,
and it has to be solved not only by stringent laws upon railroads,
lumbermen, hunters and settlers, but also by a ranger service, a corps
of men whose business it is to watch for fires in the dangerous season,
and to extinguish them at their beginning. The ranger service may
well be combined with that of fish and game wardens, and even with
some phases of lumber surveying.

But in addition to loss of timber and permanent injury to the soil,
there are yet other losses suffered through the deforesting of a country.*
Aside from the still unsettled question as to the effect of forests upon

* The reader who wishes further information upon these subjects will do well to turn
to the publications of the Division of Forestry of the U. S. Department of Agriculture, in-
cluding their recent "Primer of Forestry " and articles in the Year Books of the Depart-
ment, and also to the reports of the Maine Forestry Board.

NATURAL HISTORY AND PHYSIOGRAPHY OF NEW BRUNSWICK. 229

the amount and regularity of annual rainfall (both of which, as many
students think, are increased by the presence of forests, to the great
advantage of the farmer) it is everywhere known that the removal of
forests leads to great fluctuations in the water level of rivers, periods
of extreme low water alternating with destructive floods. This not
only interferes with navigation upon the smaller rivers, but greatly
lessens the value of their waterpowers, a subject certain to become of
great practical importance in the near future, since, as the leading
authorities agree, the improvements in the conduction of power by
electricity are sure to make natural sources of power again of value.
Destruction of forests, too, destroys their game-producing power, and
the fish-producing power of their streams, and hence removes their
attraction to wealthy sportsmen whom New Brunswick is doing her
best to attract. Yet other losses, sentimental as well as economical,
which a people may suffer with loss of their forests, will occur to all.
Deforesting may, of course, occur in other ways, and lead to the
same losses, though these are far less in degree than fires entail.
Land cleared for cultivation, though partially kept intact by the
farmer's crops, suffers slow deterioration, but this loss is unavoidable
and slight in proportion to the gain. Especially reckless lumbering
sometimes lays an area well nigh waste, allowing of similar deteriora-
tion, particularly since such places are very liable to fires. At the
present day the forests are threatened by a new danger — the rapacity
of pulp-mills, which take lumber even as small as five inches diameter,
and hence practically clear the land where they operate, leaving little
to grow into timber for the future. No pulp-mill should be allowed
to operate in New Brunswick in a way to deforest any piece of land,
for a speedy profit of this kind will be dearly paid for in the future.
The only wise method -in forestry management is to keep a forest
intact, and this can be done only by a system of rotation in cutting,
by which the larger trees alone are removed, the smaller being left to
grow. The prevention of forest fires, and a wise system of cutting,
would make the annual lumber crop as certain and as continuous as
the agricultural crop. This would give permanence to settlements in
the lumber districts and increase the prosperity and contentment of
our people. What would it not mean to Charlotte county to-day if
her lumber had not been recklessly cut away and her best lands badly
burnt over 1

230 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

It will be a long time yet before tree-planting will pay in New Bruns-
wick, though some day it will. There is one situation, however, in which
I think a certain amount of cultivation would pay in the near future.
In St. John and Charlotte counties, and in lesser degree in other parts
of the province, are many abandoned farms growing up in trees. Left
to themselves these trees are oftener than not of worthless sorts, and
grow so densely as greatly to injure one another in the struggle that
ensues. If pine and the best spruce were established on these lands,
and kept thinned out, they would in time yield ample returns, returns
that no individual can afford to wait for, though a government, with
its borrowing capacity, can. Care should be taken in future, too, not
to grant for settlement land that is better suited for trees than for
agriculture.

Under so purely democratic a government as that of New Bruns-
wick, no legislature can afford to take steps not backed by public
opinion. Any movement entailing much present expense for a distant
return would undoubtedly be condemned by the people. If, however,
the great importance of this subject to the future of the province were
generally understood, the people could be trusted to respond in its
favor as they have for education and other great interests. It is, how-
ever, the duty of the government to take the first step, which should
be towards the acquisition and dissemination of knowledge upon the
subject of forestry in all its aspects and in its relation to allied interests,
such as game preservation, fishing licenses, water-powers, location of
settlements, etc.; and, following this, should come the formulation of a
broad plan for the economic management of these great public interests.
The experience of other countries shows that such wide-reaching
investigation must be made independent of the exigencies of local
politics, which can be done only by placing the whole subject in the
hands of a commission, unpaid except for expenses, composed of the
most public-spirited and able citizens. Surely New Brunswick is not
so poor that she cannot command this service from her sons.

24. — Cost of a Topographical Survey of New Brunswick.

(Read April 4th, 1890).

In a former note upon this subject (No 14), I pointed out that a
survey of New Brunswick upon the plan and scale of that of Massa
chusetts would cost at least $351,000, and probably much more,

NATURAL HISTORY AND PHYSIOGRAPHY OF NEW BRUNSWICK. 231

perhaps $500,000. * Mr. Henry Gannett, Geographer of the United
States Geological Survey, and the leading American authority upon
this subject, in acknowledging the receipt of a copy of the afore-men-
tioned note, writes me as follows : " Referring to what you say
concerning a survey of the province, let me suggest that a scale of
about two miles to an inch is sufficiently large for present require-
ments. This is the scale which we are using in this country for the
greater part of our territory and find it, on the whole, most satis-
factory."

"The expense of a survey for this scale, including all the opera-
tions incident to the production of the manuscript maps amounts on
an average, to about $5.00 to a square mile, which for the area of
New Brunswick, will be about $140,000, which is not a prohibitive
price to pay."

A very complete, and of course authoritative, account of the
methods of conducting topographical surveys and of constructing
topographical maps is given by Mr. Gannett, in his " Aims and
Methods of Cartography " recently published by the Geological Survey
of Maryland (Special Publication, Volume II., Part. IIIa, 1898), and
this work is invaluable to all interested in this subject.

A topographical survey of New Brunswick must in time be under-
taken, and so great will be its scientific and economic benefits that
this Society should use its utmost influence to have it begun as soon
as possible.

25. — What is the Highest Land in New Brunswick 1

(Read April 4th ; re-written December, 1899.)

In former notes of this series (Nos. 5 and 19), it was pointed out
that two hills compete for the honor of being the highest in New
Brunswick, namely : Big Bald Mountain on the South Branch of Ne-
pisiguit, and another unnamed mountain three miles south of Mount
Sagamook near Nictor Lake. The latter of these two, I shall, for
reasons to be given in a later note (No. 30) call Mount Carleton.*

The height of Big Bald was measured in 1880 by Mr. Ells, and

* I find that I was probably mistaken in my supposition (Note 19) that this mountain
was the one to which the name Bald originally and propel ly belonged. It is Sagamook
wnich is called Bald by the guides and c thers, and on the early plans. Mount Carleton
appears hitherto to have been entirely unnamed.

232 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

found to be 2,500 feet, as given in his Geological report. The geolo-
gical map marks it, however, as 2,700 feet; but as Mr. Ells is the only
one who has measured it, the greater height upon the map appeared
to be an error. Mr. Chalmers, however, has recently written me as
follows : " So as to settle the question of the height of Big Bald
Mountain, South Branch Nepisiguit, as far as it is possible to do so
with the aneroid, Mr. Ells and I have gone carefully over his notes
and barometric readings again. He has two sets of readings, one
taken while going up river from Bathurst Harbour, the other taken
when returning. Observations were made regularly every day, and
at the camping grounds morning and evening several times. Work-
ing out the figures both ways we find the results to be very close,
and the mean elevation of Big Bald Mountain to be 2,715 feet above sea
level." This gives a definite basis for the height of 2,700 feet com
monly assigned to that mountain.

Some new facts as to the height of its rival, Mount Carleton, are
here to be presented. In August last, I climbed and measured it. I
made it by direct measurement with aneroid 112 feet higher than Mount
Sagamook, and this I made by a mean of two measurements, 1,633
feet above Nictor Lake. Nictor Lake I made by a mean of fourteen
measurements, all corrected from simultaneous readings at Fredericton,
(see later Note 31) 837 feet above sea level. This would make Carleton
2,582 feet above the sea level. I have reason to think, however, that
this result is considerably too low. I have found that my barometer
moves slightly sluggishly, and moreover other good measurements of
Nictor Lake and Sagamook Mountain have given considerably higher
results. Thus Mr. Chalmers gives the height of Nictor Lake as 878
feet, and Sagamook as 1659 higher. On this basis Carleton would be
2649 feet. There is, however, another set of measurements of lake
and mountain which cannot be disregarded, the more especially since
they were made with mercurial barometers, which are much more
reliable than aneroids. In 1839 a series of such measurements,
checked by comparison with a fixed station at Grand Falls, was car-
ried across the province by way of Nictor Lake, by a Mr. Wightman,
employed by the British government in connection with the elucidation
of the highlands of the boundary disputes, and the results are given in
full in the Blue-book, "The North American Boundary," 1840. All
of his measurements however, while relatively accurate, are absolutely

NATURAL HISTORY AND PHYSIOGRAPHY OF NEW BRUNSWICK. 233

too low, and we must apply to them a correction of fully 100 feet.*
As the mean of many careful observations he made the surface of
Nictor Lake 777 feet above the sea, i. e., with the correction 877 feet.
He made Bald Mountain (or Sagamook) 2496 feet, i, e., 2596 with the
correction. If to this we add the 112 feet which Carleton surpasses
Sagamook or Bald, we have as the height of Carleton 2708 feet, which
is very close to the 2715 of Big Bald.

If one were to take Hind's correction of 123 feet for Wightman's
results, instead of the 100 here adopted, it would make Carleton 2731
feet, thus surpassing Big Bald considerably. I by no means think,
however, that reliance can be placed upon these latter figures, but they
at least should make us cautious in forming a judgment as to which is
the higher mountain. Big Bald and Carleton must be very near the
same height, with the probability in favor of Big Bald. The relative
heights could be best settled by a comparison of careful theodolite
measurements made from the summit of each upon the summit of the
other.

26. — On a Division of New Brunswick into Physiographic

Districts.

CRead May 2nd, 1899.)
Whoever attempts a systematic description of any class of facts or
phenomena, or treatment of phases of local history, for the whole of
New Brunswick, must feel the need for some natural and recognized

* Wightman's figures are too low, because it was assumed that the levels along the St.
John, from Fredericton to Grand Falls, made in 1826 by Foulis, were correct, whereas they
are inexplicably erroneous and low. Hind (Geological Report, 1865, 31) has shown that this
is the case, and arguing from levels taken by Graham in connection with the survey of the
north line in 1842, and from those on the Royal Road, he reasons that Foulis1 figures are
about 123 feet too low. Other measurements by Wightman himself show a discrepancy
between head of tide above Fredericton and high tide on Bay Chaleur of 77 feet, which is
explained by the report as due to high tide level at Fredericton being 80 feet above high
tide level at St. John. This we now know is erroneous, for Duff has shown (this Bulletin, XV»
69) that mean tide at Fredericton is only about 14 feet above mean tide at St John, and
hence high tide level is about the same at both places. But I think Hind puts the cor-
rection for Wightman's error too high, for I think Graham's figure of 419 feet for the river
above the fall is. too high. It is higher than the Royal Road levels. Graham, moreover,
gives the monument at source of the St. Croix as 538 feet above mean tide at Calais ; later
measurements of the surface of Grand Lake (from which there is continuous deadwater to
the monument) based I believe on railroad levels, given on the geological map, make it
only 499 feet. Probably we would be safe in giving a correction of 100 feet to Wightman's
figures, though if we wished to be extra conservative we might restrict it to the correction
supplied by Wightman himself in his difference of 77 feet above high tide in Bay Chaleur,
plus 3 feet to reduce the latter to mean tide, that is, in all 80 feet.

234 BULLETIN OP THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

division of the province into districts. In a work now nearing com-
pletion I have had to make such a division, and thus have given some
study to the subject, with the following results. For a detailed
natural division the counties, with their artificial boundaries, are
not available; and the geology, with its correlated topography, is too
irregular and complicated. We do find, however, a convenient and
fairly natural division in the river systems, which for historical pur-
poses is especially suitable, since they have powerfully influenced the
distribution of settlements. But if we attempt to separate these
systems by lines drawn along their watersheds (as is done on the
accompanying map, fig. 1), we see at once that in a general way there
is a correspondence between counties and river systems. This is, of
course, no mere accidental coincidence, but is the result of a true
causal relation, for the principle that has determined the setting off
of our counties has been that of grouping them around the river basins
and running their boundaries along the watersheds.* It will obvi-
ously be convenient in making our natural divisions to pay as much
attention as possible to the familiar county divisions, and hence the
boundaries of the latter may well be used to settle doubtful points in
the natural divisions. There are two cases in which it is profitable to
use the county divisions to determine details of the natural divisions
—first, in the points of separation of the systems along the sea coast
(for here the county lines have been very wisely chosen), and second,
in the secondary division of the large St. John system. The geology
also, in doubtful cases, may be called to aid. Taking into account all
of these factors, the river system districts of New Brunswick would
appear to be as follows, and as traced on the accompanying map.
Natural divisions should obviously be known by indigenous names,
for which, happily, convenient Indian names are available.

I. The Passamaquoddy (or Charlotte) District. Includes the basins of all
rivers from the Oobscook to Point Lepreau.
77. The Woolastook (or St. John) Dint rid. Includes the entire St. John
System and the smaller rivers from Point Lepreau to Martins Head.

* That river systems and counties do not correspond yet more closely is due to three
causes :— First, county lines are, for convenience of running and marking, best made
straight, while watersheds are crooked ; second, the geography of ihe province was im-
perfectly known wheu some of the lines were established by law, and hence they do not
run us it was supposed they would ; third, some of our rivers run so far across the prov-
ince and head so near the basins of others, it is practically more convenient to allow their
heads to fail into other counties. Such is the case with the St. ('mix and Magaguadavic,
Washademoak and Salmon River, Miramichi, and Restigouche.

BRUNSWICK

Fig. 1.

Fig 2.

NATURAL HISTORY AND PHYSIOGRAPHY OF NEW BRUNSWICK. 235

Since however it is far too great to be treated as a unit, it may be
subdivided as follows :

A. The Madawasha Sub-district. Includes all north of a line separa-

ting Grand River and Little River, crossing the St. John at Grand
Falls, and separating the Fish River and Aroostook system.

B. The Tobique (or Carleton- Victoria) Sub-district. Includes all north of

a-line separating Becaguimec from Nacawicac and Nashwaak, and
Eel River from Sheogomoc, crossing the St. John on the edge of
the granite at Middle Southampton.

C. The Nashwaak (or York Sub-district . Includes all north of a line

between the Little River and Nashwaak systems and between the
Oromocto and Longs Creek, crossing the St. John with the County
line.

D. The Oromocto (or Queens-Sunbury) Sub-district. Includes all north

of a line between Belleisle and Washademoak and between Nerepis
and Oromocto, crossing the St. John with the County line.

E. The Kennebecasis (or St. John-Kings) Sub-district. Includes all

south of the preceeding to the Bay of Fundy.
///. The Petitcodiac (or Westmorland- Albert) District. Includes the basins of
all rivers falling into the Bay of Fundy and Baie Verte from Mar-
tins Head to Cape Tormentine. The County line might seem a
more logical division between this and the Woolastook district, but
Martins Head is so much more natural that it would seem better to
adopt it as the division point.
IV. The Richibucto (or Kent) District Includes the basins of all the rivers
from Cape Tormentine to Point Escuminac.
V. The Miramichi (or Northumberland District). Includes the basins of all
rivers from Point Escuminac to Barreau Point (between the Tab-
usintac and Tracadie.)
VI. The Nepisiguit (or Gloucester) District. Includes the basins of all rivers
from Barreau Point to Belledune Point, including Miscou and Ship-
pegan.
VII. The Restigouche District. Includes all north and west of Belledune
Point. Belledune Point gives a more natural division than Little
Belledune Point, near which the County line starts.

The above division of the province by river basins will probably be
found most useful for purposes of detailed description of provincial
phenomena, and of local history, etc.; but a more strictly natural one,
taking account of the geology and accompanying topography, will be
needed for some purposes. Unfortunately, as stated above, our geology
appears too complicated to admit of a very detailed division of the
province upon this basis. A general natural division is, however,
possible, as shown on figure 2. Although the geological boundaries

36 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

are fairly distinct, the accompanying topography is not, and, hence}
sharp lines are impossible, and the boundaries shown on the map are
only approximate. The divisions may be named as follows :

1. The Northern Plateau, including the great Upper Silurian Area of the
Northwestern part of the Province, with Lower Carboniferous out-
liers on its margin in places, forming mostly a great peneplain 800
to 1000 feet above the sea.
77. The Central Highlands, of Archaean Felsites and of Granite, bordered by
Cambro- Silurian Slates, consisting of irregular ridges, forming the
axis of the Province, and culminating in the high hills, 2000-2700 fee^
above the sea, between the headwaters of the Tobique, Nepisiguit
and Miramichi.

III. The Eastern Plain, of Carboniferous bordered by Lower Carboniferous

sandstones. This is a peneplain, is highest in its western part and
slopes off to the eastward where it is low and level.

IV. The Southern Highlands, also of ridges of Archaean Felsites and of

Granites intermixed with Silurian and Devonian rocks reaching
heights up to 1400 feet, and merging in Charlotte with the Central
Highlands. This may perhaps better be called The Southern Ridges.

27. — On a marked Browsing-effect observed near St. Stephen.

(Read May 2nd, 1899).

Five miles below St. Stephen, on the peninsula between the St.
Croix and Oak Bay, is a high granite hill, called locally Dickie's
Mountain. It is notable for the supurb view it commands, and is
recorded in the Society's Bulletin as the best mapped hill in New
Brunswick (Bulletin No. XVII, page 123). The top is largely bare
rock, but bears here and there small spruces, many of which attract
attention through their unusual form, for they are hour-glass shaped)
or at times like two cones, with the base of one resting upon the apex
of the other (see the third in the accompanying Figure 3). The lower
cone is the most symmetrical, extremely dense, and always approxi-
mately of the same height, as the axe introduced into the three figures
will show. The upper cone may be absent altogether, or developed in
various degrees, and is always loose in structure, and quite like any
other spruce. One is at first inclined to ascribe the appearance to
clipping by man, or to some growth conditions peculiar to the locality,
but it is no doubt a marked kind of browsing effect. The place is a
sheep pasture, and these animals probably bite off the young terminal

NATURAL HISTORY AND PHYSIOGRAPHY OF NEW BRUNSWICK.

237

buds in spring, forcing the plants t» branch profusely, as a hedge does
when clipped. This is confirmed by the broken appearance of the tips
of the branches. The sheep browse as high as they can reach, but finally
the main terminal bud gets beyond them and thenceforth develops

Fig. 3. Browsing effect upon spruces.

normally. Three stages in the development of the upper cone are
shown in the three accompanying figures which are traced from photo-
graphs, and therefore are accurate. No doubt this effect is common
enough, though I have seen it in but two or three other places, and
never so perfectly as here.

28. — An Optical Illusion on the Peat Bogs of Charlotte County.

(Read June fi, 1899)

In a paper on " Raised Peat-bogs in New Brunswick," published
two years ago (Trans. Royal Society Canada, new series, III, sec. ivr
150) I pointed out what seemed to be a rising and sinking of the surface
of the Lepreau bog to an extent of several inches, under the influence of
weather conditions which I could not determine. The only rule about
the movement seemed to be this, that it rose in bright and fell in dark

238 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

weather. In a letter dated July 1st, 1898, Dr. C. Weber, of Bremen,
Germany, a distinguished authority on Peat-bogs, gives me an entirely
different, and doubtless correct, explanation of the phenomenon which
he, illustrates by the accompanying figure (Fig. 4). He shows that it

Fig. 4. Diagram of rays over a raised peat bog in dark and bright weather. Hochmoor =■
raised bog : B = its highest part. Starker erwarmte Luftschicht = more
strongly warmed layer of air.

is an optical illusion, caused as follows : if in dull weather, the eye of
an observer standing near the margin of the bog (i. e., C. in Fig. 4),
be at such a height that the top of some object on the opposite margin
is just visible, (i. e., A) the ray from one to the other will be straight.
If now, the sun appears, the layer of air in contact with the bog will
become more strongly warmed than the layers above it, and hence it
will become rarified and less refractive. When the ray from the
object reaches this layer, it passes into a less dense medium and hence
bends from the perpendicular, i. e., away from the surface of the bog
(i. e. from b to E). In issuing from this layer, it re-enters the denser
layer, and hence it will be bent towards the perpendicular, and there-
fore still farther upward from the surface (i. e., from E to F). Con-
sequently the ray will pass over the head of the observer (to F), who,
finding it necessary to rise vertically some inches to again see the
object, naturally thinks the bog itself has risen.

29. — On the Physiography of the Nictor Lake Region.

(Read December 5th, 1899).

At the eastern head of the Tobique River, in the north of the New
Brunswick Highlands, lias Nictor, fairest of New Brunswick lakes.
It- is absolutely wild, unvisited save by an occasional sportsman or
naturalist, and may be reached only by a several-days' canoe journey.
It is unsurveyed, wrongly mapped, and scientifically little known.
For these reasons, the following observations, made during two visits

NATURAL HISTORY AND PHYSIOGRAPHY OF NEW BRUNSWICK.

239

to the lake in 1898 and 1899, will doubtless be acceptable , and be-
cause of the great interest of the place, I shall try to make my account
monographic.

History. The lake makes its first appearance in historical records
upon Franquelin's fine map of Acadia, of 1686, (Fig. 5, A). He does
not name the lake, though he marks the portage to Nepisiguit
(Oniguen is the Maliseet Oonegun — a portage), and he names the
Little Tobique, Nipisigooichich, or Little Nepisiguit, probably its

JS oh. - I ' i/n..

Earlier maps of Hidor Lake
all one-third, original 5ize

-*.

i - £ ismalfl '- 5 \
- '■/'■jflatt-. \/ =

'-1,1,

"^ SaJA m°*

TL

c

Fig. 5. Early Maps of Nictor Lake.

Micmac name. How remarkably this map influenced all others of
this region for over a century, I have elsewhere traced.* The lake
next appears, though very imperfectly, upon the fine engraved Baillie
and Kendall map of 1832 ; but it was first sketched by a surveyor in
1835, when Garden made the MS. map shown herewith (Fig. 5, B).
In 1837 Deputy Berton made the MS. sketch shown in Fig. 5, C,
which is the original of every published map of the lake down to the
present day. In August, 1899, I made a survey of the lake, the first

* Trans. Royal Soc. Canada, new ser., III., ii., 364, where the New Brunswick part of the
map may be found.

"240 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

ever made, resulting in the accompanying map (Fig. 6). I used a fair
prismatic compass, and a simple home-made apparatus on the stade
principle for measuring distances ; the general shape must be nearly
accurate, though its proportions may be somewhat in error.*

The lake must have witnessed events of no small interest, but
these are unwritten and lost. It was one of the most ancient and
frequented highways across the province, and has seen the passing of
warriors, hunters, missionary priests, traders, grand seigniors, govern-
ors and scholars. It was probably somewhere in this vicinity that the
good Father Bernardin perished on his way from the Nepisiguit to the
St. John, in 1621, as related by LeClercq. The first mention of it in
print that I have found is in Wightman's report on barometric
measurements, made in 1839, contained in a British boundary Blue-
book of 1840. Governor Head was here in 1849, as Gordon tells us,
but he left us no account of his travels. Governor Gordon came in
1863, and has left us in his " Wilderness Journeys" a most interest-
ing account of his impressions, as well as the first printed description
of the lake. He admired it as possessing " more beauty of scenery
than any other locality I have seen in the province, except, perhaps,
the Bay of Chaleurs," meaning, of course, the head of the Bay, above
Dalhousie. He gave to Bald Mountain the name Sagainook — (mount
of chiefs) — which it still bears. Later in the same year Professor
L. W. Bailey visited the lake, and has given us our first scientific
notes upon it, particularly its geology, t Since then Messrs. Hind, Ells,
Chalmers, and Hay, have briefly visited it with results contained in
well-known reports, t There are references to Nictor Lake in various
reports, guide books, sporting books, etc., but I believe the above-
mentioned include all real sources of information. Nearly every
writer, from Gordon to the present, speaks of the beauty of the lake.

Place-Nomenclature. On the map (Fig. 6) are two sets of names,
one in Roman letters, including those already more or less in use (for a
list of which I am indebted to Mr. George Armstrong, of Perth Centre),
and another set in italics which now appear for the first time. The
latter I have myself given, for reasons and upon a principle fully set

* I was accompanied and aided by my brother, Mr. Arthur Ganong. The preceding
summer I was with Mr. Q. U. Hay, who has described our trip in this Bulletin (XVII. 153).

tin his "Report on the Mines and Minerals of New Brunswick," (1864), and also in his-
" Notes on the Geology and Botany of New Brunswick," (Can. Nat., 1864).

X Geological Reports : this Bulletin IV, 104.

Fig. 6. Map of Nictor Lake.

241

242

BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

forth in the next note of this series (No. 30). Most of them are
sufficiently explained by the facts given in the preceding section, i. e.,
they commemorate those who have been in some way closely connected
with the history of the lake. Moraine Island describes its formation
as a glacial moraine. Nictor is a corruption of the Maliseet Nictau,

View along JVictorLcuke to the eastward -from the outlet

Fig. 7.

meaning Forks, and applied by the Indians to the main forks of
Tobique. It was extended to the Little Tobique, and then to the Lake.
Description. The most striking and charming feature of Nictor
consists in the splendid forested hills among which it winds. In the
beauty of its hill scenery no other lake of the province can compare with
it. The hills are highest towards the east (their heights are upon the
map), and as one enters from the Little Tobique he sees the fine range

View along Nictor Loshe tt the south-east from Qrrnstrony Brack

Fir;. 8.

crudely shown in Figure 7. This figure will be sufficient to admit of
their identification, but gives no conception of their real grandeur. In
some respects they show yet better from farther up the lake (Figure 8)>
and here the stately form of Sagamook shows to best advantage.
Best of all, however, are the views from the little island under Saga-

NATURAL HISTORY AND PHYSIOGRAPHY OF NEW BRUNSWICK.

243

mook, from which all the prominent hills about the lake are visible.
The view lo the east is the finest (Figure 9), but to the west it is little
inferior (Figure 10). Above all and over all, however, towers grand
Sagamook. Rising steeply over sixteen hundred feet directly from
the lake, higher than any other New Brunswick hill rises from the
water, clothed with living forest, except for a few bold bosses near

its summit, shrouded often in mists, it is easily the finest, even though
not the highest, of New Brunswick hills. Happy is he who, from the
ideal camping place upon the island, can watch day after day these
beautiful hills in their varying lights and colors, and can know they
are his own.

Next in charm to the hills is the virgin forest which clothes them.
This is everywhere entirely unbroken, except for the few naked spots

l//etY a/ony -Sector Lccke to the weiturard from l/isitors

Id..

Fig. 10.

near the summit of Sagamook. There is no trace of fire, nor of the
lumberman. Probably in no accessible part of the province is there a
finer forest, or one more nearly primeval than this. It is of the
mixed growth of our common provincial species, and it is a fine sight to
see the splendid spruce in sombre green towering above the level of
the brighter green hard woods. This forest owes its preservation
to the expensiveness of driving lumber down the crooked Little

244 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

Tobique. But the shadow of the deadly pulp-mill already looms over
it, and its glory will soon depart.

This forest is extremely rich in game, especially moose and deer.
The lakes contain many trout and other fish, though in this respect
they are inferior to the Nepisiguit lakes.

Physiography. The lake is 864 feet, more rather than less, above
mean sea level. Its maximum depth is 67 feet, surprisingly little for
a hill lake.* This depth diminishes to only 28 feet directly under
Sagamook, and lessens eastward so that Mud or Berton Lake, separa
ted from Nictor only by a morainic ridge and connected with it by a
short brook falling from one to two feet, is but a few feet deep,
though it is made thus shallow by deposits of organic mud similar to
that found in so many of our " mud lakes. "f The shores of Nictor
are usually bold and rocky, but in places the shores are of loose
morainic materials, and but rarely of gravel or sand. There are but
two islands, one of them narrow and low, apparently a moraine, and
the other of highly tilted slate rising abruptly from the bottom. The
latter bears a few trees and bushes, and forms the most charming
camping-ground that I know of in New Brunswick. Four large brooks
flow into the lakes, of which two, Bald Mountain and Caribou, flow
in broad deep valleys, which are doubtless the courses of ancient
rivers. Williams' Brook is new, and has upon it, not far from the
mouth, an irregular fall of some eight feet, whose murmur can be
heard from afar on still days, and the mist from which in certain
weathers hangs like smoke over the slope of Gordon. A striking
place is Spring Lake, practically an immense spring with a summer
temperature of but 41° or 42°. The lakes empty by the Little Tobique,
a very winding stream of much, though rather monotonous, beauty,
but perfectly ideal for the amateur canoeman.

Origin of the Lake. I believe the lake occupies an ancient valley
of erosion choked by glacial drift. As I shall show in a later note,
the entire upper valley of the Nepisiguit is very ancient, and it could
not have emptied by its present course. It probably therefore ran
into Nictor Lake by way of the portage valley now followed by Caribou
Brook. The valley of the Little Tobique, though perhaps post-glacial

*The deepest known lake in New Brunswick is Clear Lake, Lepreau, 78 feet ((his
Bulletin, XIV, 48).

t This Bulletin, XVII, 126.

NATURAL HISTORY AND PHYSIOGRAPHY OF NEW BRUNSWICK. 245

in spots, is certainly pre-glacial as a whole. By its extension back
the lake was doubtless robbed from Mamozekel waters, into which it
once probably flowed along the low valley now occupied by Bald
Mountain Brook.

The geology, as traced in general by Bailey, Ells, and Chalmers, is
shown upon the geological map. All the large hills about the lake
and its entire eastern end are of Pre-cambrian felsites, but Silurian
rocks appear at the western end. One very remarkable fact about the
geology of the lake, first referred to by Bailey, is the presence of the
little island of slate, Visitor's Island, completely surrounded by felsites.
It may represent the remanant of a tongue of Silurian rocks extending
along the bed of the lake to this point, which would give a great age
to this valley. The island slopes down so steeply and abruptly on the
north side as to suggest a fault running along the axis of the lake.
Were it not for its relatively enormous size, 100 feet long by 50 wide,
one would be tempted to view it as simply an enormous boulder. But
this is but one of the very many attractive problems awaiting solution
in this region.

Natural History. No study whatever has yet been made of the
zoology of the region, and but little of the botany.

The Neighboring Highlands. To the north of the lake the moun-
tain ranges appear irregular, and I have not tried to work out their
particular arrangement. On the southern side, however, they are as
follows : Sagamook is not an isolated mountain, but is the northern
most of three parallel ridges forming together a great island or plateau
of felsite (see map, Fig. 6, and also the map accompanying the next
note, Fig. 13). This plateau has Nictor Lake on the north, the deep
valley of Caribou Brook and the portage on the east, Bald Mountain
Brook valley on the west, and a valley between Nepisiguit Lakes and
the Mamozekel on the south. Sagamook is separated from the next
ridge, Mount Head, by a valley not over 300 feet deep, while a some-
what deeper valley lies between Head and Mount Carleton. The
appearance of Head and Carleton from Sagamook is shown by Fig. 11.
Mount Carleton is over 100 feet higher than Sagamook, and is easily
recognized by its bold, bare, saw-like top. Still farther to the south-
ward one can see the summit of Mount Winslow, not a part of this
plateau (Fig. 12). On the westward of the valley of Bald Mountain
Brook runs a fine range of hills south-west. It begins at Nictor Lake

246

BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

with Franquelin; next is Bailey, and then follows a series of six or more
crests, which are to be named for the geologists who have investigated
the structure of the province, and which, therefore, may well be called
the Geologists' Range. But on these matters future communications
will be made to the Society.

The impression of this plateau which one gains by viewing it
from either Nictor or Nepisiguit lakes is extremely misleading. Thus

t/insl°w

View from summit o/ Sqyamock (en- Bald) ntountai n southward over Jits Head ana Carleton

Fig. 11.

the summit of Mount Carleton is not visible at all from Nictor Lake
nor from the Upper Nepisiguit Lake, though it is from the Lower
Nepisiguit Lakes. Again, the summit of Sagamook is not visible
from the Upper Nepisiguit Lake, but only from the lower lakes.
It is only by visiting the summits of these mountains and comparing
the different views thus obtained, that one can gain a correct knowl-
edge of their relationships.

A great charm of these mountains is the view from their summits.
That from Sagamook is particularly grand. From the naked bosses

Winshiv /ram Carleton

Sagamcok and Head from Carleton

Big Jjald anj Ten-
erifjc frim Saoame'A

Fia. 18.

at the west end one can look away over the rolling Silurian plateau to
the mountains of Quebec and Maine, while from the highest point of
the mountain, a bare place near the eastern end of the ridge, one can
see far off to the north and east, and the fine range of mountains
through which runs the Nepisiguit, and the great mass from which
rises Big Bald on the South Branch. But even these views are sur-

NATURAL HISTORY AND PHYSIOGRAPHY OF NEW BRUNSWICK. 247

passed by those from the summit of Mount Carleton,* for here from
one spot the eye may range without hindrance in every direction, and
there cannot be a grander outlook over a more rugged country any-
where in this province. Everywhere lie the splendid hills with innum-
erable crests, as if the sea, with its rollers and breakers were suddenly
stilled to stone. They stretch away vast, silent, patient, as unvexed
by the little affairs of man as by the shadows of the summer clouds
floating above them. They are nearly all forested and unburnt, a
great contrast with most other parts of the province. As one stands
upon the summit of one of these rarely-visited hills on a fair summer's
day, and looks upon these unspoiled hills and forests, the very rugged
foundations of his native land, he cannot but feel an exaltation which
is one of the best joys of life.

Nictor Lake, therefore, lies to-day not only by nature the most
charming place in the interior of New Brunswick, but as yet entirely
unspoiled. But the doom of the summer hotel even now threatens its
shores, and the pulp-mill its forests. But why should not the people
of New Brunswick prevent its despoiling, and set aside the lake and
its shores as a provincial park, to be kept wild and beautiful for their
enjoyment forever? It can be sacrificed for a small present profit, or
saved for a large one in the future. But there is another reason for
the preservation of the lake region. In the very near future New
Brunswick must turn her attention to systematic forestry, or else lose
her chief source of wealth, and resort to direct taxation of her
citizens. The first step towards such forestry must be the setting
aside of certain areas to be managed on good principles, as a nucleus
for forestry extension, and for instruction in forestry management.
Nowhere in the province in an equally accessible place is there so fine
a forest as here, or one which it would be easier to manage on correct
principles. Various states of the United States are making reserva-
tions about the heads of their principal rivers for the purpose of
preserving forest and game and water supply, as well as for wild parks.
Let us be warned in time and set aside here a forest and game preserve
and wild park for the future instruction and enjoyment of our people.

* Mount Carleton is most easily reached from Nictor by taking a compass line to it from
the highest point of Sagamook.

248 bulletin of the natural history society.

30. — Proposals for a Nomenclature of unnamed New Brunswick
Hills and Mountains.

(Read December 5th, 1899).

It is a fact that the great majority of New Brunswick hills and
mountains, including some of the very finest, are to-day quite name"
less. In the settled districts, it is true, they are mostly named, but
most of New Brunswick is unsettled. This seems the more remark-
able when it is recalled that practically all of our streams and lakes,
even to small brooks and ponds, and in the wildest parts of the
province, are named. But for this the reason is plain. Our water-
courses have a relation to our interests through their use for lumber,
ing, hunting and fishing ; hence they must often be spoken of, and
names for them arise. But our mountains only exceptionally affect our
interests in these or other ways, hence are rarely spoken of, and names
do not arise for them. Such is the condition at present, but it
will not always be so. As the province becomes settled, as hunters
and tourists visit it more, as a provincial literature arises, as forestry
becomes systematized, as maps become more accurate and detailed, as
scientific explorations become more extended and minute, a need for
names for our mountains will be felt, and they will gradually come
into use. Unless, however, some broad and consistent plan for the
giving of such names be adopted, those which will arise will be often
of the most trivial, inappropriate and inconvenient sort. One has
only to instance the very numerous and confusing Bald Mountains.*
Is it not possible to inaugurate some plan which will provide for our
mountains a convenient, appropriate and pleasing nomenclature 1
Certainly such a matter is eminently one for consideration by this
Society.

If now, we pass to details, three questions arise : first, what kind
of names should be given ; second, what shall determine the adoption
of proposed names; third, how may they be introduced into general
circulation 1 We may most conveniently consider these questions in
reverse order.

How may names, deliberately given, be introduced into general
circulation 1 Guides, lumbermen, and most others who are much in

♦Attention was first called to incongruities and inconveniences in our place-nomen-
clature by Professor Bailey (Mines and Minerals of N. B., 1864, pp. 8, 9).

NATURAL HISTORY AND PHYSIOGRAPHY OF NEW BRUNSWICK. 249

the woods, make no use of maps, but adopt names only as they hear
them, or as they arise naturally from the fixation of descriptive phrases,
the method by which nearly all place-names arise among uneducated
people. Yet such people, as I have often observed, have great respect
for maps, and for their "correct," i. e., printed names; and undoubt-
edly they would adopt them when brought to their attention, for
otherwise unnamed places, provided only they are pronounceable and
familiar enough in form to be easily remembered. But surveyors,
tourists, hunters, scientists, and the better class of guides, do use maps,
and unhesitatingly adopt their names. The number of such visitors
to our mountains is increasing, and if the new names are on the
maps used by them, they will be adopted ; the guides will then hear
them and pass them to others, and so on, until in time they will
become widespread and fixed. The great practical point, then, is to
secure their insertion upon all new maps, not only upon geological and
other scientific maps, but upon all those issued by the Provincial and
Dominion governments. If the Society approves of this plan, and
will use its influence to urge the adoption of these names in all official
publications, setting the example in its own publications, it will go far
to secure this desirable end.

We next consider what shall determine the names to be adopted.
I would suggest that such names be adopted and approved by the
Society as are given upon the same principles as are reeognized among
scientific men for the naming of new species of animals or plants ; that
is, the first name applied to a previously unnamed place shall be
accepted when published with such a description and illustration as
will enable any other person to recognize it. The illustration should
be a drawing, or better a photograph, or a survey (not a sketch) map
accurately locating the place.

We ask, finally, what kind of names may best be given 1 Here
we are much aided by taking account of the known qualities of the
best place-names. The best names are, first, melodious, that is, they
have a well-balanced succession of a few pleasing easily-pronounced
sounds ; second, they are dignified, that is, are free from incongruous
associations, and have sounds consistent with the character of the
place ; third, they are individual or unique, that is, are applied to but
a single place, and not met with elsewhere. Few names can realize
all of these qualities, but they put before us an ideal to be striven for.

250 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

As to the actual words chosen, they may be drawn from any one of
several classes. First, there are descriptive names; but these are good
only when they describe some striking and easily-recognizable quality
of the place, and are such as are not likely to be in use or to be
adopted elsewhere. Our mountains, however, are not unlike enough
to one another to make many such names available. Then there are
Indian names, especially when these are familiarized into an easily
pronounced form. Unfortunately, however, our Indians appear rarely
to have had native names for mountains, and this, of course, for much
the same reason that their white successors have none. Again, names
may be drawn from those of persons or events prominent in the early
history of the province. In these we have a great store of pleasing,
easily-pronounced, already more or less familiar, words; and, as 'to
their appropriateness, it is surely fitting that the names of those who
have laid the foundations of the province should be lastingly commem-
orated in her eternal foundation hills. Most of our new names will
probably be drawn from this source. Of course such names will be
applied, as nearly as possible, to places associated with the person or
event commemorated. It is a fact, too, that more honor would be
done a person by naming for him a smaller mountain in an accessible
and much visited place, than a larger one in a place inaccessible.
There should be, too, some proportion between the importance of the
place and the prominence of the person commemorated ; the greater
hills should be named only for those of provincial prominence, while
the smaller may well be devoted to the names of those whose import-
ance is only local.

With the convictions here expressed, and following the principles
here recommended, I have ventured to apply names to the more
prominent mountains about Nictor Lake and along the upper Nepisi-
guit. This region includes some of the highest, and perhaps scenically
the finest, of New Brunswick mountains, and is withal fairly accessible.

About Nictor Lake is a particularly fine series of hills, described
and figured in the preceding note (No. 29). The map accompanying
that paper, as well as the one with this, show all new names in italics

Mount Bvmcvrdvn is named for the Recollet Missionary, who,
about 1621, perished of cold and hunger somewhere in this vicinity
while on his way from the mouth of the Nepisiguit to the St. John.
Franquelin is for the great French cartographer, who was the first, in

BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY OF NEW HRUNSWICK, XVIII, 1899.

33 Bali nouirh

& M.^&**

Geology .entire area Pre-Cambr«m

and uppei Nepisiguit J 1 ^ e,tc '»f . "e,st er"*1°!

1 RRIIKlswir K # II Nictor Lake, which is Silurian slak

by W.F&anong sjpj

<

i*»"

.v\\\iii'",',"

"fh0'k'f¥&5lo«

Mount Tenenp
rBQthUr5tM°ur.ta.*v

aw/ Enaud

Figures on (akeb and mountains

are feet above mean sea level - - : /fmnt Carter

Figures along river aTe miles >* •

above Bcthurst +are camp-around

5 Miles. Names in itaha are new.

^Bulletin ol the Natural Histonj beady ol New Brunswick, No 18

The height of Sagamook is "2534 feet above the sea ; Carleton is 2646 feet ; Gordon is 1569 feet ; LaToui is 2090 feet.

NATURAL HISTORY AND PHYSIOGRAPHY OF NEW BRUNSWICK. 251

1686, to place Nictor Lake upon a map. Garden is for the surveyor
who, in 1835, was the first to sketch a modern map of the lake, and
to apply the name Nictor to it. Berton (lake, not mountain), is for
the other surveyor who, in 1837, made the sketch map which has been
the original of all published maps of the lake even to the present day.
Head is for a governor of the province who was here in 1849 and
named Mount Teneriffe. Gordon is for another governor, whose
charming book, "Wilderness Journeys," published first in 1864, gives
the first published description of the lake. It was he who named
Mount Sagamook. Bailey is for the naturalist, Professor in the
University of New Brunswick, who gave us, in 1864, the first scientific
account of the geology and botany of this region. Carleton, applied
to what is much the highest mountain in this part of the province,
and possibly in the entire province, is named for Thomas Carleton,
governor of New Brunswick from its foundation in 1784 until his
death in 1817. Mounts Carleton, Head and Sagamook form a
plateau, which, since its peaks are named for two governors, and by
another, may well be called The Governors' Plateau. In Nictor Lake
lies a little island named from its mode of formation, Moraine Island.
South of Carleton lies another high and conspicuous mountain named
Winslow, in honor of Edward Winslow, who was so closely associated
with the foundation of the Province of New Brunswick, and who is
as yet uncommemorated in any place-name.

As one stands upon the western end of Sagamook, he can see
running off to the southwest a fine range of very prominent hills, with
several rounded summits. This range begins with Mount Bailey and
terminates near Bald Head, south of the Tobique. Since Bailey is
one of the range, the other summits may well be named for the other
geologists who have worked in this province, Gesner, Robb, Hartt,
Matthew, Dawson, Ells, Chalmers, and the range may well be called
the Geologists' Range. No maps or figures are here presented, for I
hope soon to give it further study.

We pass next to Nepisiguit waters, of which a map is given
herewith (Fig. 13), and we may well commemorate in its numerous
grand hills those who have been prominent in the history of the river
and the region of the North Shore about its mouth. We come first to
a large lake. It first appears on the excellent map of 1685 by the
Recollet missionary, Jumeau, as L. aucler, and the name is restored.

252

BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

From no part of this lake can the summits of Sagamook or Carleton
be seen, nor, of course, can the lake be seen from their summits, but
they can be seen with great distinctness from near the summit of
Teneriffe (Figs. 14, 15). In addition to those already mentioned, one
sees a low rounded hill, which shows more distinctly from the lower
end of the lake, named for Jumeau, the lake's first cartographer. To

1 \lieui o( the QoveTnors Tlateau westward from near summit af Tenenjfe

Fiq. 14.

the northward stands up a splendid very high rounded dome, falling
outside the limits of the map, but shown in Fig. 15, easily seen from
Sagamook and from other directions, which is named Mount Villebon
in honor of the most prominent of the French governors of what is
now New Brunswick when it was a part of Acadia.

Below Aucler are three other shallow lakes, from the eastermost of
which an arm, forming another lake, runs to the southward. This is

Gordon Rid9£/BeTnQTdm
°°f Ventage:

l//ew norfluA/est from near summit of- ?foi/n.t Tenenj-fi,

Fig. 15.

remarkable for its great deposit of diatomaceous earth, described in
an earlier note (No. 17), whence it may be well called Diatom Lake*
South of these lakes and parallel with them runs a splendid ridge,
known appropriately to the lumbermen as the Green llange. It is, I
think, continuous with Mount Winslow, but I am not sure of this.

NATURAL HISTORY AND PHYSIOGRAPHY OF NEW BRUNSWICK. 253

South of it stands Mount Teneriffe, from which a fair view may be
obtained to the westward (Figs. 14, 15), and a particularly grand one
to the eastward (Fig. 16). From here two mountains falling outside
the limits of the map show up with particular distinctness, the round
dome of Big Bald on the south branch of Nepisiguit, and to the left
of it a pointed mountain with three bare spots near its summit. The
latter is named DesBarres for the man, afterwards governor of Cape
Breton, who first thoroughly surveyed our coasts, and who mapped,
in 1780, the interior of New Brunswick far better than any other
cartographer until well into this century. This is, I think, the moun-
tain shown on the geological map at the forks of the south branch of
Nepisiguit (just west of the large N).

We begin now to descend the river. As in other rivers of the
province the lumbermen have a nomenclature of their own for the

Petersu

V/etY to the Eastward -from the, summit of Teneriffe

Fig. 16.

rapids, rocks, points, etc., along the river, and these names (for much
help in compiling which I am indebted to Mr. P. J. Burns, M.P.P., of
Bathurst,) are given on the map. As to the mountains, the first we
meet is the symmetrical hill around which the river flows, which may
well be named Mount Cooney, in honor of the author of the "History
of Northern New Brunswick and Gaspe," (1832), in which is found
thft first, and, on the whole, an accurate description of the river.
Northeast of this is a prominent symmetrical mountain, which is
named Mount Peters, for the surveyor whose accurate map of the
river, made in 1832, is the basis for all subsequent maps. From the
forks of the Little South Branch three fine mountains may be seen at
once, one of which was named Felspar Mount by Professor Bailey in
1863, and on the slope of which he describes a remarkable chasm.
That to the east of it is named Mount Walker in honor of Commodore
Walker, who was the first English settler at the mouth of the river,

2M BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

where in 1768-1776 he had a large trading establishment described
by Cooney. The rounded mountain just north of the ri%rer here is
named Mount Wightman, for the surveyor of Fredericton who, in
1839, carried a line of barometric measurements through this region
for the British government, as described in a Boundary Blue Book for
1M0. Farther down on the south bank is a distinct, though not a
high hill, which should be named Mount Goold (on the map, by mistake,
Gould), for Arthur Goold, who at one time owned the site of Bathurst
and attempted to make a settlement there. Lower still, on the north
bank, towers, up a splendid symmetrical rounded mountain, prominent
in the landscape from both up and down river (see Figures 16, 18),
showing from the west a marked red color ; this is named Mount
LaTour for the Sieur de LaTour, so well known in our provincial
history. Just west of it is another of similar character, but not so
large, and more deeply stained with red, and this is named for
Charnisay, his rival. Directly south of LaTour, across the river, is a
splendid wooded ridge, as high as or higher than LaTour itself, and as
prominent, but of softer and more pleasing character, which is named
Mount Marie, for our Provincial heroine, the wife of LaTour.

From Mount LaTour to Portage Brook the hills are high,* but
none stand out distinctly until the brook is reached. Portage Brook
occupies a deep and broad valley, with splendid hill ranges along both
sides, and these are named the Missionaries' Range and the Acadians
Range to commemorate two peoples prominent in the history of the
North Shore. One of the hills in the Missionaries Range, the promin-
ent one as seen from below the brook, in the angle between brook and
river, is named for LeClercq, who, in 1691, published a most valuable
book containing much information about the lower part of the river.
It will be well in the future to apply the names of other missionaries
to other summits of this range, and likewise to apply the names of
prominent Acadians to the summits in the Acadian range.

Just below the South Branch, on the south side, are two promin-
ent rounded hills (Figure 17) which may be named Mount Hal ion and
Mount Winemowet for two Micmac chiefs mentioned by Cooney.

* From the river alone one is apt to be misled as to the character of these hills along the
river. They appear like long ridges, and one imagines deep valleys and other ridges behind
them. In fact they are often but the edges of a great plateau, into which the river has cut
a deep valley. It is only to more or less isolated mountains and ridges that names are
applied in this paper.

NATURAL HISTORY AND PHYSIOGRAPHY OF NEW BRUNSWICK.

255

Lower, on the north bank stands out a very prominent mountain
(Fig. 17), which is named Mount Membertou in honor of the grand old
Micrnac sachem, friend of the French, and one of those who saw
Cartier on the North Shore in 1534. Descending the river one
presently sees a bare reddish summit appearing over a wooded ridge,
the first glimpse of Fronsac (Fig. 17), and later there comes into view

Wt7ie?~'i.0Hr&t arid Mali on, -from Ciuriver-

MembCrtoU frvm. Che rt-s7r~

Fra nsj.c fro m ri /erat& JDSTiyS frvm tfte r/Ver above.

Enaud from Titer be7ou>

Fig. 17.

the symmetrical mountain locally called Bald Mountain (Fig. 17), but
much better to be known as Mount Denys in honor of the first settler
at the mouth of the river, and the author of one of the most important
early works on Acadia, published in Paris in 1672. North of it lies
Mount Fronsac (Fig. 18), somewhat higher than Denys itself, but
otherwise less distinctive, named for the Sieur de Fronsac, Denys' son,
who lived and had a fort at Miramichi. Southwest of Denys there

Car tier from Denys

Vitur westward fnm Summit of J)enj/s FnnsacfromDinys

Fig. 18.

towers up a bare mountain visible from many points (Fig. 18), the
highest and most conspicuous in this vicinity (sometimes, I believe,
called Little Bald Mountain), which may well be named Mount Cartier
m honor of the first explorer and map-maker of our North Shore. To
the westward rises a high and prominent ridge, which is named the
Seigniors Ridge for the French Seigniors who once possessed much of
New Brunswick, and played some small part in her history. To the
eastward is a lower mountain, which shows more prominently from

256 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

the river below (Fig 17), and this is named Mount Enaud (also spelled
Enault) for one of the most prominent of the early settlers at the
mouth of the river, mentioned by Cooney.

Below Indian Falls no more prominent mountains appear. The
country becomes a flat plateau, sloping evenly and gradually eastward.

31. — On Heights determined with Aneroid in 1899.

(Read December 5th, 1699).
In the course of a canoe trip up the Tobique and down the Nepisi-
guit in August last, I made many measurements with a good aneroid.
These were all taken contemporaneously with the readings made at
Fredericton by Dr. Harrison for the meteorological service, and I wish
to express my thanks to him both for adjusting my aneroid and also
for a long series of readings used in computing results. I have since
found that my aneroid tends to read a trifle low, especially on the
greater heights ; hence the following figures are to be taken as below,
rather than above, the truth. Those marked with a star (*) have
never before been measured. The heights are all above mean sea level
at St. John. The position of all of the places, except the last in the
list, may be seen upon the map accompanying Note 30.

Forks of Tobique (or Nictau)- Mean of two measurements, 576 feet. Wight-

man gives (with an added correction explained earlier in Note 25) 575

feet for four miles below Nictau.
Surface of Nictor Lake. Mean of fourteen measurements, 837 feet. Chalmers

made it 878, and Wightman (corrected) 877. .Mean of the three, 864.
Sagamook for Bald) Mountain. Mean of two measurements, 1633 feet above

the lake. Chalmers gives 1659, and Wightman 1719. Mean of the

three, 1670 above the lake, and 2534 above the sea.
*Mount Carleton. By direct measurement 112 feet higher than Sagamook,

and hence 1782 above Nictor Lake, and 2646 above the sea.
*Mount Gordon, on Nictor Lake. 705 feet above Nictor Lake, and 1569 above

the sea.
*Bank of Caribou Brook, half way across the Nictor-Nepisiguit Portage, 984

feet.
Surface of Nepisiguit Lake. Mean of rive measurements, 101 1 feet. Chalmers

givee 996 ; mean of the two, 1003. Mr. Chalmers statement that this is

the highest lake in New Brunswick, was of course made before the

heights of the lakes on the south branch of Tobique, which are much

higher, were measured. By direct measurement I made it 145 feet

above Nictor Lake, /. e., 864 + 145 = 1009.

NATURAL HISTORY AND PHYSIOGRAPHY OF NEW BRUNSWICK. 257

*Mount Teneriffe. By direct measurement, 1105 feet above Nepisiguit Lake,
and hence 2108 feet above the sea. Mr. Chalmers is in error in stating
that this is about as high as Sagamook. Even as seen from Sagamook
it is much lower.

*Mount LaTour. By direct measurement, 1150 feet above the river. As this
falls 160 feet between the lake and Portage Brook, and the fall is con-
siderably greater below than above it, the river is here probably 940 feet
above the sea, and hence LaTour is 2090 feet above the sea.

*Mouth of Portage Brook, river level. Mean of five observations, 843 feet.

*River at camping place near the " bear house" at foot of Mount Cartier or
Bald Mountain. Mean of four observations, 715 feet.
Mount Denys, or Bald Mountain, above Indian Falls. By direct measure-
ment, above the river at the camping place, 1175 feet. In 1808 I made it
1170 feet ; mean, 1172. This agrees well with the height of 1183 feet on
the survey map of 1832 by Peters. Mean of these two, 1138, which,
added to the river level, gives 1893 feet above the sea. Chalmers, fol-
lowing Ells, gives 1922 ; mean, 1907. There are higher mountains in
the near neighborhood.
Mount Enaud, or Bald Face Mountain, is given on the Peters map as 998 feet
high, that is, of course, above the river, and hence about 1690 feet above
the sea.

*Lower end Indian Falls. Mean of three measurements, 632 feet.

*Mouth of Nine-mile Brook. Mean of two measurements, 429 feet.

APPENDIX — KINGS COUNTY NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY. 259

APPENDIX.

THE FREDERICTON NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

(Instituted February 2nd, 1895").

The Society continues to hold its meetings in the High School
Building through the kindness of the School Board. The attendance
has been generally good, and much interest shown in the discussion of
the subjects dealt with in the papers read before the Society.

During the year addresses were given, or papers read, as follows :

1899.

Feb. 20. Insect Life, by Mr. Wm. Mcintosh.

Mar. 20. Electricity, by H. H. Hagennan, M.A.

April 17. A Talk on Insects, by Mr. G. W. Bailey.

May 15. The Eye, by Dr. Bailey.

Oct. 16. Our Summer's Work, by Dr. Bailey and Mr. W. T. L. Reed.

Nov. 20. How the Brain Works, by Mr. John Brittain.

At the May meeting Mr. W. H. Moore presented the Society with
a number of alcoholic specimens of Reptilia and Amphibia; Mr. Diury
Allen donated a collection of birds' eggs, and Mr. H. H. Hagennan,
a crayfish and a cat-fish.

The officers of the Society for the year ending in February, 1900, are :

L. W. Bailey, Ph.D Presidt nt.

G. N. Babbitt, Esq Vice-President.

John Brittain . ., Secretary.

B. C. Foster, M.A. Treasurer.

H. H. Hagerman, M.A Curator.

JOHN BRITTAIN,

Secretary.

260 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY,

KINGS COUNTY NATURAL HISTORY 'SOCIETY.

(Organized at Sussex, Kings County, N. B., October 2nd, 1897).
The officers for the year ending October 2nd, 1899, are as follows :

R. P. Steeves, A.M President.

Miss L. Wetmore Vice-President.

W. N. Biggar Seen tary '-Treasurer.

During the year nine meetings were held, eight regular and one
special. The following papers have been read before the Society :

1898.
Nov. 5. Snakes, by Miss Annie White.

1899.
Mar. 4. The Deer Family, by Miss Annie White.

Fur-bearing Animals, by W. A. Alward, A.B.
April 8. Insects Injurious to House Plants, by W, E. Goo Id.

Unity of Living Things, by Robert King, A.B.

Return of Birds, by Miss L. Wetmore.
May "). Moths and their Preventatives, by Miss Edith Darling.

A Spring Ramble, by Miss L. Wetmore.

The Nuthatches, by Miss L. Wetmore.

The result of the work of collecting for the museum has been the
addition of forty four specimens to the scientific collections.

For the better keeping and exhibiting of the specimens, the Society
has procured this year the following : one large cabinet for minerals,
etc., one glass case for birds, and two cases for insects.

Eight new members were added to the roll during the year.

The thanks of the Society are due the Natural History Society of
New Brunswick for Bulletins, etc., received., and also to Mr. G. U.
Hay for assistance rendered.

W. N. BIGGAR,

Secretary.

APPENDIX — PKINCE EDWARD ISLAND SOCIETY. 261

THE NATURAL HISTORY AND ANTIQUARIAN
SOCIETY OF PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND.

(Instituted March 28th, 1889; re-organized January 10th, 1899).

During 1899 eleven public meetings have been held, and on each
occasion the attendance has been good.

The dates of the meetings and the subjects of the papers and
lectures were as follows :

Re-organization.

Business meeting, followed by an impromptu address upon "Some

of our Fungi," by Mr. John MacSwain.
Rust of Wheat, by John MacSwain.

Geological Reminiscences of Prince Edward Island, by Thos. May.
Floriculture, by James Taifc.
An Abnormal Vegetable Growth in the Human Throat, by L. W.

Watson, M.A.
Some Geological Evidences of the Nebular Hypothesis, by John

Newson.
Some Effects of Solar Radiation upon Organic Life, by W. J. Bui

man, B. S., etc.
Some Notes on Man Primeval, by Charles Palmer, Q.C.
The Colored Races of P. E. Island, by J. T. Mellish, M.A.

(a) Notes on Fungi Collected by Miss Pippy, 1899, by John Mac-
Swain

(b) Note on a Piece of Petrified Wood found in the heart of a
living Tree, by J. M Duncan.

(<■) Explanation of an Abnormal Potato Growth (exhibited by Mr.
W. Doull), Lawrence Watson.
Dec. 11. An Introduction to the Study of Mineralogy, by Rev. T. H. Hunt,
M.A., B.D.

The annual "outing" was held on the 24th of June, when the
Society and many guests, having visited on the way the Micmac
encampment at Rocky Point, walked to the ruins of "Ringwood,"
where Hon. F. St. Croix Brecken delivered a short address upon the
Life and Times of Col. Cumberland. The ruins of Fort La Joie were
next visited, where Messrs. Brecken and Newson delivered very inter-

1899.

Jan.

10.

24.

Feb.

7.

21.

Mar.

7.

21.

Apr.

4.

18.

May

2.

16.

Nov.

27,

262 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

esting addresses upon the history of the place. The position of many
historic sites was pointed out by Mr. Newson as the party, after
luncheon at the President's summer residence, proceeded on its way to
Holland Cove. Here the listeners enjoyed the reading by Mr. Brecken
of a paper upon Captain Holland and his work, embodying much
matter of rare historical value.

During the year a delegation from the Executive Committee
interviewed the Provincial Government, praying for a grant of money
(such as is annually given our sister societies in the other provinces),
and the use of rooms for the Society and for museum accommodation.
The delegation was most kindly received, and the accommodation
asked for was promised as soon as any suitable rooms at the disposal
of the government should become available.

Application was made to the Geological Survey for a collection of
mineralogical specimens which has been promised so soon as our
Society shall have a suitable place in which to store and exhibit
the grant.

We have received the publications of a few sister societies, and it
is much to be desired that we may soon be in financial position to
publish such bulletins as will enable us to secure a number of similar
"exchanges," the educational value of which cannot be over-estimated.

In conclusion, it is gratifying to recognize on every hand,
many evidences that the Society enjoys the confidence, interest and
good-will of the community at large, that it is conceded that material
advance has been made in the educational work of the Society, and
that the prospects of rapid growth and constantly-increasing useful-
ness are of the very brightest character.

LAWRENCE W. WATSON,

Secretary- Treasurer.
Chailottetown, 1'. E. I.

APPENDIX — THE ST. JOHN OBSERVATORY. 263

THE ST. JOHN OBSERVATORY.

In addition to the annual meteorological abstract, a brief descrip-
tion of the instruments and work of the St. John Observatory may be
of interest.

The Observatory is the chief station in New Brunswick under the
Canadian Meteorological Service of the Department of Marine and
Fisheries.

Observations of pressure, temperature, hygrometric conditions of
the air, amount and character of precipitation, clouds, velocity and
direction of the wind and general conditions of the weather are made
at intervals of four hours, commencing at 3.44 a.m. local time. In
addition to the meteorological work, astronomical observations are
made for determination of time.

The Director's office, instrument and clock room is situated in the
north wing of the Customs building, the thermometer shed and rain
gauge on the ground adjoining the observer's residence, the anemome-
ter and wind vane are mounted on the time ball tower.

The standard barometer by H. J. Green, New York, is constructed
on Fortin's principle, the level of the mercury in the cistern being
adjusted previous to each reading; secondary to this is a smaller
barometer of the same construction, and a Richard's barograph (self-
recording barometer). The thermometers are all by Negretti <k Zam-
bra of London, have been tested at the Kew Observatory in London,
and are exposed in the Canadian pattern shed and screen which faces
north, the bulbs of the principal thermometers being four feet above
the soil. The highest and lowest temperatures are registered by
mercurial maximum and spirit minimum self-registering thermometers
which are read and re-set at the midnight observation, the temperature
of the air at time of observation from the ordinary mercurial therm-
ometer, and the hygrometric observations from a pair of thermometers,
one of which has its bulb covered by a thin muslin wrapping, kept
moistened by water or covered by a thin coating of ice during freezing
weather.

264 BULLETIN OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

The anemometer is of the Robinson pattern, and with the wind
vane records electrically the direction and velocity of the wind upon
the register. The register has three essential parts, — the cylinder, the
clock and the electro magnets. A specially ruled sheet is placed upon
the cylinder and revolved by means of clock work ; the direction of
the wind is printed upon the sheet every five minutes, and a mark is
made at right angles to the direction of the revolution of the cylinder
for each mile of wind, and the number of marks within a given space
shows the rate per hour at which the wind is blowing. The sheet
placed on the cylinder holds the record for twenty-four hours.

The rain gauge has a circular receiving surface equal to ten square
inches. No snow gauge is used, but it is assumed that ten inches of
snow equals one inch of rain.

The astronomical equipment is intended specially for the determina-
tion of correct time. The transit room is situated on the western
side of the building, and the transit telescope is mounted on a sub-
stantial brick pier, capped with stone. It is of modern construction
by Troughton & Simms, London, has an object glass of two and a half
inches diameter, two setting circles attached to the tube, micrometer
eye pieces and electric illumination. Observations of stars on the
meridian are made with this instrument for the correction of clock
errors and rates.

The standard sidereal clock by Victor Kullberg, London, was
received at the Observatory in September, 1899. It has a zinc and
steel compensated pendulum, similar to the standard sidereal clock of
the Royal Observatory, Greenwich, a central steel rod being surrounded
to about the middle of its length by a tube of zinc, and then incased
by an outer tube of steel. The latter carries the lead bob, which is
cylindrical in shape (weighing forty pounds) and suspended at the
middle of its height, thus eliminating the temperature changes in the
bob itself. This clock is of the best construction, and is fitted with
break circuit attachment for operating chronograph. The movement
and pendulum are mounted on a solid iron bracket, which is firmly
bolted to heavy masonry ; the iron base and bracket also carries the
case of solid teak. To prevent sudden changes of temperature from
affecting the clock, it is enclosed in a closet which is thickly padded
with felt.

APPENDIX — THE ST. JOHN OBSERVATORY. 265

The transmitting clock, which was formerly used as a standard
sidereal, was made by Emanuel, of London. It has lately been fitted
with electric contacts for automatically transmitting time by the
electric telegraph. It has a mercurial compensated pendulum, and is
enclosed in a similar closet to the one described for the sidereal
standard. There is also another mean time clock, with mercurial
pendulum and a box chronometer, in the observatory.

The time ball on the northern tower of the Customs building is
dropped by an electric key on the table which contains the electric
telegraph instruments.

D. L. HUTCHINSON,

Director.

266

BULLETIN OP THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY.

CD

o

-

-

H

_I

0

b

Q

•sinjojs Japnnm

•sanK i^ox

•uip?0

s.moH

S3l!W

SJI10JJ

£

saint

•sjiiOH

$■

■38I!W

02

sanoji

'sai!W

CO

's.moH

H*

S3I!W

CO

sjnou

*sei!K

W

■sanoH

H

*sanw

fc

sanoH

•S8|fl\[

•sjiioh

\\\.ons pajpin paB nrea
:uot^}idioaJci

papnop ^ipi^3 01
:.rB9iO = o :ssanipnoiQ

■tanramii\I

•mnraixBui

•u^aitt

•jsaMoi

•IsaqSiH

uBam

-r i —

IO

OS

in

CO

--

Cn

CO

—

~,

i,

g

t-

CO

CO

**

os

-

o

■r.

1

§s

CM

lO

rf

00

S)

■o

t-

JO

TO

00

i-<

^H

cm

co

CO

w oo n

-r ~t — i- n
n H cm cm CM

— t- 00

m cm o os

00

s

TT

CM

r-

TO

cm'

~

■*

00

lO
IO

i-

09
CM

00

CM

CO

■*

lO

CO

OS

o
cm

X

-*1

.n
in

^H CO — 1 i- ^H

CO CO 00 i-H

00 iO ■"-*«

w

iO

00

CM

—

CM

in CM f-

cm jo it ao

CO
IO
CO

ce

in

CO

o

00

CO

00

CO

o

OS

t-

—

CO

CM

o

OS

CM

CM

M

co
eo

0J

o
co

se-
er.

CO

o>

CO
CO

o

CO

-f

CM

CO

oo

00
CO

"'cf

Of

-1-
IO

c-
co

CO

CM

CO

OS

—

OS

CO

-p
in

ce

OS

CM
X

CO

CO

CO
CO

■*»<
-*

CM

•-T

CO
CO

co

-T

00

CM

cm

CO

00

OS

cs

OS

CM

OS

CO

OS

CO

1#

00

en
.oo

OS

o

CO

CO

CO
OS

CO

t-

OS
CM

in
cm

00
CM

CM

CM

CO

cm

CO

CO

-T

CM

*"

■*

cn

OS

o

CO
SO

-*

N

0:

CO

in

CO
0)

in

CO

o

OS
IQ

1?

00
^CP

o>
in
00

CO

oo

OS

CM

in
o

OS

o

"

SO
at

'CO

O

-f
CM

CO

co

o
eo

. -

OS

OS

o

CM OS t4 O CO
— • OS CO O0 CM

co »-i co oo -cr

CO ~ l-H ^-1

-h CM

-* OS

CO i-i

m

CO

-r

go

OS

m

cc"

i-

;-

iO

CO

—

1—

eo

in

Tj<

CO

m

o

JO

CM

CM

CO

01

eo

in

oo in m oo

t-

m

<-

CM

0>

o

c»

i-

00

CO

co

m

CO

OS

I-

o
oo ■

00

OS

o

o

os

in

s

t- CM -j JO

S S o*

cs cj m i»

eo 15

CO JO CO 00 — .

CM CM CM CM

11 CM JO ii

i- in cm i

CO CM

JO CO CO

o o o o o

CO CO CO CO JO

C} CO CO CM

O OS «i

-* rf in

CO CO CO

fl »

?, E

■< to o y. ^

cd

-T

-

—

V

d

u

7i

~ c

43 5

. 42

■a as

4= a

c3 O

h £

cc a;

^3 n

Z bC

- OJ

-1 u
<D

> CD
0> j3

13 ■"

* e>

^ s- °

H U an

a S a

5 §•*

S c -
a> «)

> s >>
5 2 ».

— - o

co B-

.5 9.9

K 3o3

MBLWHOI LIBRARY

UH 1TTX Z